Download

Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited
33 Bayswater Road Box 9111, Harare

Highlands, Harare E-mail: infor@blackcrystal.co.zw
Office: +263 (0) 242 480865
Mobile: +263 779 394 179
15 July 2019
Director – Environmental Protection

Environmental Management Agency
685/696 Lorraine Drive/Faber Road
Bluffhill
Harare
Dear Mr Chris Mushava
RE: ESIA REVIEW: GREAT DYKE INVESTMENTS – DARWENDALE PLATINUM MINE PROJECT
(EMA PROJECT NO. 8381)
With reference to the Minutes of meeting held on the 6th of March 2019 at the Environmental
Management Agency Head Office in Bluffhill Harare, in which you request the following:
i. Updated consultations with all stakeholders since the ones in documents are outdated.
Please refer to the Public Consultation Report, Volume III.
ii. Approved Siting of Works Plan
Please refer to Appendix A of the Main Environmental & Social Impact Assessment Report,
Volume I.
iii. Slimes dam designs and specifications for lining material to be used at the project.
A study of the slimes dam location was undertaken by SRK as part of the project feasibility
studies. This report is included in Appendix C of the Main Environmental & Social Impact
Assessment Report, Volume I. According to the report, SRK recommend a clay lining given the
soil types in the area.
Detailed slims dam designs and confirmation of the lining will be undertaken as part of the
detailed design phase following EIA project approval by EMA. The Slimes dam designs once
completed will be submitted to EMA for approval as required by the Environmental Management
(Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal Regulations, Statutory Instrument 6 of 2006, Part V, section
22 (2) which states:
Office: +263 242 480865
Mobile: +263 779 394 179
With effect from the date of publication of these regulations all new solid waste sites shall be
line with appropriate (as approved by the Agency) lining specific to the nature of the
environmental risk, whether it is an industrial, domestic, mining or any type of solid waste”
iv. Proof of mining rights for Great Dyke Investments (GDI) and also agreed resolutions with
Ministry of Mines in relation to current mining rights issued to different miners.
Please refer to Appendix A of the Main Environmental & Social Impact Assessment Report,
Volume I.
v. Agreed Relocation Action Plan has not been included in the document. The document only
covers the relocation framework. A comprehensive relocation plan including signed
Memorandum of Agreements with the affected farmers has to be done. This should be endorsed
by the District Administrator and the Local Authority.
Resettlement is an ongoing exercise. During the first phase of construction activities this will
consist of site clearance and fencing. This activity will take between 12 – 18 months. No
resettlement is anticipated during this phase.
However, all affected parties and the inventories of assets that will be affected for which
compensation will be paid has been documented. Copies of signed inventories are included in
Appendix D of the Resettlement Action Plan Report, Volume IV.
A resettlement committee chaired by Mr Simango, an affected farmer has been formed. Please
refer to Appendix C of the Public Consultation Report Volume II for minutes of meetings with
the affected parties.
Additionally, the Department of Lands Chegutu has finished the process of identifying land for
resettlement and has confirmed that there is land within the District for resettlement of the
affected families. Please refer to Appendix D of the Public Consultation Report, Volume III for
their written response.
GDI together with the Department of Lands, Chegutu will undertake an assessment of the
proposed resettlement sites in order to identify public infrastructure required to ensure that
resettled families are not worse off.
vi. Dziva Rambuya Mhazvi
The protection of Dziva Mbuya has been noted in the Cultural Heritage report and the National
Museums and Monuments will undertake a further assessment for its protection and preservation.
vii. The issues of liabilities on the already mined areas that need rehabilitation has to be clarified.
Office: +263 242 480865
Mobile: +263 779 394 179
GDI have stated that they are not liable for rehabilitating areas already mined. According to the
current legislation, the onus for rehabilitation lies with the former miners. However, if GDI
reworks old mined areas, the onus for rehabilitation will be on GDI.
Please find attached, the full package of the ESIA Reports - consisting of the detailed ESIA main report
Public Consultation Report, Environmental Management & Monitoring Report and the Resettlement
Action Plan Report the contents of which address your queries requests in more detail.
We trust that all is now in order and that the issuance of the EIA certificate to Great Dyke Investments
(Pvt) Ltd will proceed without any further delay.
Yours sincerely
Mrs N. Mandaba (Pr. Sci. Nat)

On Behalf of Black Crystal Consulting
DARWENDALE PLATINUM PROJECT ESIA REPORT JULY 2019
PROJECT PROPONENT GREAT DYKE INVESTMENTS PRIVATE LIMITED
DATE JULY 2019
DOCUMENT TITLE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

REPORT MAIN REPORT FOR THE PROPOSED
DARWENDALE PLATINUM MINE, VOLUME I
EMA PROJECT NUMBER 8381

EMA Reg. No. 8000068313
33 Bayswater Road
\ Highlands
Harare
Office: +263 (0) 242 480865
Mobile : +263 779 394 179
E-mail: infor@blackcrystal.co.zw
www.blackcrystal.co.zw
Great Dyke Investments Private Limited

112 Churchill Avenue
Gunhill, Harare
Office: +263 (0) 242 745237
ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL IMPACT

ASSESSMENT MAIN REPORT
VOLUME I
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT &

MONITORING PLAN
VOLUME II
PUBLIC CONSULTATION REPORT

VOLUME III
RESETTLEMENT & COMPENSATION ACTION

PLAN
VOLUME IV
CULTURAL HERITAGE REPORT

VOLUME V (SUBMITTED TO THE NATIONAL
MUSEUMS & MONUMENTS)
Copyright © 2019 by Black Crystal Consulting (Private) Limited
This report is the sole property of Black Crystal Consulting and Great Dyke Investments.
All rights reserved. No part of this report may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of the proponent and
the consultants, nor be otherwise circulated in any form of binding or cover other than that in which
it is produced here.
Caring for the environment beyond today vi | P a g e

PROJECT DETAILS
Project Name Darwendale Platinum Mine Project
Great Dyke Investments (Pvt) Ltd

Names and Addresses of 112 Churchill Avenue,
Proponents Gunhill,
Harare
Location of proposed development Darwendale, Chegutu, Mashonaland West Zimbabwe.
Company Profile Exploration and Mining of Platinum Group Metals (PGM)
Munashe Shava: Chief Operating Officer

112 Churchill Avenue,
Names and Details of Contact
Gunhill
Persons
mshava@greatdykeinvest.com
Cell: +263 77 215 1306
EMA Project Identification

8381
number
Report Date July 2019
Caring for the environment beyond today vii | P a g e

CONSULTANT DETAILS
Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited EMA Reg. No. 8000068313
Contact Person : Ngoni Mandaba (Pr. Sci. Nat)

Email : ngoni@blackcrystal.co.zw
Harare Office:
33 Bayswater Road
Highlands
Harare
P O Box 9111, Harare
E-mail: infor@blackcrystal.co.zw
Phone : +263 (0) 242 480865
Mobile : +263 779 394 179
Bulawayo Office:
P O Box FM 493,
Famona,
Bulawayo
Mobile: +263 772 126 963
Caring for the environment beyond today viii | P a g e

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEFINITIONS AND INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS ............................................................................................... XX

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................................... XXIV
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................................. 33
1.1 PROJECT JUSTIFICATION AND BACKGROUND ................................................................................................... 33
1.2 PROJECT PROPONENTS ................................................................................................................................. 34
1.3 TERMS OF REFERENCE .......................................................................................................................... 34
2 STUDY METHODOLOGY .................................................................................................................................... 35
2.1 DESKTOP REVIEW .................................................................................................................................... 35
2.2 SITE VISITS ................................................................................................................................................ 35
2.3 SPECIALIST STUDY METHODS ............................................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 Biodiversity Survey ................................................................................................................................ 35
2.3.2 Soil Sampling ......................................................................................................................................... 38
2.3.3 Soil quality assessment ......................................................................................................................... 39
2.3.4 Land Use Assessment ........................................................................................................................... 41
2.3.5 Archaeological Assessment ................................................................................................................... 41
2.3.6 Mapping ................................................................................................................................................. 42
2.3.7 Public Consultations .............................................................................................................................. 42
2.4 ASSUMPTIONS AND LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................... 42
2.5 PROJECT CATEGORISATION ........................................................................................................................... 43
2.6 PROJECT LOCATION ....................................................................................................................................... 44
2.6.1 Regional level ........................................................................................................................................ 44
2.6.2 Local level .............................................................................................................................................. 44
2.6.3 Administrative setting ............................................................................................................................. 47
3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................... 49
3.1 UNDERGROUND MINING................................................................................................................................. 50
3.1.1 Description of mining method ................................................................................................................ 53
3.1.2 Mine Access, Development & Stopping ................................................................................................. 55
3.1.3 Underground Ore Handling .................................................................................................................... 57
3.1.4 Mine Ventilation ..................................................................................................................................... 58
3.1.5 Underground Infrastructure and Services .............................................................................................. 60
3.1.6 Underground facilities required .............................................................................................................. 62
3.2 MINERAL PROCESSING AND PROCESS PLANT ........................................................................................... 64
3.2.1 Mining and Processing Waste ............................................................................................................... 69
3.2.2 Surface infrastructure and equipment required ...................................................................................... 70
3.2.3 Services and Civil Infrastructure ............................................................................................................ 72
3.2.4 Services ................................................................................................................................................. 74
3.3 BUILDINGS AND INFRASTRUCTURE.................................................................................................................. 78
3.3.1 Existing Infrastructure: On site ............................................................................................................... 78
3.3.2 Proposed on site buildings ..................................................................................................................... 79
3.3.3 Existing infrastructure: Off site ............................................................................................................... 82
3.3.4 Project Infrastructure and Services required Off-site• ............................................................................ 83
3.3.5 Roads ..................................................................................................................................................... 85
3.4 HUMAN RESOURCES ............................................................................................................................... 86
3.5 PROJECT TIMELINE .................................................................................................................................. 87
3.6 PROJECT COSTS AND BILL OF QUANTITIES ......................................................................................... 89
4 ALTERNATIVES CONSIDERED.......................................................................................................................... 90
Caring for the environment beyond today ix | P a g e

4.1 THE DO NOTHING ALTERNATIVE .................................................................................................................... 90

4.2 TAILINGS DAM FACILITY SITE ......................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.1 Identified Potential tailings dam Sites .................................................................................................... 91
4.3 MINING ALTERNATIVES .................................................................................................................................. 96
4.3.1 Open Pit mining ..................................................................................................................................... 96
5 REGULATORY LEGISLATIVE FRAMEWORK .................................................................................................... 97
5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................... 97
5.1.1 National Environmental Policy ............................................................................................................... 97
5.1.2 Environmental Impact Assessment Policy Guidelines, (1997) ............................................................... 97
5.1.3 Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27 ................................................................................... 98
5.1.4 Statutory Instrument No. 7 of 2007 the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact
Assessments and Ecosystems Protection Regulations) ...................................................................................... 98
5.1.5 Statutory Instrument 7 of 2007 of the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact Assessment
and Ecosystem Protection) Regulations, 2007..................................................................................................... 99
5.1.6 Forest (Control of Firewood, Timber and Forest Produce) Regulations, SI 116 of 2012 ..................... 100
5.1.7 Parks and Wildlife Act 20:14 Forest (Control of Firewood, Timber and Forest Produce) Regulations, SI
116 of 2012......................................................................................................................................................... 100
5.1.8 Parks and Wildlife Act, 20:14: Specially Protected Plants ................................................................... 101
The EMA guidelines (1997) lists the major issues associated with mining developments and those relevant to
biodiversity are: .................................................................................................................................................. 101
5.1.9 Mines and Minerals Amendment Bill, 2007 .......................................................................................... 102
5.2 WATER MANAGEMENT AND POLLUTION CONTROL .......................................................................... 103
5.2.1 WATER ACT, CHAPTER 20:24 ........................................................................................................... 103
5.2.2 Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27 ................................................................................. 103
5.2.3 Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations, 2007 SI 6 ................. 104
5.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................................................... 106
5.3.2 Import and Transit of hazardous substances and waste regulations, SI 77, 2009 .............................. 106
5.3.3 Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations, SI 6 of 2007 ............. 106
5.3.4 Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste Management) Regulations, 2007, SI 10 .................. 108
5.3.5 Environmental Management (Plastic Packaging & Plastic Bottles (Amendment) Regulations, 84/2012
110
5.4 AIR QUALITY ............................................................................................................................................ 110
5.4.1 Environmental Management (Atmospheric Pollution Control) Regulations, Si 72 /2009 ..................... 110
5.4.2 Environmental and Natural Resources Management (Prohibition and Control of Ozone Depleting
Substances and Ozone Depleting Substances Dependent Equipment) Regulations, SI 7/2011 ....................... 113
5.5 NOISE ....................................................................................................................................................... 114
5.5.2 International Finance Corporation Noise Standards ............................................................................ 114
5.6 EXPLOSIVES ............................................................................................................................................... 114
5.6.1 Explosives Regulations SI 72 (1989) ................................................................................................... 114
5.7 CONSERVATION AND PRESERVATION OF NATURAL HERITAGE ..................................................... 117
5.7.1 National Monuments and Museums Act 25:01 .................................................................................... 117
5.8 REHABILITATION OF MINED AREAS ..................................................................................................... 121
5.8.1 Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 ............................................................................................... 121
5.8.3 Mining (General) Regulations, Notice 247 of 1977 .............................................................................. 122
5.9 STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION .......................................................................................................... 123
5.10 SOCIO ECONOMIC LEGAL FRAMEWORK.......................................................................................................... 123
5.10.1 Zimbabwe Agenda for Sustainable Socio-Economic Transformation (Zim-Asset) ......................... 123
5.11 ROAD DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................. 124
5.11.1 Rural District Councils Act, Chapter 29:13 ...................................................................................... 124
Caring for the environment beyond today x|P a g e

5.11.2 Roads Act, Chapter 13:18 ............................................................................................................... 124

5.12 SUMMARY OF LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS & ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS REQUIRED............. 126
5.13 INTERNATIONAL FINANCE CORPORATION STANDARDS ................................................................................... 128
Performance Standard 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and ................... 128
6 BIO-PHYSICAL BASELINE SETTING ............................................................................................................... 133
6.1 TOPOGRAPHY ............................................................................................................................................. 133
6.1.1 Climate ................................................................................................................................................. 134
6.1.2 Geology ................................................................................................................................................ 135
6.1.3 Seismic Risk ........................................................................................................................................ 140
6.1.4 Hydrology and Hydrology ..................................................................................................................... 140
6.1.5 Soils ..................................................................................................................................................... 162
6.1.6 Current Land Use ................................................................................................................................. 169
6.1.7 Vegetation / Flora ................................................................................................................................. 175
6.1.8 Birds/Avifauna ...................................................................................................................................... 182
6.1.9 Wildlife/Fauna ...................................................................................................................................... 186
6.1.10 Aquatic Fauna ................................................................................................................................. 187
6.1.11 Habitats and sensitivity ................................................................................................................... 188
6.1.12 Noise and Air quality ....................................................................................................................... 191
6.2 ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURAL HERITAGE ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................. 194
6.3 EVALUATION ............................................................................................................................................... 196
6.4 REVIEW OF PREVIOUS WORK ........................................................................................................................ 197
6.5 SITES LOCATED .......................................................................................................................................... 200
6.5.1 Sites on Map 1970 C4 Makwiro ........................................................................................................... 203
6.5.2 Sites on Map 1970 D3 Norton .............................................................................................................. 221
6.6 OBSERVATIONS SOUTHERN SECTION ........................................................................................................... 224
6.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................ 225
6.7.1 Demographic profile ............................................................................................................................. 225
6.7.2 Economic activities .............................................................................................................................. 226
6.7.3 Shrines and Religious Places .............................................................................................................. 226
6.7.4 Education Facilities and health facilities .............................................................................................. 227
6.8 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION................................................................................................................... 227
6.8.1 Current Modes of Transport ................................................................................................................. 229
6.9 PREDICTED TRIP GENERATION LEVELS ........................................................................................................ 231
6.9.1 Road Safety Recommendations .......................................................................................................... 231
7 ANALYSIS OF POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS .............................................................................. 233
7.1 PLANNING PHASE .................................................................................................................................. 233
7.1.1 Siting of Mining operations ................................................................................................................... 233
7.1.2 Location of Tailings Storage Facility .................................................................................................... 234
7.1.3 Potential impact on Shrine and Dziva Rambuya .................................................................................. 234
7.1.4 Potential impact on Dam Wall .............................................................................................................. 234
7.1.5 Destruction of sites of cultural significance .......................................................................................... 234
7.1.6 Destruction of Historical Site: Grid Reference - 36 K 0235183 8021240 ............................................. 235
7.1.7 Water use conflict ................................................................................................................................ 235
7.1.8 Resettlement and compensation ......................................................................................................... 235
7.1.9 Land use conflict .................................................................................................................................. 238
7.2 IMPACTS DURING CONTRACTOR SITE ESTABLISHMENT.................................................................................... 238
7.2.1 Environmental degradation .................................................................................................................. 238
7.2.2 Pollution of natural resources from uncontained spillages ................................................................... 239
7.2.3 Potential pollution of water courses ..................................................................................................... 239
7.2.4 Employment disputes ........................................................................................................................... 239
7.2.5 Disturbance to cultural heritage sites and loss of cultural value .......................................................... 239
Caring for the environment beyond today xi | P a g e

7.2.6 Potential dispute and possible sabotage of project .............................................................................. 240

7.2.7 Loss of aesthetic value ........................................................................................................................ 240
7.3 IMPACTS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE........................................................................................ 240
7.3.1 Vegetation clearing .............................................................................................................................. 240
7.3.2 Disturbance / Loss of Wild and Bird Life and Habitats ......................................................................... 241
7.3.3 Impact on special or protected species ................................................................................................ 242
7.3.4 Disturbance / Loss of Bird Life ............................................................................................................. 242
7.3.5 Contamination of surface water resources .......................................................................................... 242
7.3.6 Surface water ingress to boreholes ..................................................................................................... 243
7.3.7 Pollution of water resources from Diamond drilling .............................................................................. 243
7.3.8 Soil erosion .......................................................................................................................................... 243
7.3.9 Soil pollution and land pollution ........................................................................................................... 244
7.3.10 Uncontrolled/wild fires ..................................................................................................................... 245
7.3.11 Hunting and snaring of wildlife and destruction of bee hives .......................................................... 245
7.3.12 Disturbance to local communities and employees from dust .......................................................... 245
7.3.13 Increase in noise levels ................................................................................................................... 246
7.3.14 Employee and public and safety risk ............................................................................................... 247
7.3.15 Employee health risks ..................................................................................................................... 247
7.3.16 Dust pollution emanating from the movement of construction vehicles .......................................... 247
7.3.17 Employment creation ...................................................................................................................... 248
7.3.18 Influx of people searching for employment ..................................................................................... 248
7.3.19 Promotion of commercial activities .................................................................................................. 249
7.3.20 Employee safety risks and unfair labour practices .......................................................................... 249
7.3.21 Disturbance/Loss of Grave Sites ..................................................................................................... 249
7.3.22 Increased Traffic ............................................................................................................................. 250
7.4 OPERATIONAL PHASE .................................................................................................................................. 250
7.4.1 Disturbance of landscape .................................................................................................................... 250
7.4.2 Impacts on Flora .................................................................................................................................. 250
7.4.3 Increase in Deforestation and land clearing ......................................................................................... 251
7.4.4 Impacts on Fauna ................................................................................................................................ 251
7.4.5 Impacts of lighting on insect fauna ....................................................................................................... 252
7.4.6 Bird Collisions with Transmission Lines ............................................................................................... 253
7.4.7 Pollution of underground water resources from mining operations and tailings dam .......................... 253
7.4.8 Potential impact on surface water resources from tailings storage and handling ................................ 254
7.4.9 Mine dewatering: pollution of underground water ................................................................................ 254
7.4.10 Potential Acid Mine drainage from waste rock dumps .................................................................... 255
7.4.11 Blocked drains and siltation/pollution of rivers ................................................................................ 255
7.4.12 Water use conflict – Pumping water from Darwendale dam ........................................................... 255
7.4.13 Water use conflict: Use of existing boreholes ................................................................................. 256
7.4.14 Employment creation ...................................................................................................................... 256
7.4.15 Impacts on Tourism and Aesthetic Value ........................................................................................ 257
7.4.16 Road Traffic Safety ......................................................................................................................... 257
7.4.17 Noise from underground blasting .................................................................................................... 257
8 PROJECT DECOMMISSIONING / CLOSURE PHASE ..................................................................................... 259
8.1 REHABILITATION OF MINED AREAS ..................................................................................................... 259
8.1.1 Removal of Buildings and Machinery ................................................................................................... 259
9 POST EIA REPORTING REQUIREMENTS....................................................................................................... 260
9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS ..................................................................................................................... 260
9.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING REPORTS ........................................................................................ 260
10 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................................. 261
Caring for the environment beyond today xii | P a g e

11 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................................. 262

APPENDICES .............................................................................................................................................................. 269
APPENDIX A: GREAT DYKE INVESTMENTS COMPANY DOCUMENTS ............................................................... 270
APPENDIX B: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AGENCY RESPONSES ............................................................ 271
APPENDIX C: SRK TAILINGS DAM FEASIBILITY REPORT ..................................................................................... 272
APPENDIX D: BILL OF QUANTITIES ......................................................................................................................... 273
APPENDIX E: SURFACE WATER RESULTS FROM EMAL ...................................................................................... 274
APPENDIX F: GROUND WATER RESULTS FROM EMAL ........................................................................................ 275
APPENDIX G: SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS ................................................................................................................. 276
APPENDIX H: VEGETATION DATA SHEETS ................................................................................................................ V
APPENDIX I: BIRDS CHECKLIST .................................................................................................................................... I
List of Maps
Map 1: Location of the mining claim for the Darwendale Platinum Project. 46
Map 2: Administrative Map 48
Map 3: Proposed mine layout plan 71
Map 4: General hydrology of the project site 156
Map 5: Distribution of soils in the northern section of the project site 163
Map 6: Vegetation map of claim area 176
Map 7: Location of Lake Manyame (formerly Robertson) and Lake Chivero (formerly Robert Mcllwaine)
Recreational Parks, 188
Map 8: Habitat Sensitivity Map 191
Map 9; Location of cultural heritage sites and significance 201
List of Figures
Figure 1: Soil sampling and observation points in the northern section of project area. 39
Figure 2: Regional Project Context 44
Figure 3: Proposed Production Profile 50
Figure 4: Mining Blocks with Portals 52
Figure 5: Mining blocks 53
Figure 6: Schematic of Decline and Production Sections 54
Figure 7: Typical Room and Pillar Section 54
Figure 8: Stoping Section Layout 56
Figure 9: LHD Tipping & Conveyor Loading Station. 58
Figure 10: Portal RAW Ventilation Layout. 59
Figure 11: Initial Development Ventilation Layout 59
Figure 12: Cross Section through Decline Conveyor Haulage 61
Figure 13: Cross Section through strike Conveyor Haulage 61
Figure 14: Portal 1 Initial Capital Footprint. 62
Figure 15: LHD Tipping & Conveyor Loading Station. 63
Figure 16: Simplified process flow 66
Figure 17: Conveyor Road Underpass 72
Figure 18: Portal 1 Waste Management Area. 76
Figure 19: Access Roads 85
Caring for the environment beyond today xiii | P a g e

Figure 20: Total Labour Split 87

Figure 21: Geological layering 136
Figure 22: Vertical Succession of the Great Dyke 137
Figure 23: Contours showing depth to static water levels in random diamond drill hole 150
Figure 24: Ground water elevation contours across the northern half of Mining Lease 03 151
Figure 25: Sub-division of Hunyani Estate 3B into residential stands 175
Figure 26: Darwendale Ramsar site (EMA, 2015) 189
Figure 27: Geology of the Northern Section of Mining Claim 195
Figure 28: Geology of the Southern Section of Mining Claim 196
Figure 29: Sites reported for map Makwiro 1730 C4 199
Figure 30: Sites reported for map Norton 1730 D3 199
Figure 31: Combined value for sites reported 200
Figure 32: Current investigation - sites according to archaeological period and material present 202
Figure 33: Traffic count summary diagram 228
List of Tables
Table 1: Selected soil quality indicators for the Darwendale project site 40
Table 2: Heavy metal enrichment status of soil based on the RTE indices, 41
Table 3: Underground mobile machinery 56
Table 4: Projected PGE and base metal recoveries to concentrate 67
Table 5: On Surface Mobile equipment required 82
Table 6: Tailings Storage Facility site ranking 94
Table 7: Classification of effluent standards for discharge 104
Table 8: Permitted amounts of environmental dust for each permit band 110
Table 9: Classification of air emissions and maximum permissible discharge 111
Table 10: ZimAsset Projections sector projections 123
Table 11: List of Environmental legislative requirements and permits required 126
Table 12: Mining Lease 31 and adjacent areas, Existing boreholes and ground water sites 146
Table 13: Darwendale Platinum Project – Borehole Details and Ground Water Levels as of 10/2/2016 147
Table 14: Water sample locations with UTM co-ordinates and comparative EC values 157
Table 15: Analysis of surface waters from Manyame Dam and downstream in the Manyame River 158
Table 16: Analysis of four ground waters collected from the Darwendale Platinum Project area 159
Table 17: Number of Bird Species recorded in three habitat types 183
Table 18: Baseline data for waterbird numbers on Lake Manyame 185
Table 19: List of larger wildlife species currently occurring in study area 187
Table 20: Main habitat types and levels of modification and sensitivity 189
Table 21: Dust and Noise Survey Results 193
Table 22: Current investigation - archaeological period 202
Table 23: Current investigation - site significance 203
Table 24: Current investigation - type of site 203
Table 25: Population figures 225
Table 26: Average daily traffic volumes 229
Table 27: Land affected by the Darwendale Project 236
List of Images
Image 1: Biodiversity Survey route 37
Image 2: Biodiversity way points along biodiversity route 37
Image 3: Existing on site infrastructure 78
Caring for the environment beyond today xiv | P a g e

Image 4: Potential Tailings Dam Sites 92

Image 5: The Lake Chivero and Manyame Recreational Areas 155
Image 6: Boundary overlap between the mining lease area and Manyame Recreational Park 172
Image 7: Sampling Points 192
List of Photos
Photo 1: Outlets at Darwendale Dam 83
Photo 2: GDI Weathering Library 138
Photo 3: Highly weathered and fractured websterite in the wall of the bulk open pit sample 139
Photo 4: The drilling of monitoring borehole 142
Photo 5: Drip irrigation from the Chifombo family borehole 143
Photo 6: Ground water in a chrome pit at 12 mbgl 144
Photo 7: The northern extremity of the western Dyke margin wetland before influence to the Manyame
River 145
Photo 8: Water level monitoring point at diamond drill hole 036-20 149
Photo 9: The GDI bulk sample open pit 152
Photo 10: Eutrophic water in Lake Manyame supports algae bloom and lakeshore reed beds 153
Photo 11: Manyame River looking downstream from the new road bridge 154
Photo 12: Receiver tanks for borehole water at the GDI Office. 161
Photo 13: Land use on clays 164
Photo 14: (a) Self-mulching properties of the black clay soil at a disturbed site near the Chinese opencast
mine 165
Photo 15: Land use on clay loams 165
Photo 16: Land use on red clays 167
Photo 17: Land use on sandy loams 168
Photo 18: Agricultural activities 170
Photo 19: Mining activities 171
Photo 20: Built structures within the mine lease area 173
Photo 21: Built structures within the mine lease area 174
Photo 22: Brachystegia – Julbernardia woodland on red fersiallitic soils on top of ridge. 178
Photo 23: Mixed woodland on edges of ridge. Tall trees in background are B.glaucescens. 178
Photo 24: Manyame River looking downstream from current road bridge. 178
Photo 25: Riparian woodland and thicket fringing the Makwiro river in south of claim area. 179
Photo 26: Open Andropogon-Setaria grassland with scattered Acacia polycantha trees on black vertisols.
179
Photo 27: Aloe excelsa colony growing in the northern hills of the project area 180
Photo 28: Ansellia africana epiphytic orchid 181
Photo 29: Aerangis verdickii 181
Photo 30: Tridactyle tridentata 182
Photo 31: Fish Eagle 184
Photo 32: Adult Fish Eagle incubating eggs. 184
Photo 33: Site 1- Stone Age and Historical 204
Photo 34: Site 2- Stone Age 205
Photo 35: Site 3 - Stone Age 206
Photo 39: Site 7 - Middle Stone Age 209
Caring for the environment beyond today xv | P a g e

Photo 40: Site 8 - Farming Community/Historical Site 212

Photo 42: Site 10 - Farming Community 215
Photo 43: Site 11- Stone Age 216
Photo 44: Site 12 - Modern Heritage 217
Photo 46: Site 14 - Farming Community/Historical 218
Photo 48: Site 16 - Middle Stone Age 220
Photo 49: Site 17- Historical 221
Photo 50: Site 18 - Later Stone Age 222
Photo 51: Site 19 - Farming Community 223
Photo 53: Important aspects in the southern portion of the Mining Lease 224
Photo 54: ZINWA treated water supply reservoirs to ZIPAM and adjacent lodges 256
Caring for the environment beyond today xvi | P a g e

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
ABA Acid Based Accounting
ADT Articulated Dump Trucks
Agreement on the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory

AEWA
Water birds
AWC African Waterfowl Census
Ca Calcium
Cd Cadmium
CEC Cation Exchange Capacity
CMS Convention on Migratory Species
Cr Chromium
CRS Coordinate Reference System
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EMA Environmental Management Agency
EMAL Environmental Management Agency Laboratory
EMP Environmental Management Plan
EP Environmental Prospectus
EFC Early Farming Communities
ES Early Stone Age
ESIA Environmental & Social Impact Assessment
FAO Food and Agricultural Organisation
FC Farming Communities
Caring for the environment beyond today xvii | P a g e

GDI Great Dyke Investments
GPS Global Positioning System
IBR Inverted Box Rib
K Potassium
KML Keyhole Mark-up Language
LFC Late Farming Community
LHD Load Haul Dumper
LMRP Lake Manyame Recreational Park
LS Late Stone Age
LOM Life of Mine
MFC Middle Farming Community
Mg Magnesium
Mn Manganese
MS Middle Stone Age
Mtp Metric tonnes per annum
Na Sodium
Ni Nickel
NMMZ National Museums and Monuments Zimbabwe
Pb Lead
PGM Platinum Group Metals
PFC Power Factor Correction
Caring for the environment beyond today xviii | P a g e

RAW Return Airway
RoM Run of Mine
SA Stone Age
SI Statutory Instrument
SPR Standard Penetration Rates
TSF Tailings Storage Facility
ZPWMA Zimbabwe Parks and Wildlife Management Authority
ZIPAM Zimbabwe Institute of Public Administration Management
Caring for the environment beyond today xix | P a g e

DEFINITIONS AND INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS
BIODIVERSITY: The Convention on Biological Diversity, of which Zimbabwe is a signatory, defines

biodiversity as “the variability among living organisms from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial,
marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are a part; this
includes diversity within species, between species, and of ecosystems”
RAMSAR: The Ramsar Convention is an international treaty for the conservation and sustainable
use of wetlands. It is also known as the Convention on Wetlands. Zimbabwe has seven Ramsar
sites and became a signatory to Ramsar in 2013. http://www.ramsar.org/. Under the Ramsar
Convention on Wetlands the two concepts of wise use and site designation are fully compatible and
mutually reinforcing. Contracting Parties are expected to designate sites for the List of Wetlands of
International Importance “on account of their international significance in terms of ecology, botany,
zoology, limnology or hydrology” (Article 2.2), AND to “formulate and implement their planning so as
to promote the conservation of the wetlands included in the List, and as far as possible the wise use
of wetlands in their territory” (Article 3.1) (Ramsar Convention Secretariat, 2010).
CMS: The Convention on the Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals - more commonly
abbreviated to just the Convention on Migratory Species (CMS) or the Bonn Convention aims to
conserve terrestrial, marine and avian migratory species throughout their range. It is an
intergovernmental treaty, concluded under the aegis of the United Nations Environment Programme,
concerned with the conservation of wildlife and habitats on a global scale. Zimbabwe became a party
to this convention in 2012.
AEWA: The Agreement on the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory Waterbirds, or African-

Eurasian Waterbird Agreement (AEWA) is an independent international treaty developed under the
auspices of the Convention on Migratory Species. It was founded to coordinate efforts to conserve
bird species migrating between European and African nations, and its current scope stretches from
the Arctic to South Africa, encompassing the Canadian archipelago and the Middle East as well as
Europe and Africa. The agreement focuses on bird species that depend on wetlands for at least
part of their lifecycle and cross international borders in their migration patterns. It currently covers
254 species. Zimbabwe is a contracting party.
IWC/AWC/IWWB: The African Waterfowl Census is an extension of the International Waterfowl

Census, co-ordinated by the International Wildfowl and Wetlands Bureau. Zimbabwe has taken part
since 1992 and counts are conducted in January and July of every year by members of BirdLife
Zimbabwe. The International Waterbird Census has become a vital source of information for the
conservation and management of wetlands and waterbirds around the world
(www.birdlifezimbabwe.org).
HABITAT: International Finance Corporation defines habitat, as “a terrestrial, freshwater, or marine

geographical unit or airway that supports assemblages of living organisms and their interactions with
the non-living environment”. Habitats are divided into modified, natural and critical. Critical habitats
are a subset of modified or natural habitats.
Caring for the environment beyond today xx | P a g e

Ecosystem Services are defined as the “benefits that people, including businesses, derive from
ecosystems”. The services are divided into four types:
 provisioning services, which are the products people obtain from ecosystems, for example
freshwater, food, timber, medicinal plants;
 regulating services, which are the benefits people obtain from the regulation of ecosystem
processes, for example prevention of flooding and water purification by wetlands, carbon
storage and carbon sequestration by woodlands;
 cultural services, which are the nonmaterial benefits people obtain from ecosystems and
include recreation and aesthetics, sacred sites;
 Supporting services, which are the natural processes that maintain the other services such
as nutrient cycling and primary production (photosynthesis).
All of the above ecosystem services occur in and around the project site.
Cultural Resources: The legacy of physical artefacts and intangible attributes of a group or society
that are inherited from past generations, maintained in the present and bestowed for the benefit of
future generations.
 Tangible cultural resources - these include buildings, books, works of art and artefacts.
 Intangible culture resources - refers to folklore traditions, language and knowledge.
 Natural heritage - refers to cultural significant landscapes and biodiversity.
Stone Age (SA)

The earliest archaeological material belongs to the Stone Age, the product of mobile groups of early
humans and later Homo sapiens who moved across the landscape extracting their living from the
veld. They made their tools of wood and stone, and it is the latter which has survived and is of
interest. The types of tools and their associations with each other and the landscape provide
information on prehistoric behaviour patterns. The changing nature of human activity and the
standardised tool types that they have created allow result in several markedly different temporal
phases:
The Early Stone Age (ESA)

This dates from 1,500,000 to about 200,000 years before present. The tools are invariably large
pieces made on both cobbles and large flakes. They are characterised by rough choppers made
from shattered cobbles; characteristic pear-shaped hand axes; straight-ended cleavers; and
cuboidal picks. Variations in the shape, size and frequency of these tools distinguish various sub-
phases or traditions - Olduwan (oldest); Acheulean, Bembezi, and Charama (youngest).
In Zimbabwe most ESA material is disturbed, in secondary contexts. It is found in the alluvial gravels
of the main watercourses and in large vlei areas. The best known sites are at Victoria Falls, Gweru
Kopje, Hope Fountain (Bulawayo), the Bembezi River and the river gravels of the Manyame River
Caring for the environment beyond today xxi | P a g e

when soil and gravel was being extracted for the construction of both the Chivero and Darwendale
Dams.
The Middle Stone Age (MSA)

Dating from 200,000 to 30,000 years ago, these remains are the product of large roving bands of
humans who followed the movements of big game animals. They left behind an assemblage of
stone tools characterised by triangular points (probably spear heads) and straight-sided rectangular
pieces called blades.
MSA artefacts are most common in open-air sites and occur throughout the country. These tools
are the most frequently located stone artefacts. Material has been excavated from many caves,
while it is especially common along the Great Dyke where it litters the grassy margins.
The Late Stone Age (LSA)

This material is associated with the rock paintings and dates from 30,000 to 500 years before
present. They are the tool assemblages of the classic Southern African Hunter-gatherer such as
those who survive as the Khoesan people of western Zimbabwe and Botswana. They made very
small stone artefacts (scrapers and projectile pieces) that were probably hafted in wood or bone
shafts and handles. These tools are usually found in natural rock shelters which may or may not be
painted. Isolated open-air sites have been recorded. These consisted of low branch and grass
shelters and all that remains are the circular stone foundation of rocks used as support. LSA sites
are found throughout the country, although there was an apparent preference for granitic areas
where natural caves and shelters are present.
Farming Communities (FC)

From about 2 000 years ago pastoralism and agriculture became a feature of the Zimbabwean
plateau. These communities lived in semi-permanent villages and produced iron and ceramics. Old
villages are marked by burnt clay from the walls of houses and grain bins (dhaka); grindstones of
various forms; sherds (fragments) of broken clay vessels; and sometimes furnaces and related iron-
working remains. Through time material culture, more especially ceramic decoration styles,
changed. Archaeologists refer to a known historical template of these decorative styles to identify
the different periods. Very generally this period is divided into two phases:
Early Farming Community (EFC)

EFC were characterised by large villages, often found in low-lying open place near major water
sources or at the base of some feature of prominent relief. Their pottery style is characterised by
broad incised lines and by square impressions made by stamping the wet clay with a comb-like tool.
These settlements dated to between AD. 200-1100.
Late Farming Community (LFC)

From AD. 1200 societies became more internally complicated, culminating in the rise of the
Zimbabwe State. This saw the emergence of class differentiation, divine kingship, carefully made
stonewalls, an elite monopoly over cattle, gold, tin and copper production and extensive foreign
trade. The states of Great Zimbabwe (AD 1300-1550) and Khami (AD1500-1800) are the best
Caring for the environment beyond today xxii | P a g e

known of these entities. They were followed by the smaller, Dynastic polities in the Nineteenth
Century as regional control fragmented.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxiii | P a g e

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Great Dyke Investments Private Limited (GDI) has Special Mining lease title over Mining Lease No.
03 (ML03), which covers an area of approximately 6,500 hectares of the Northern part of Hartley
Platinum Complex, along the Great Dyke extending for some 20km south from the Manyame River
just downstream of the Darwendale Dam wall to the Saruwe River on Cromdale Estate North of
Selous. An earlier Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) was carried out by Messrs
Ascon Africa Private Limited, Consulting Engineers in August 2011 to cover the exploration phase
and bulk sample open pit excavation by Ruschrome Mining Private Limited, predecessors to GDI.
This ESIA report covers the mining and infrastructure development phase of the project, with
emphasis on the Northern reserve area.
Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited (Black Crystal) was sub-contracted by DRA Projects Pty
Ltd, South Africa, on behalf of the project proponent Great Dyke Investment (Pvt) Ltd. (GDI) to
undertake the Environmental Prospectus and Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA)
of their proposed mining project (The Darwendale Project) in accordance with the Environmental
Management Act, Chapter 20:14, schedule 1 and the Environmental Management (Impact
Assessment & Ecosystems Protection) Regulations SI 7 of 2007 which require that a detailed ESIA
be undertaken for all proposed mining projects. The ESIA also aims to meet the Equator Principles
and International Finance Corporation (IFC) requirements. The proposed project is a Category C
project according to the IFC project categorisation.
Great Dyke Investments is a 50:50 joint venture company between the Government of Zimbabwe
and Russian Investors. The company’s key activities are the exploration and mining of Platinum
Group Metals (PGM).
PROJECT LOCATION
At local level, the Darwendale Mine Project is located on BA Hunyani Estate 3 (GPS reading: 30 o
29’ 00”E; 17o 52’ 00”S) in the Chegutu District of Mashonaland West Province in Zimbabwe. The
nearest town is Norton located 20km to the east and approximately 24km from the site by road.
Access from the capital Harare is via the R5 highway to Bulawayo, branching off west at Norton into
the Darwendale paved road at the 41km peg, and travelling 19km before turning left into the Robert
Mugabe highway to Zvimba. After travelling for 4 km turn right into an unformed farm track and travel
1.5km to the site. The BA Hunyani Estate 3 borders the Manyame Recreational Park approximately
3.5km to the north east and the settlement of Darwendale lies 17km due north. The Darwendale
Dam is an important feature of the Recreational Park and a major source of water for the process
plant for Zimbabwe Platinum Mines Ltd (Zimplats) which lies approximately 30km due south of the
proposed project site. The main railway line from Harare to Bulawayo runs 2.5km south of the project
area and can be accessed at the Kutama and Makwiro sidings.
ADMINISTRATIVE SETTING
Administratively, the project falls within wards 13 and 14 of Norton Constituency, under Chegutu
District, and a small portion of Ward 21 of Zvimba South Constituency under Makonde Rural District,
but is administered by the National Parks Authority as it is part of the Manyame Recreational Park.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxiv | P a g e

Therefore, two Rural District Councils share administrative jurisdiction of the project area; that is,
Zvimba Rural District Council and Chegutu Rural District Council. The Traditional Administrative
head is Chief Chivero.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The proposed mining operations will consist of underground operations. The mine is scheduled to
mine and process 280 000 tons Run of Mine (RoM) ore per month that is 3.36 metric tonnes per
annum over a period of 30 years. The scheduled throughput will be sustained by two portals mined
simultaneously. Each portal is sized for a nominal production of 140 000 tonnes RoM ore with
supporting infrastructure designed to handle a monthly peak of 180 000 tons. A single 280 000
t/month processing plant will be constructed to process RoM ore into high grade concentrate for
further beneficiation offsite, outside Zimbabwe.
BASELINE SETTING
Land use
The current land use consists of agriculture, mining, recreation (including fisheries); natural
woodland and open natural grassland and seasonal wetlands and civil structures (buildings and civil
structures)
Topography
The central gabbronorite ridge dominates the topography north from the Railway line to its synclinal
closure just south of the Manyame River in the north. The elevation is consistently above 1370 masl
with the low bounding scarp becoming more prominent northwards and up the western contact with
the ultramafic rocks. The Manyame River reaches an elevation of 1320 masl at the road bridge
downstream of the Darwendale Dam. Again the western Dyke margin is occupied by a north-
trending tributary wetland to the Manyame where the elevation is about 1310 masl.
Climate
Minimum and Maximum Temperatures
The average annual minimum temperature recorded for Chibero station between 1969 and 2007
was 11.1°C whilst the average annual maximum temperature was 27.1°C recorded between the
same years. The highest temperatures may exceed 30oC in October of any one season.
Rainfall events are usually of short duration with limited periods of high intensity of the
thunderstorm variety. Annual average rainfall ranges between 1961mm and 741mm.
Geology
The Great Dyke of Zimbabwe cuts the granite-greenstone terrain of the Zimbabwe Craton along a
NNW-trending gash that is some 550km long. It comprises four contiguous lopolithic layered
igneous complexes. Each complex of the Great Dyke may be broadly defined as having an upper
mafic succession of gabbro and norite and a lower sequence of ultramafic units comprising
pyroxenite, dunite and chromitite as essentially mono-mineralic cumulates. Most of the surface
expression of olivine cumulates, namely the dunites and harzburgites, show extensive alteration to
Caring for the environment beyond today xxv | P a g e

serpentinite, the degree of which decreases with depth and is less apparent in hartzburgite. The
ultramafic sequence comprises a number of cyclic units made up of these alternating rock-types. Up
to six ultramafic cycles are progressively exposed northwards up the western margin of the Dyke,
whilst three cycles are recognized in the east before the ultramafic sequence becomes masked by
the Darwendale Dam. The northward closure of the gabbronorite and progressive horizons beyond
the Darwendale Dam wall together with repetition of individual cyclic horizons up the east and west
Dyke flanks define the synclinal nature of the Hartley Complex structure with a general axial plunge
to the south. The Main Sulphide Zone (MSZ), which represents the platinum group mineral (PGM),
copper, nickel and gold ore horizon, occupies a stratigraphic position that is towards the top of what
is referred to as the P1 Pyroxenite layer where this merges into an ultramafic rock referred to as
websterite. The top of the websterite is in contact with the base of the mafic succession, commonly
comprising the gabbronorite.
Soils
The soils are broadly classified as Cambisols in the (Food & Agricultural Organisation) FAO
harmonised database. According to Nyamapfene (1991) the soils fall into two major soil groups,
namely: (1) Siallitic (4X), comprising of black and grey clay soils from ultra-mafic rocks, also known
as Vertic Cambisol (FAO); and (2) Fersiallitic (5E), comprising of the red clays from mafic rock
intrusions also known as Ferralic Cambisol (FAO) or Oxic Ustropept according to the United States
Department of Agriculture soil classification (USDA). The black to grey (sialitic soils) are the most
common soils; while the red clay (ferallitic group) are maily to the northern and south eastern parts
of the mine lease area, and small patches of black to grey loam (sialitic group).
Biophysical
The natural vegetation of the project site and adjacent area is broadly classified as a deciduous
miombo savanna woodland characterised by Brachystegia spiciformis (musasa) and Julbernardia
globiflora (munondo) trees (Wild and Fernandes, 1967) on stoney red-brown loamy clay soils. This
vegetation type is widespread on the Mashonaland Plateau but has been extensively modified
through clearing of fields for agriculture, timber extraction for construction and firewood, and frequent
hot fires. For much of the project area, the taller B.spiciformis trees are now reduced in number and
there is a fairly dense regrowth of the faster growing and more resilient J.globiflora, indicating a
history of human impact. The regular and severe burning of the vegetation is very clear on the
satellite imagery which indicates that most of the area burns every year. A total of 14 vegetation
plots were sampled which were classified into 6 vegetation types; namely;
 Open edaphic grassland on black self charning clay soil which is the most common vegetation
type;
 Brachystegia boehmii-jibernadia globifora woodland mainly to the North eastern parts of the
mine lease area;
 Riparian thicket and woodland; along water courses;
 Ecotonal mixed woodland on lower slopes of the ridge;
 Brachystegia glaucesens woodland;
 Seasonally wet grassland on top of the norite ridges, overlaying the areas marked for
underground mining and associated infrastructures in particular ore deposit block 3;
Caring for the environment beyond today xxvi | P a g e

Specially Protected Plants and Endemic Species

The Seventh Schedule, of the Parks and Wildlife Act, 20:14 lists Specially Protected Plants which
include all species of aloes and epiphytic orchids, some of which are known to occur in the area.
These plants will require careful mitigation measures should this area be disturbed by mining
operations. A significant population (at least 150 individuals) of Aloe excelsa was found growing
amongst the rocks on the hills above the Manyame River. This is the same site as the stone walling
reported in the heritage assessment.. Additionally, a large clump of an epiphytic orchid, Ansellia
africana was found growing on a Brachystegia spiciformis tree near 0234688S 8025480E and two
epiphytic orchid species (Aerangis verdickii.and Tridactyle tridentata) at 0234769S 8024654E, also
in a B.spiciformis tree. .
Habitats and sensitivity

The Lake Manyame Recreational Park forms the eastern boundary of the project site. This park
was gazetted in 1975 following the construction of the dam and is part of the Parks and Wildlife
Estate, administered by the Zimbabwe Parks and Wildlife Management Authority. Lake Manyame
together with the upstream Lake Chivero, cover 29,260 ha and are an internationally listed Important
Bird Area (IBA) (Childes and Mundy, 2001) and a Ramsar Wetland Site as the two lakes support
globally significant numbers of waterbirds and are particularly important sites for African and
Palaearctic migrant waders. Population counts of 16,000-19,000 African waders and 11,000
Palaearctic waders were reported by Tree (1988, 1989). Although both lakes are still significant
waterbird sites (Rockingham-Gill, 2015). Increased gill netting, disturbance by fishermen and
livestock and general developments on the lake shore are also having a negative impact on the bird
populations (Chiweshe and Caron, 2012).
Lake Manyame and the Manyame River are main drinking water sources for Harare, Chinhoyi,
Murombedzi, Raffingora, Kutama and Zimbabwe Institute of Public Administration Management
(ZIPAM).
Birds/Avifauna
Bird Life Zimbabwe’s records show over 400 bird species being recorded in the Lake Chivero-
Manyame area (Riddell, 2013). None of these special miombo bird species were noted during this
survey which is partly due to the level of degradation of the woodlands and to the hot dry weather
conditions that affected the birds’ activities, making them less visible and less vocal. A total of 91
bird species were recorded on the study site from 8-11 February 2016 and 73 species on 14 May
2016. A Black Coucal in the seasonally wet grassland near the bulk sample pit at 0233675S,
8022792E was spotted. This species is a scarce localised altitudinal migrant, moving from the
lowveld to the higher altitudes to breed during the rainy season. It is classified as Near Threatened
(IUCN criteria). Additionally, two White Backed Vultures were seen flying overhead, heading
southeast. All vultures are Specially Protected Species and this species is now listed as Endangered
(IUCN). However, given the great distances that these birds cover, it is very unlikely that they are
resident in the study area. But developments such as transmission lines pose a threat as vultures
and other large birds can collide with the power lines.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxvii | P a g e

Wildlife/Fauna
The miombo woodlands would have supported a range of larger wildlife ungulate species in the past,
including Sable Antelope, Kudu, Waterbuck and there were apparently plans to develop a private
wildlife conservation area on the Park boundary (Lake Manyame Park on the former Hunyani
Estates). This conservation area, together with similar initiatives in the surrounding farms created
corridors for wildlife movement in the district and was a potential source of income through hunting
and photographic safaris. However increased human disturbance, fires and illegal hunting have
depleted the wildlife populations on the claim area.
Noise and Air quality

Due to the time of year when the samples were taken and the relatively low rainfall experienced, the
baseline dust values are higher than may be expected. There are also ZimAlloys chrome tributaries
working in the area, and although they do not operate on Saturdays when the samples were taken,
the disturbed land increases the risk of wind entrainment which also adds to the high baseline dust
values. Machinery as a whole was not operational during the survey, so the noise samples gave a
good indication of the baseline noise samples; this is all except for the borehole drilling which was
in progress at the time of the survey.
Socio-economic
BA Hunyani Estate is state land which was acquired by the Government of Zimbabwe under the
Land Acquisition Act, Chapter 20:10 and subdivided into 37 A2 plots for agricultural production. The
BA Hunyani Estate is bordered by Railway 26, Rothwell and Stanhope farms. The Railway 26 farm
has 250 A1 plots and is presided over by a headman Mr. Gundete and a committee of seven. The
major settlement nearest the project site, the Joko Mine compound is presided over by a Chairman
Mr. Fraiser Simbi (alias. Mr. Mhungu). The Joko Mine settlement has the highest human
concentration within the 3km radius of the project. It has about 26 households with a population of
approximately 85 people. Railway 25; Hunyani Estate B; and Mr Peter Drummond’s Farm are in
ward 13 whilst Manyame Recreational Park; ZIPAM; Mutuvha; Railway 28A and 28B are in ward 14.
The GDI mine claim area is 18 kilometres away from Norton, 20 kilometres away from Selous 32
from Murombedzi and about 16 kilometres from Darwendale business centre.
The main economic activities are mining and agriculture comprising mainly of crop farming and
animal husbandry. There are four large scale commercial farmers producing maize, potatoes,
poultry and beef cattle. Additionally, there are four fishing co-operatives with a total membership of
52 members that operate fishing activities from Mr Peter Drummond’s farm. The mining companies,
such as the Chinese mining company provide local labour with employment mainly as general
hands; while skilled labour is sourced from Norton and Harare. ZimPlats which was cited as the
largest mining company in the project area was reported to be giving mining tributaries to women’s
groups and to the community at Joko.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxviii | P a g e

Cultural heritage
Nineteen (19) previously unrecorded Tangible Cultural Heritage sites were recorded with one re-
confirmed adding to its understanding as a site of considerable local intangible significance. The
sites confirm the presence of this Cultural Resources in the project footprint. Most of these sites
have little additional cultural heritage significance or academic value, as they are isolated scatters
of material, most often disturbed by post-depositional processes. However, there are some sites
that require additional attention. One site in particular, reference: National Monuments and Museums
of Zimbabwe Site 1730: CD:08, is considered to be a Farming Community/Historical site with
Contemporary Intangible Significance. The site is located on the crest of a small hillock of Websterite
that looks down on the Manyame River where a wide pool exists, known locally as Dziva raMbuya.
The hill is heavily wooded, the stone walling providing a moist ecological refuge for several plant
species and protecting them from fire. A number of impressive Aloe excelsa trees such as Kirkia
acuminata are thriving, adding a natural component to the cultural significance of the site. The site
has excellent views of the fertile, cultivated Darwendale plains of the modern Makonde District. This
combination of social and natural features and its presence in a declared recreational area all apply
to the definitions of tangible and intangible significance as cited in International Finance Corporation
(IFC) Standard 8 and its recommendations that should limit further development.
PROJECT AFFECTED PERSONS

Approximately, 330 people, equating to 54 families will be indirectly or directly affected by the
proposed mine development. The average family size is 5 but there are two very large families one
with 40 and the other with 23 family members. However, during the initial mine development, it was
established that 23 families would be affected and would need to be resettled. These families have
been consulted and agreed to resettlement. Inventories of their assets were listed and the affected
family head signed the inventory registers. Copies of these signed registers are included in the
Resettlement Action Plan Report, Volume IV. Additionally, a copy of a letter from the Department
of Lands, confirming land availability for resettlement within Chegutu District is included in the
Resettlement Action Plan Report and also included as Appendix D of the Public Consultation
Report, Volume III.
TRAFFIC STUDY
Based on the traffic counts, most traffic occurred along the Norton –Murombezi highway. The
average daily volume along the Norton Murombedzi Highway is approximately 1 170 vehicles per
day. Light motor vehicles and mini buses are the most predominant form of transport; 1 026 being
light motor vehicles and 115 mini buses and the reminder consisting of various other forms of
transportation. An additional 66 buses to transport employees from the mine site to the either Norton
or Harare will be added to this existing traffic flow, implying a need to increase public health and
safety measures. Additionally, the proposed heavy mine traffic will require that the Norton-ZIPAM
turn- off be upgraded.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxix | P a g e

PUBLIC CONSULTATION
Public consultation process to inform and solicit the views of stakeholders (at national, regional and
local level) and interested parties was undertaken, through community meetings, written
correspondence, questionnaires as well as one on one meetings. Overall, the general sentiment of
stakeholders is that the project is welcome as it will provide much needed employment and critical
development for the area. Local Authorities stand to benefit immensely from the fees and levies.
However, the precursor for the project going ahead is that the necessary rituals need to be
conducted and that GDI commit to environmental protection and better relations with the community
and other stakeholders. Additionally, it was stressed that it was critical to ensure that the
resettlement of affected families is undertaken equitably.
A critical analysis of the outcomes of the consultative process highlighted the following:
 The area around the Shrine and Dziva raMbuya Mhasvi; is sacred therefore future mining
activities should not destroy any part of the Shrine or disturb the areas considered sacred.
Additionally, according to Chief Chivero, Darwendale Dam itself is also considered sacred.
 Stakeholders within the mine lease area are currently unhappy with the lack of communication
between themselves and the project proponent who is currently undertaking prospecting
activities which they allege they were not informed of. To this end, Critical attention was drawn
to the need to engage stakeholders where mining operations impinge on the rights of
surrounding communities;
 It was expressed that preference for employment should be given to locals;
 The impact on water resources in particular the Darwendale dam, should be minimised, and at
best avoided completely; to this end ZINWA Manyame Catchment recommended that
appropriate structures should be put in place to ensure that rivers are protected and that there
is no interference with water bodies in accordance to the Water Act Chapter 20:24, section 46.
Additionally, ZINWA Manyame Catchment was concerned about the potential alterations to the
ground water table resulting from the dewatering process to facilitate shaft mining and from
ground water abstractions;
 A commitment to social responsibility activities which promotes the development of the
surrounding communities including the construction of water harvesting structures was a key
area of concern emerging from the discussions;
 The project proponent needs to make sure that in the course of its mining activities ensures
public health & safety; and environmental protection making certain that disturbed land is
rehabilitated in accordance the requirements of the Environmental Management Agency.
Another key concern the project poses is the proximity to a recreational park and Lake Manyame
which is a RAMSAR protected site as well as a source of drinking water for Harare, Chinhoyi,
Murombedzi, Raffingora, Kutama and ZIPAM (ZINWA, 2016). Written responses from Bird Life
Zimbabwe also highlighted this critical issue.
Two written submissions of project objection were received from Bird Life Zimbabwe and the
National Parks and Wildlife Authority, citing the high risk of ecological disturbance; upper most being:
Caring for the environment beyond today xxx | P a g e

 Potential disturbance of areas of ecological sensitivity – Lake Chivero and Darwendale which
have been designated as wetlands;
 Water use conflicts of Darwendale Dam (which is also a source of water for Harare);
 Destruction of aloe species;
 Siltation of the Manyame River by mine tailings;
The main ESIA report and accompanying Environmental Management Plan acknowledge these
potential negative impacts and recommendations for their management are contained in the
Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan, Volume II.
KEY IMPACTS
The following are the key positive and negative impacts associated with the proposed Darwendale
Project.
Negative
 Environmental degradation (vegetation clearing; erosion, landscape change etc.);
 Displacement of families located within the mine lease area and disruption of farming and
economic livelihood activities
 Change in natural landscape of the area;
 Potential pollution to surface water resources (mainly from tailings and mining activities);
 Potential to compromise on the dam structure due to underground blasting activities;
 Potential to alter ground water table as a result of the underground dewatering process during
mine shaft development;
 Disturbance to birdlife and habitat (to existing tourism activities within Lake Manyame
Recreational Park);
 Employment dispute (locals versus those from other towns/countries);
 Potential impact on cultural heritage
 Potential impact on protected flora species Aloe excelsa spp
 Potential health & safety risks (construction vehicles, traffic, construction activities, increased
noise levels);
 Increased traffic resulting in increased public health and safety risk
Positive
 Employment creation
 Local development (potential for controlled vending)
 Contribution to the local economy and national economy
 Alignment with Zimbabwe’s agenda for sustainable socio-economic transformation
 Potential for technical skills transfer
The Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan (EMMP), Volume II contains management and
monitoring measures to ensure that all negative potential impacts are managed and monitored
during the construction and operational phase of the project. The EMMP also proposes a grievance
reporting mechanism for the community and stakeholders to report, any grievance or issue that will
arise during either the construction or operation of the power plant.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxxi | P a g e

It is the conclusion of this Environmental and Social Impact Assessment that the negative impacts
resulting from this project can be mitigated and managed, recommendations for their management
are contained in the Resettlement Action Plan and the Environmental Management and Monitoring
Plan. Additionally, key local government departments and local authorities are encouraged to ensure
that the project is implemented with minimal negative impacts. The key positive impacts such as
employment and skills transfer will contribute to the economic well-being of local population as well
as the Zimbabwe as a whole.
Caring for the environment beyond today xxxii | P a g e

1 INTRODUCTION
Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited (Black Crystal) was sub-contracted by DRA Projects Private
Limited, South Africa, on behalf of the project proponent Great Dyke Investment Private Limited (GDI) to
undertake the Environmental Prospectus and Environmental and Social Impact Assessment (ESIA) of
their proposed mining project (The Darwendale Project) in accordance with the Environmental
Management Act, Chapter 20:14, schedule 1 and the Environmental Management (Impact Assessment
& Ecosystems Protection) Regulations SI 7 of 2007 which require that an ESIA be undertaken for all
proposed mining projects.). An Environmental Prospectus was submitted to the Environmental
Management Agency (EMA) 03 May 2016 and approved on 27 May 2016 on condition that the detailed
ESIA addresses the following issues highlighted by EMA: Please refer to Appendix B for the responses
from EMA.
 Public consultation should include all Government related Ministries and Departments at Local,
District, Provincial and National Level and should be presented on official letter heads, please
refer to the Public Consultation Report, Volume III;
 Public consultation should also include other institutions related to the project as well as
neighbouring land users, please refer to the Public Consultation Report, Volume III;
 Critically outline and examine the project process through a comprehensive and clear project
description, please refer to section 3 of this Report;
 Critically examine other land uses that may be affected by the project during the implementation,
please refer to section 6.1.6 of this Report;
 An analysis of the biodiversity impacts, land tenure system, soil and hydrological analysis should
be done, please refer to section 7;
 Attach soils, hydrological and topographical maps and make an analysis of the impacts of the
project to the current environmental baseline, please refer to section 6 and section 7 of this
Report;
 The appendices should include Certificate of incorporation of the company, CR14 and
Declaration by the Company on the company’s responsible official to deal with environmental
issues. Copies of these Company documents are included in Appendix A.
 Any other issues relevant to the mitigation of impacts likely to be caused by the project during
implementation, please refer to the Environmental Management & Monitoring Report, Volume II
and the Resettlement Action Plan, Volume IV.
1.1 PROJECT JUSTIFICATION AND BACKGROUND

Zimbabwe is the third largest producer of platinum group metals, after South Africa and Russia, and
production from Zimbabwe is expected to rise considerably due to the expansion and revamping of
platinum mines (Cowley, 2013; Rauch and Fatoki, 2015). The proposed Darwendale Platinum Project
presents vast opportunities to Zimbabwe in terms of economic and social development. With a lease
reserve of at least 30 years the project aims to extract and process up to 9.75 million tons of ore per year
within the first 10-year phase (GDI, 2014; GDI-BC-DRA, 2016). Please refer to Appendix A for a copy
of the GDI mining rights awarded to GDI by the Ministry of Mines and Energy
Caring for the environment beyond today 33 | P a g e

The Great Dyke is one of the largest systems of PGM deposits in the world, located within the territories
of Zimbabwe. Resource base of the Darwendale deposit is comparable with deposits of Norilsk ore
field, namely Norilsk 1 and Talnakhskoye, as well as with the largest deposits of the Bushveld area in
South Africa.
An EIA for the prospecting phase was conducted at the Darwendale project site (Ascon Africa, 2011),
and subsequently followed by prospecting and exploration studies (GDI, 2014). These included some
drilling operations, trial open pit mining and bulk sampling. This ESIA document covers the construction
and operational phase of the proposed mine.
1.2 PROJECT PROPONENTS

The project is being directly implemented by a Russian-Zimbabwean joint venture GDI, in which JSC
Afromet owns 50% of shares and a Zimbabwean private company 50%. This exclusive 50/50 ownership
structure with a local partner has received approval and support from the Ministry of Youth, Indigenization
and Economic Empowerment of the Republic of Zimbabwe, in line with the Indigenization and Economic
Empowerment Policy, 2008.
1.3 TERMS OF REFERENCE

In accordance with the Environmental Management Act of 2002 (Chapter 20:27), Part XI Section 105,
Great Dyke Investments, notified The Environment Management Agency (EMA) about the proposed
platinum mine project, through the submission of a prospectus report submitted to the Environmental
Management Agency on the 19th of May 2016. Forming part of the prospectus Report, as annexes were
terms of reference for undertaking a detailed Environmental & Social Impact Assessment Report. This
detailed ESIA was undertaken in accordance to those approved ESIA Terms of Reference and aims to
address concerns expressed by EMA in a letter dated 27 May 2016, and issues raised following a review
of the ESIA documents by EMA in March 2019. The minutes of the meeting and a copy of the
Environmental Prospectus Response letter are also included in Appendix B.

2 STUDY METHODOLOGY
The methodology used to compile the ESIA was as follows:
2.1 DESKTOP REVIEW

A review of project information was reviewed prior to specialists undertaking the preliminary site visit;
Documents reviewed included; but was not limited to:
 Legal documents (e.g. Environmental Management Act; Water Act, etc.);
 Environmental Impact Assessment for Darwendale Platinum Project, Chegutu District, (Ascon
Africa Consulting Engineers, 2011);
 Darwendale Deposit Geological Prospecting and Exploration Program;
 A list of literature was reviewed, see list in the reference section at the end of this report.
2.2 SITE VISITS

The following Black Crystal team members undertook site visits between February and August 2016 and
December 2018 to January 2019. The purpose of undertaking the site visit was to gain an appreciation
of the project site, undertake public consultations with key stake holders and to gain an understanding of
potential impacts.
Name Title
Ngoni Mandaba (Pr. Sci. Nat) Black Crystal Project Manager
Susan Childes Ecologist
Cecelia Manyame Social Scientist /Livelihoods/Public Consultations
Kuziwa Phineas Murapa RAP Specialist/ Stakeholder Consultation, 2018/2019
Rob Burrett Cultural Heritage Specialist
Farai Mapanda Soil and Land use Specialist/ GIS Mapping
Tim Broderick Hydro geologist/water supply/Climate
Sharon Waterworth Quality Control
2.3 SPECIALIST STUDY METHODS
2.3.1 Biodiversity Survey

Biodiversity survey had to be limited to indicator groups of organisms that were considered representative
of the general biodiversity of the site. The selected groups were:
 Woody plants – as primary producers and fundamental to the food chain.
 Birds – as representing higher vertebrates that are primary and secondary consumers. This
group is also well documented, generally visible and easy to identify.

No invertebrates were studied nor were there any surveys of these vertebrate groups: amphibians,
reptiles, small mammals, although observations were made when these animals were encountered in the
field.
Flora/Vegetation
Prior to commencing field work the claim area and adjacent areas was examined using satellite imagery
through Google Earth. This provided an overview of the area and gave preliminary indications of
vegetation type and sensitive habitats. The ASCON report (2011) contained a description of the main
vegetation types and an Appendix of plant species which were then compared with the results of this
current survey.
The field survey and data collection was then undertaken by vehicle using the existing road network in
and around the claim area during the period 8 -11 February 2016. Recorders were A. Mapaura (National
Herbarium) and S. Childes (Black Crystal Consulting). The vegetation was sampled using a standard
Braun Blanquet method of assigning a cover abundance rating to the main woody species and noting
grasses and forbs in a series of plot less samples.
Cover Abundance Scale: Height Class:

r = one or few individuals 1= 0-1m small woody plants
+' = occasional or <1% total plot area 2= 1-3m shrubs
1 = <5% total plot area 3= >3m trees
2 = 5-25% total plot area
3 = 25-50%
4 = 50-75%
5 = >75%
Where distinct changes were noted in the vegetation or where representative examples of a vegetation
type were encountered, a sample plot was made. Plots were located at least 30-50m from the track or
road and the recorders noted the soil, topography, disturbance and the presence of any alien invasive
plants and endemic plants. The location of the centre of each plot was noted using a GPS (set to UTM
co-ordinates on ARC 1950) and these waypoints, together with the tracks travelled, were downloaded
onto Google Earth and overlain on satellite imagery. Images 1 and 2 below show the survey routes taken
and the various waypoints along the routes.

Image 1: Biodiversity Survey route
Image 2: Biodiversity way points along biodiversity route
Plants were identified in the field or if unknown, pressed specimens were made for later identification at
the National Herbarium in Harare. The plots were then grouped according to the dominant species and
the level of cover, and this information was used to develop a vegetation map and vegetation description.
Wildlife and Birds

From 8-11 February 2016 (wet season) and again on 14 May 2016 (early dry season) bird species were
identified through observations using binoculars, and by their calls using Roberts VII Multimedia (2013)

and Sinclair, Hockey & Tarboton (1998) references. Recording commenced early in the morning
05.30am and continued throughout the day at the same time as the vegetation sampling so that a range
of habitats were checked.
There was insufficient time to undertake detailed species counts of water birds on Lake Manyame but
data was obtained from BirdLife Zimbabwe. Information on wildlife species was collected through spoor
signs, observations and anecdotal information from the GDI geologist and staff.
2.3.2 Soil Sampling

The assessment of the soil profiles was done at six points of three open pit sites, including the trial pit
dug for bulk sampling. These pits include the old chrome opencast mining pits and the fairly recent
Chinese opencast mine pits. The profiles were examined for horizon development and soil depth among
other properties. Auger observations of soil depth were also done at the proposed tailings storage facility
up to the depth of 1.4 m, the full length of the auger. The assessment of soils also included identification
of the soil unit boundaries and type of land use for each soil unit. Soil colour was measured onsite using
the Munsell soil colour chart, while the soil samples brought to the Soil Testing Laboratory at the
University of Zimbabwe for further preparation and analysis.
Figure 1 shows the location of the 83 observation and sampling points encountered during the field
assessment.

Figure 1: Soil sampling and observation points in the northern section of project area.
Satellite image modified after Google Earth (2016), image date 3 October 2013.
2.3.3 Soil quality assessment

The observations and soil sampling points were pre-selected using Proposed Block Plan DWG No.
JZWDM0094-00000-L-0001 REV C (Scale 1:15) obtained from DRA Projects (P/L). Satellite images
from Google Earth (2016) were also used identify potential observation and sampling points. The sites
were marked along zig-zag paths. Points were selected so as to represent the major soil units and land
use features. Due to limited accessibility of some points judgmental or purposive sampling was used.
Preparation and analysis of soil samples

Soil samples were air-dried, ground and passed through 2 mm and the 0.5 mm sieves prior to laboratory
analyses. The soils were analysed in the Analytical Services Laboratory at the University of Zimbabwe,
Department of Soil Science and Agricultural Engineering. The parameters analysed were: (1) particle
size distribution (and texture), (2) pH, (3) electrical conductivity, (4) exchangeable bases (Calcium (Ca),

Magnesium (Mg),Potassium (K) and Sodium (Na), (5) Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC)1, (6) heavy
metals (total Manganese (Mn), Nickel (Ni),Cadmium (Cd), Chromium (Cr) and Lead (Pb), and (7) organic
carbon; using the standard methods of analysis for tropical soils described by Okalebo et al. (2002). All
parameters were analysed in both the 0-20 cm and the 30-50 cm soil depths, with the exception of pH,
electrical conductivity and organic carbon which were analysed in topsoil only. Bulk density was
measured gravimetrically on core samples after oven drying at 105 °C. Justification for analysing each
parameter is summarised in Table 1 below.
Table 1: Selected soil quality indicators for the Darwendale project site
Parameter Justification
Texture Indicates potential problem under water-saturated conditions; drainage
problems; soil pollutant retention capacity; and also used to verify soil class.
Soils can be too hard when dry and too sticky when wet because of texture
related issues.
Soil pH Affects vegetation and other life forms/soil health; determines pollutants
speciation and availability for plant uptake.
E. conductivity Indicates potential soil salinity problems; electrolytes loading in soil; and has
implications on soil health and drainage.
Exchangeable bases The proportion of these bases shows the extent of soil degradation. If Mg is
(Calcium (Ca), higher than Ca the soil loses its capacity to sustain vegetation growth; If Na
Magnesium is too high the soil becomes increasingly prone to erosion and poor drainage;
(Mg),Potassium (K) If all the bases are relatively low, the soil becomes acidic.
&Sodium (Na)
CEC Indicates pollutant retention capacity; soil mineralogy; and has implications
on the soil's buffering capacity.
Heavy metals Pollutants background concentration; have implications on human health and
contamination of food chains.
Organic carbon Indicates soil biological and chemical fertility status; possible contribution of
organic matter towards pollutants retention.
Bulk density Indicates potential soil degradation by compaction; used to calculate
pollutants loading rates; potential drainage
The baseline condition of soils within and around the project area was assessed using the relative topsoil
enrichment (RTE) indices as there are currently no local standards for permissible pollutants levels in soil
media.
total concentration of heavy metal in topsoil (0  20 cm)

RTE  (Ross, 1994)
total concentration of heavy metal in subsoil (30  50 cm)
Table 2 shows inferences that can be made from RTE values for heavy metals.
1
Refer to table 1 for explanation of CEC

Table 2: Heavy metal enrichment status of soil based on the RTE indices,
(Calculated as heavy metal concentration in topsoil divided by concentration in subsoil)
RTE Index Status

<2 Not enriched
2-3 Slightly enriched
4-5 Moderately enriched
6 - 10 Strongly enriched
11 - 20 Very strongly enriched
> 20 Extremely enriched
Source Ross, 1994c.
2.3.4 Land Use Assessment

The assessment of land use and land use changes were done through interviews with farmers, miners
and other settlers within and outside the mine lease area, up to a distance of approximately, 2.5 km from
the mine lease boundary. In addition, the Proposed Block Plan DWG No. JZWDM0094-00000-L-0001
REV C and satellite images from Google Earth (2016) were also used to identify some current and
proposed uses. More recent satellite images could not be obtained such that some of the changes in
land use after 3 October 2013 could not be captured directly from the images, and in such cases the GPS
was used to indicate the location of such places when encountered.
2.3.5 Archaeological Assessment

An initial desktop study provided a basic background to the area and likely Cultural Heritage Resources.
This involved an analysis of the records of previously reports sites as held by National Museums and
Monuments of Zimbabwe. The area was also assessed using Google Earth imagery to identity places
that required on the ground investigation.
The field investigation was carried out from Monday 8th to Friday 12th February 2016. A series of
transects were walked across the intended project footprint, investigating areas deemed likely to have
heritage evidence as well as those areas thought to be unlikely. A general understanding of the entire
project footprint was generated taking into account the sites located and the absence of sites in certain
areas as determined by the geology, hydrology and ecology.
While the focus was on locating the tangible (physical) remains, the sociologist and land use specialist
of Black Crystal Consulting team took note of current heritage information that could identify additional
sites or explain further the living heritage off the ones located. The sacred nature of the northern margin
of the project footprint where is abuts the Manyame River was confirmed. Their findings have informed
the consultant’s recommendations.
The Great Dyke is simply too ancient a geological body to have fossil traces of life, as such the consultant
did not expect to find paleontological resources and nothing of this nature was seen.
Field Equipment

Field equipment used included:

 Zimbabwe Geological Survey report for the Great Dyke and associated maps Worst (1960);
 Zimbabwe Surveyor General 1:50 000 topographical maps 1730 C4 Makwiro and 1730 D3 Norton;
 Relevant Google Earth images for area under review;
 Garmin eTrex GPS.
In line with standard Zimbabwean practice readings that appear in this report comply with the
Zimbabwe Surveyor General’s maps. The GPS readings are cited as UTM readings calibrated on the
map datum ARC 1950.
2.3.6 Mapping
The maps of soil types, land use, topography and administrative boundaries, were done using a
combination of Google Earth (version 7.1.5.1557) and QGIS (version 2.12.3-Lyon), aided by MS Paints
(version 6.1). Coordinates from the field were recorded using the Global Positioning System (GPS)
(Model: Garmin, Extex 10) set to the ARC1950 Coordinate Reference System (CRS). The coordinates
and the Keyhole Markup Language (KML) files for the project area were loaded onto Google Earth after
converting the CRS from ARC 1950 to WGS84 using the Franson CoordTrans software Version 2.30
(Franson Technology AB, Sweden). Coordinate transformation in QGIS was done automatically using
the 'on the fly' CRS transformation. The other datasets for mapping were the topography maps from the
Surveyor-General and satellite images from Google Earth. The images were useful in locating the
boundaries between soil units and areas under cultivation, settlements, civil structures and other features.
The area covered by different soil types and other land uses were estimated using Google Earth utilities
from Earth Point Corporation (2015). The horizontal positional accuracy for Google Earth’s high
resolution imagery was assumed to be ±2 m based on the study by Mohammed et al. (2013), and also
supported by Paredes-Hernandez et al. (2013) for all images from 2008 onwards. The vertical positional
accuracy for Google Earth’s high resolution imagery was assumed to be between 1.3 and 5.4m based
on the study by Sharma and Gupta (2014), and also supported by Rusli et al. (2014).
2.3.7 Public Consultations

Consultations were undertaken with stakeholders, interested and affected parties, at Local, District and
Provincial and National Levels. The public consultation methodology and findings are contained in the
Public Consultation Report, Volume III accompanying this ESIA report.
2.4 ASSUMPTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

The assumptions and limitations on which this study has been based include:
Assumptions:
 All information provided by Great Dyke Investments and interested and affected parties to Black
Crystal Consulting was correct and valid at the time it was provided. The consultants and specialist
investigators therefore do not accept any responsibility in the event that additional information comes
to light at a later stage of the process;
 EMA requires extensive consultations with various stakeholders. It is however, not always possible
to involve all interested and affected parties individually. However, every effort was made to involve

as many representatives of the stakeholders in the project area. The assumption has, therefore,
been made that those representatives with whom there has been consultation, are acting on behalf
of the parties which they represent.
Limitations:
 This report and its investigations are project-specific, and consequently the environmental and socio-
economic team did not evaluate any other mining areas for Great Dyke Investments.
2.5 PROJECT CATEGORISATION

The International Finance Corporation (IFC) categorizes projects according to the degree of potential
adverse social and environmental impacts as follows:
Category A: may cause “irreversible”, diverse and unprecedented damage.

Category B: impacts are site specific and can be more readily mitigated than for Category A projects.
Category C: Minimal or no adverse environmental impacts.
Category FI: For sub-projects financed through financial intermediaries that may have negative impacts
The proposed prospecting and exploration activities are a Category B Project – impacts are site specific
and can be more readily mitigated.

2.6 PROJECT LOCATION

2.6.1 Regional level
Great Dyke Investments Pvt Ltd has Special Mining lease title over Mining Lease No. 03 (ML03), which
covers an area of approximately 6,500 hectares of the northern part of Hartley platinum complex, along
the Great Dyke, please refer to Figure 2 below. The 2.6-billion-year old Great Dyke strikes slightly east
of north, over a distance of approximately 550 km through central Zimbabwe, cutting through the
Archaean granites and greenstone belts of the Zimbabwe Craton. It varies in width along strike, from 4
km to 11 km (Oberthür 2011, Li et al. 2007).
-
Figure 2: Regional Project Context
2.6.2 Local level

At local level, the proposed project is located on BA Hunyani Estate 3 (GPS reading: 30o 29’ 00”E; 17o
52’ 00”S) in the Chegutu District of Mashonaland West Province in Zimbabwe, refer to location map, Map
1. The nearest town is Norton located 20km to the east and approximately 24km from the site by road.

Access from the capital Harare is via the R5 highway to Bulawayo, branching off west at Norton into the
Darwendale paved road at the 41km peg, and travelling 19km before turning left into the Robert Mugabe
highway to Zvimba. After travelling for 4 km turn right into an unformed farm track and travel 1.5km to the
site.
The BA Hunyani Estate 3 borders the Manyame Recreational Park approximately 3.5km to the north
east and the settlement of Darwendale lies 17km due north. The Darwendale dam is an important
feature of the recreational park and a major source of water for the process plant for Zimbabwe
Platinum Mines Ltd (Zimplats) which lies approximately 30km due south. The main railway line from
Harare to Bulawayo runs 2.5km south of the project area and can be accessed at the Kutama and
Makwiro sidings. Please refer to location Map.

Map 1: Location of the mining claim for the Darwendale Platinum Project.
Image overlays from 1:50000 topography map no. Norton 1730 Edition 3 (Surveyor-General, 1990) and Makwiro 1730 C4 Edition 4 (Surveyor-General, 1982).

2.6.3 Administrative setting

Administratively, the project falls within wards 13 and 14 of Norton Constituency, under Chegutu Rural
District, and very small portion of Ward 21 of Zvimba South Constituency under Makonde District.
Therefore, two Rural District Councils share administrative jurisdiction of the project area; that is, Zvimba
Rural District Council and Chegutu Rural District Council. Please refer to Map 2. The Traditional
Administrative head is Chief Chivero.
BA Hunyani Estate is state land which was acquired under the Land Acquisition Act and subdivided into
37 A2 plots for agriculture production. The BA Hunyani estate is bordered by Railway 26, Rothwell and
Stanhope farms. The railway 26 farm has 250 A1 plots and is presided over by a headman Mr. Gundete
and a committee of seven. The major settlement nearest the project site, the Joko Mine compound is
presided over by a Chairman Mr. Fraiser Simbi (alias. Mr. Mhungu).
Railway 25, Hunyani Estate B and Mr Peter Drummond’s Farm are in ward 13 whilst Manyame
Recreational Park, ZIPAM, Mutuvha, Railway 28A and 28B are in ward 14. Please refer to the
Administrative Map 2. The GDI mine claim area is 18 kilometres away from Norton, 20 kilometres away
from Selous 32 from Murombedzi and about 16 kilometres from Darwendale business centre.
The Joko Mine settlement has the highest human concentration within the 3km radius of the project. It
has about 26 households with a population of approximately 85 people. The Railway 26 farm falls within
the 5km buffer zone and is divided into 250 A1 plots (households) which have a population of between 1
500 and 2 000.

Map 2: Administrative Map

3 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Mining Lease 03 is a consolidation of 57 Platinum, chrome and nickel claims owned by GDI, and was
gazetted as such by the Mining Affairs Board of Zimbabwe on 14th August 2010. May 7th, 2015 President
of Zimbabwe President Robert Mugabe granted a Special Mining Lease, which provides GDI preferential
economic and tax conditions for the project implementation, including a reduction of income tax. Currently
the work is being done towards approving the addendum to the Special Mining Lease - the License
agreement, which embraces an expanded list of benefits that may be granted for mineral deposit
development. Copies of the surface rights are included in Appendix A, while a copy of the site of works
plan that has been submitted to the Ministry of Mines for approval is also included in Appendix A.
The Darwendale ores are classified as hard ores, being highly resistant to semi-autogenous grinding
(SAG) and very highly resistant to ball milling. Synchronous motors are recommended for ore milling,
Mineralogical tests on ore samples indicate that the ore’s predominant constituent is Pyroxene (73%) and
is primarily comprised of silica (56.6%), magnesium oxide (25.8%), olivine and iddingsite (10%), talc and
ser-pentine (6%), sulphides (<0.4%). Mineralisation characterised by: Sulphides of various metals and
oxidised iron minerals, primarily pyrrhotite (0.3%); chalcopyrite (0.1%); Pyrite and pentlandite as
occasional particles. Pilot plant feed grades revealed the following (g/t) results: Platinum (Pt):1.43,
Lead(Pd):1.04, Gold (Au):0.18,Rhodium (Rh):0.13 (2.78 4E).
The proposed mining operations will consist of underground operations. The mine is scheduled to mine
and process 280 000 tonnes Run of Mine (RoM) ore per month (3.36Mtpa) over a period of 30 years as
indicated in the production profile, in Figure 3 below.
The scheduled throughput will be sustained by two portals mined simultaneously. Each portal is sized for
a nominal production of 140 000 tons RoM ore with supporting infrastructure designed to handle a
monthly peak of 180 000 tons. A single 280 000 t/month processing plant will be constructed to process
RoM into high grade concentrate for further beneficiation offsite.

Figure 3: Proposed Production Profile
The detailed mine design will be undertaken by a specialist mining consultant and mining operations will
be managed by GDI. A Mining Contractor will be required to submit a tender price to complete the mining
scope of work on a 5-year contract basis. This will include the provision of mining equipment such as
trucks, dozers, shovels, tools and labour sufficient to produce the desired tonnage. The specialist
processing plant consultant will be appointed to conduct the detail design for the concentrator plant. When
the detailed design is completed the plant construction will be based on an Engineer, Procure and
Construct basis (EPC).
3.1 UNDERGROUND MINING

Darwendale project’s Life of Mine (LoM) scope is limited to development of Portals 1, 2 and 3 only and
operating multiple declines simultaneously to achieve production throughput of 280 000 tons per month
(equivalent to 3.36 Mtpa). Portal positions and respective mining blocks are shown in Figures 4 and 5.
Mechanized room and pillar mining method, commonly practiced by current platinum producers on the
Great Dyke in Zimbabwe will be used. The orebody is fairly flat dipping, ranging from 10 degrees on the
western outcrop to flat at the bottom of the syncline and is consistent with other orebodies currently mined
on the Great Dyke.
The orebody will be accessed through a boxcut and decline system situated in the Main Sulphide Zone
(MSZ) orebody horizon. Mining sections will be developed from the decline system. Each section consists
of 15 rooms, 7 meter wide both on strike and on dip. Mining heights vary from 2.0 m to 2.75 m, depending
on mining blocks.
Each mining section will have a dedicated suite of equipment consisting of:

 A single boom drill rig;

 A bolting rig;
 A Load Haul Dumper (LHD) and
 Utility vehicles.
Other equipment will be shared between mining sections, including charging, construction, and shotcrete
units and maintenance equipment.
Underground ore handling will be by means of LHDs, strike conveyors (one per section) and a series of
decline conveyor belts. Ore will subsequently be transferred to a crusher facility (part of process plant)
via a series of overland conveyors and a 3 000 tonne surface silo.
Ventilation equipment, and other supporting infrastructure including service water supply, mine return
water handling and power distribution, etc. will be provided to support the mining production
requirements.

Figure 4: Mining Blocks with Portals

Figure 5: Mining blocks
3.1.1 Description of mining method

Room and pillar production sections will be established off a five decline shaft cluster, developed on an
apparent dip of 9 degrees’ inclination. This is approximately one degree less than the true dip of the
orebody to accommodate minor faulting, rolls in the orebody and mining equipment travelling limitations.
Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of the decline and production sections in accordance to the actual
mine design.

Figure 6: Schematic of Decline and Production Sections
An Ore production section consists of 15 underground rooms, each 7 m wide and separated by pillars
which are 6 m wide. The rooms are connected by 7 m wide ventilation connections as shown in Figure
7. Error! Reference source not found.A 75m distance being the maximum allowable LHD tramming
distance between mining face and strike conveyor loading station has been provided for.
Figure 7: Typical Room and Pillar Section
Ore production rock faces will be drilled using single boom electro-hydraulic, low profile drilling rigs. A
double boom drill rig will be used in the development sections. Faces will be charged with pumpable

emulsion explosives and shock tube detonating systems. Blasting will take place once a day during
steady state production while multi blasting is planned during the initial start-up phase of the development
section.
During initial development phase, rock will be loaded at the face by 10 ton low profile LHDs and trammed
to the nearest truck loading point, where it will be transferred onto a 30 tonne Articulated Dump Truck
(ADT). The ADTs will tram ore to surface where it will be tipped onto a RoM pad, from where it will be re-
handled with a front end loader and transported to the plant by surface haul trucks. Once the conveyor
belt system is operational, ore will be loaded at the face using LHDs and trammed to a dedicated strike
conveyor loading station for each section. The loading station for the development section will be located
at the tail-end of the last decline belt.
3.1.2 Mine Access, Development & Stopping

Primary access to the orebody will be through a boxcut and a set of five decline shafts, the portals of
which are established at the boxcut highwall. Two outermost decline shafts will be used as Return Air
Way (RAW) declines. Two of the remaining declines will be used as man and materials declines and the
third and central decline will be used for installing decline conveyor belts. Each decline will be 7.0 m wide
and 2.5 m high. Decline shafts will be developed using trackless mining equipment. Development of the
decline system is of high importance during the early life of the mine, to open up sufficient room for the
establishment of production sections.
Ledging
Once development has progressed to a point where interference from ledging operations is minimal,
initial ledging will commence, proceeding from the RAW decline to the second ventilation holing. ledging
operations will be conducted by the stoping crew earmarked to mine that specific panel or by a separate
crew. Resulting room and pillar sections will be equipped with permanent services which include a strike
conveyor and an ore loading station and service, potable and fire water reticulation. Mine return water
pipes will also be installed.
Stoping
Mechanised room and pillar method will be used for stoping (that is the process of leaving an open space
- stope in a parent rock which is strong enough not to collapse into the stope). Stoping tasks will be
carried out in the following sequence:
 Face drilling - drilling crews using an electro-hydraulic single boom, low profile, drill rigs;
 Face charging – Blast holes will be charged with pumpable emulsion explosive. Explosive vehicles
with emulsion tanks and pumping units will be used to charge the faces;
 Cleaning of blasted ore will be carried out using low profile, 10 ton LHD vehicles. LHDs will load the
blasted rock at the face and transport it to a dedicated tipping points in the section for loading onto
strike conveyors;
 Roof support will be installed using a low profile roof bolter rig, specifically designed for drilling and
placing of roof bolts;
A stoping section layout is shown in Figure 8

Figure 8: Stoping Section Layout
Construction and installation of services will be accomplished using utility vehicles specifically designed
for general purpose construction and services installation work. These vehicles will include the
machinery required for shotcreting.
To achieve the targeted production of 1.68 million RoM tonnes per annum from each mine, seven
sections (six stoping and one development) section are required. Mobile machinery required per portal
is indicated in Table 3 below.
Table 3: Underground mobile machinery
Stoping and Development Equipment

10 t Low Profile LHDs
Single boom drill rigs (stoping sections)
Double boom drill rig (development section)
Roof Bolters
Utility Vehicles with explosive charging cassette
Utility Vehicles (various cassette carriers)
30 t Low Profile Dump Truck (development section)

Secondary Support Equipment

Mobile scaler
Shortcreter
Various purpose cassettes
Road Construction & Maintenance
Low Profile Grader
Low Profile Compactor
Concrete Mixer
Concrete Transporter
Tractor with Trailer (10 t max)
Water Bowser
Engineering & Maintenance
TMM Maintenance Utility Vehicles (c/w lube and fuel
dispensers)
Standard Scissor Lift
Pipe/ Material Transporter (c/w lifting facility)
Personnel Transport
Men Carriers (18 persons minimum)
Emergency Vehicle (c/w medical auxiliaries)
Engineering Personnel Carriers (6 pax. with additional payload
capacity)
Supervisory Vehicles
Underground Double Cab LDVs
Underground Single Cab LDVs
3.1.3 Underground Ore Handling

Ore handling underground will be through underground conveyors comprising of decline shaft and strike
conveyor belts. Ore blasted from the mining face is transported to the strike conveyor loading station
using 10ton LHDs. Loading stations are located approximately 75m from the face to avoid excessive LHD
tramming distance. Each loading station will consist of a low level steel structure supporting a static
grizzly, low profile rock breaker and a vibrating feeder. The rock breaker will be used to break oversize
rocks that cannot pass through the grizzly, while a controlled ore feed onto the strike conveyor is achieved
using the vibrating pan feeder. Please refer to Figure 9.

Figure 9: LHD Tipping & Conveyor Loading Station.
Ore from strike conveyors will be discharged onto a series of decline shaft belts for subsequent transfer
to the surface conveyor system.
3.1.4 Mine Ventilation

Ventilation infrastructure and equipment will be provided to supply fresh air for human respiration,
dilution and removal of pollutants. In shallower mechanised mines, principal pollutants are diesel
exhaust fumes, flammable gas, heat in the proximity of diesel machines and dust generated from
mining and transportation operations.
The basic principle in dealing with pollutants is to prevent or minimise as far as possible their emission
at source and then use sufficient ventilation volumes to dilute the remaining pollutants to a safe level
and remove them from the mine. Ventilation infrastructure and equipment will cater for:
 Initial portal and decline development;
 Air requirement for active diesel powered equipment;
 Air leakage, typical of room and pillar mining;
 Production sections being ventilated in series.
Ventilation infrastructure and equipment will be provided in accordance with air requirements for three
main phases over life of mine, namely initial development, first stoping and steady- state production.
Initial Development
Air required for initial decline development will be supplied through two decline shafts and released to the
surface through one of the outermost declines as indicated in Figure 10 and Figure 11 The return decline
will have two 75 kW exhaust fans in parallel configuration. A 1015 mm diameter galvanized steel duct
mounted through a wall will facilitate return air suction for each fan.

Figure 10: Portal RAW Ventilation Layout.
Total air intake for development declines will be 44 m3/s as each exhaust fan is capable of about 22 m3/s.
Figure 11: Initial Development Ventilation Layout
Development ends are ventilated by means of force fans and ducting. Each force fan is sized at 45 kW
to force 11 m3/s fresh air through a 762 mm ø rigid duct to a development face area. Please refer to
Figure 11.

First Stoping Sections

Once development and stoping has advanced to the position where the first two downcast shafts (one
on either side of the decline) are established, each downcast shaft will be fitted with an exhaust fan
capable of 130 m3/s and will initially be used as temporary upcast shafts.
Steady State Production

Two permanent upcast shafts will be established (5.0 m diameter each), downstream of the downcast shafts and
each upcast shaft will be equipped with two main fans, each rated for 130 m3/s. The two fans per shaft will be
installed in a bifurcated duct arrangement complete with self-closing doors. The fans will comprise two new ones
and two relocated from the temporary upcast installation discussed in the initial development section. Once the
two fans are relocated to the permanent upcast shafts, the two downcast shafts (temporarily used as
upcast shafts) will be turned into Intake Air Ways, increasing the total ventilation system capacity.
Production section ventilation

Each section will be ventilated with air coming from the bottom sections b.m.o. ventilation holdings
through pillars and fresh air from intake declines directed via strike drive to the working face by means
of jet fans, ventilation columns and seals.
3.1.5 Underground Infrastructure and Services

Underground infrastructure for each mine decline which will be developed in phases as mining
progresses will consist of, but not be limited to:
 Main workshops and stores;
 Satellite Workshops;
 Refuge bays;
 Underground MCC and mini-sub stations;
 Vent booster fan stations;
 Shaft bottom dam and pump station;
 Intermediate dams and pump stations (along the decline);
 Underground water reticulation for mining, potable and fire suppression;
 Underground Electrical, Instrumentation and Communications reticulation and networks;
 Decline conveyors;
 Strike conveyors including low profile LHD tipping stations;
 Section dewatering equipment.
Services
Services installed along decline shaft and strike conveyor haulages comprise service, potable, fire and
mine return water pipes as shown on Figures 12 and 13.

Figure 12: Cross Section through Decline Conveyor Haulage
Figure 13: Cross Section through strike Conveyor Haulage
Service water reticulation comprises 150NB main supply pipes installed in the decline shaft haulage and
a network of 100NB and other small bore piping branching off from the main supply line. The small bore
piping supply service water mainly to mechanised drill rigs and conveyor transfer points for dust
suppression. Fire and potable water is reticulated from a fire water pump station and potable water tank
respectively (which form part of surface infrastructure) along the decline and struck conveyor haulages.
Mine return water dams, sumps and pump stations will be used for containment and subsequent pumping
of dirty water to the surface settling dam. Dewatering will comprise of submersible pumps (one per drill
rig), 7.5kW and 22kW Vertical Spindle Pumps (VSPs) and piping ranging from 50NB hoses to 100NB

steel pipes suitable for each pump. Dirty water from the sections will be discharged at permanent dams
/ pump stations include a silt/mud trap before clean effluent is pumped to the surface using high lift pumps.
The following infrastructure elements are covered under the initial project capital footprint shown in
Figure 14.
 Services along the main decline shaft up to the tail end of Dip 2 conveyor haulage;
 Services along the first 75m of each of the seven strike conveyor haulages;
 The first permanent dam and pump station (in the decline shaft) and
 The first permanent underground mobile equipment workshop.
Decline/Strike
Underground Permanent Pumpstation haulages
Workshop
Figure 14: Portal 1 Initial Capital Footprint.
Capital footprints will differ from portal to portal however; the same principle will be applied in terms of
extent of initial facilities to be provided.
3.1.6 Underground facilities required

Main Underground Workshop
The first main underground workshop will be installed adjacent to the decline shaft as indicated in figure
14. The following facilities are provided at the main workshop:
 Two inspection and service ramps;
 Flat service bay with a 16 ton overhead crane;
 A service bay equipped with 5 ton overhead crane;
 Tyre storage bay complete with tyre handling facilities;
 Two wash bays;
 Lubrication and refuelling bay;
 Machine park bays;
 Oil/water separator unit and associated oil handling facilities;
 Offices, amenities and work bench areas.

Ancillary fire detection and suppression systems are provided. A part of the workshop is barricaded into
a stores area with a 5 tonne overhead crane.
Satellite Workshop
Daily and weekly service checks and minor repairs will be performed at Satellite Workshops located in
each active mining section. The workshop also provides machine parking bays at the end of each shift.
Satellite workshops will be established in mined out areas and located at least 100m but not more than
500m from the working face.
Bulk Fuel and Lubrication Facilities

Bulk diesel and lubrication receiving, storage and dispensing facilities will be located on surface. No bulk
storage is provided underground. Fuel, maintenance and lubrication cassette units suitable for Utility
Vehicles will be used to transport fuel and lubrication requirements from surface to underground workings.
Suitable lubrication and refuelling bays are provided at the main underground and satellite workshops to
accommodate the cassettes.
Underground Ore Handling

Underground conveyors comprise decline shaft and strike conveyor belts. Ore blasted from the mining
face is transported to the strike conveyor loading station using 10t LHDs. Loading stations are located
approximately 75m from the face to avoid excessive LHD tramming distance. Each loading station
consists of a low level steel structure supporting a static grizzly, low profile rock breaker and a vibrating
feeder. The rock breaker is used break oversize rocks that cannot pass through the grizzly, while a
controlled ore feed onto the strike conveyor is achieved using the vibrating pan feeder. Figure 15 is an
illustration of an LHD tipping and strike conveyor loading station.
Figure 15: LHD Tipping & Conveyor Loading Station.
Ore from strike conveyors is discharged onto a series of decline shaft belts for subsequent transfer to the
surface conveyor system.
Electrical Power Distribution

Mining areas receive electrical power by means of two parallel overhead lines at 33kV supplied from the
132kV/33kV/11kV Consumer Substation. At each portal, the 33kV supply voltage is stepped down to

11kV via a 10MVA 33kV/11kV transformer feeding the portal 11kV Portal Substation. This sub-station
then in turn supply power to the underground 11kV ring main units and miniature substation (connected
in a dual redundant ring configuration) via two 11kV feeders.
Underground low voltage reticulation is achieved by a combination of miniature substations, 525V motor
control centres and 525V gully box installations. Motor control centres will be located at an underground
pump station and at dip conveyor drive locations. Miniature substations and gully box installation will be
used in development and productions areas.
Control and Instrumentation

Each portal will be equipped with control and instrumentation facilities conveying information to a control
room on surface.
3.2 MINERAL PROCESSING AND PROCESS PLANT

Preliminary tests of ore indicate minimum variation in metallurgical performance across the mine lease
area. The ore classified as very hard. The weathered/oxide ore does not respond favourably to flotation.
Weathered ore can be blended with primary ore for improved flotation response. The correct blending
ratios varied on a case by case basis, however on samples tested, the ratio was on a 30:70 weathered:
primary.
The upgrade of Platinum Group Mineral (PMG) ores into a saleable concentrate consists of milling and
flotation. This process is similar to that used at the nearby Unki Platinum Mine and Ngezi Platinum Mine.
The main components of the process are:
 primary jaw crushing;
 secondary cone crushing;
 tertiary cone crushing;
 ball milling;
 rougher flotation;
 cleaner flotation; and
 thickening and filtering.
Figure 16 below provides a visual expression of the PGM mineral processing. Run-of-Mine (ROM) ore
will be dumped onto the ROM pad ahead of the crushing plant. ROM ore will be loaded by front-end
loader onto the grizzly ahead of the jaw crusher. The grizzly oversize will be fed into the jaw crusher,
while the grizzly undersize and the jaw crusher product will be combined and fed to the secondary screen.
The secondary screen oversize will pass to the secondary cone crusher. The secondary screen
undersize and the secondary cone crusher product will be fed to the tertiary screen. The tertiary screen
undersize will be conveyed to the ball mill feed bin while the tertiary screen oversize passes to the tertiary
cone crusher. The tertiary crusher product will be returned to the tertiary screen (MSA, 2014)
Crushed ore will be withdrawn from the ball mill feed bin via a vibrating feeder and conveyed to the ball
mill. The ball mill discharge will be pumped to a cyclone. The cyclone overflow will be gravity fed to a

linear screen to remove tramp material. The linear screen underflow will flow into the flotation feed tank.
The cyclone underflow will be returned to the ball mill. Flotation reagents (refer to above discussion on
reagents) will be added to the flotation feed tank and to various locations around the flotation circuit. The
rougher flotation concentrate will be cleaned twice to produce an acceptable final concentrate grade. The
cleaner tailings and re-cleaner tailings will be recycled to the previous flotation stage. The final flotation
concentrate will be thickened, filtered and trucked or railed to the smelter. The tailings from the rougher
flotation cells will be thickened and pumped to the tailings storage facility. The water recovered from the
tailings storage facility will be returned to the concentrator for re-use (MSA, 2014).

Source: MSA (2014)
Figure 16: Simplified process flow

The estimated metal recoveries to concentrate for each of the metals present in the ore feed is as listed
in Table 4 below.
Table 4: Projected PGE and base metal recoveries to concentrate
Element Recovery (Percentage)

Platinum 84
Palladium 83
Gold 83
Rhodium 83
4 EPGE 83
Ruthenium 36
Iridium 48
Copper 78
Nickel 80
Cobalt 35
Reagents
The following reagents and quantities will be used in the floatation plant:
Reagent Description Dosage Packaging
(t/month)
Collector Sodium Isobutyl Xanthate (SIBX) 103,6 1 tonne bulk bags
Activator Copper Sulphate 16,8 50 kg bags
Depressant Corboxymethyl Cellulose (CMC) 154,0 1 tonne bags
Frother Methyl Isobutyl Carbinol (MIBC) 13,7 200 litre drums
Anionic Flocculant Anionic Polyacrylamide 11,2 25/50 kg bags
Cationic Flocculant Cationic Polyacrylamide 5,6 25/50 kg bags
Sources: DRA, September 2016
The following additional infrastructure and services will be constructed to meet the requirements of the
process plant:
 Sealed Access Road To Concentrator Plant;
 Turnoff Junction For Access Road To Concentrator Plant;
 Terraces and Platforms;
 Topsoil Stockpile;
 Internal Plant Roads;
 Emergency RoM Stockpile;
 Parking Area passenger cars;
 Truck Parking Area;
 Bus and Taxi Drop off Area;
 Contractor's Laydown Area;
 Salvage Yard;

 Weighbridge and Weighbridge Control Room;

 Weighbridge Ablution Facility for Concentrate Truck Drivers;
 Plant Security and Access Control;
 Paint and Flammable Liquid Stores;
 MCC's for Milling, Concentrate, Reagents, Flotation, ROM Crushing and Services Areas;
 Medium Voltage Substation;
 Change-house, Laundry and Water Heating Facility;
 Plant Control Room;
 Compressors;
 Boilermaker, Engineering and EC&I Workshop;
 Electrical Cable Yard;
 Analytical Laboratory and associated equipment. Chemicals to be handled in the laboratory will
include:
o Hydrochoric Acid
o Nitric Acid
o Sodium Peroxide
o Lead (Pb)
o Silver (Ag). Reference should be made to the Environmental Management Plan, Volume II for details
on handling and storage of chemicals.
 Waste Collection and Disposal Yard.
 Process Water Reticulation;
 Potable Water Reticulation;
 Water Treatment Works;
 Potable Water Booster Pump Station;
 Plant and Instrument Air;
 Reagent Make-Up And Distribution;
 Fire and Potable Water Storage Tank;
 Sewerage Reticulation and Treatment Plant;
 Stormwater Reticulation, including All Road Crossing Culverts;
 Pollution Control Dam (25 000m3), including Silt Traps, Overflow and Pump Station;
 Process Water Storage Dams;
 Fire Water Pump Station and Fire Water Reticulation;
 High Mast Lighting;
 Low and Medium Voltage Power Reticulation;
 Back-Up Power (Gensets) including Fuel Storage Facility;
 Power Factor Correction (PFC);
 IT Networks;
 Control And Instrumentation Networks;
 Site Communication Systems.
The concentrator plant will include the following:

 Primary Crushing Station, including Retaining Wall Structure;
 Primary Crusher Discharge Conveyor;
 Transfer Towers;

 Stockpile Feed Conveyors;

 Crushed Ore Stockpile, including Stockpile Tunnel;
 SAG Mill Feed Conveyor;
 Reload Hoppers;
 Ball Loading and Storage Facilities;
 Primary Crushing;
 Sag Mill and Ball Mill and Lubrication Rooms;
 Pebble Conveyor;
 Pebble Crusher Transfer Tower, Tertiary Vertical Mill;
 Rougher Feed Tank and Pump Station;
 Flotation Area Day Tanks, Rougher/Scavenger Flotation;
 Cleaner/Re-cleaner Flotation;
 Thickener Area (Tailings, Clarifier and Concentrates);
 Tailings Disposal Facility (discussed in more detail below );
 Concentrate Filter Building;
 Instrumentation and Blower Air;
 Return Water Pump Station;
 Filter Cake Discharge Conveyor;
 Filter Cake Shuttle Conveyor;
 Reagents Building;
 Pipe and Cable Racks.
3.2.1 Mining and Processing Waste
Waste rock
Due to the nature of the Darwendale resource deposit and mining method applied, minimal to no waste
rock will be generated at any stage of the mine production, thus all rock will be handled as ore. In
situations where waste rock is generated, it will be transported to and stored in mined out sections,
therefore expelling the need to transport it to surface
Tailings
A tailings dam facility based on a projected 20 year Life of Mine (LoM) Tailings Storage Facility (TSF),
with a storage capacity of 67 200 000 tonnes, based on a maximum annual deposition of 3 360 000
tonnes is planned and will be constructed to the west of the mine lease area, refer to the site of works
Map 3 and Appendix A.. The TSF site selection process was based on a wet tailings deposition
methodology, a clay lined tailings storage facility, with impoundment perimeter walls being formed by a
day wall, upstream construction methods using the settled out coarser tailings fraction and an initial
starter wall constructed from locally sourced soils (SRK, 2016). Please refer to Appendix C.
The TSF will be constructed in a phased approached. The TSF will include:
 Storm water Control Dam,
 Storm water reticulation,
 Return Water Dam,
 Return Water Pump Station,

 Overland Tailings Pipeline,

 Overland Return Water Pipeline,
 Tailings Pump station,
 Power supply to TSF Facility,
 Communication system to TSF pumping System,
 Access Road to TSF,
 Security control and ,
 Fencing around the TSF.
SRK, the TSF design engineers have assumed the average height of the facility to be approximately 30
m with an outer slope of 1(v):3(h) on all sides, and a minimum TSF footprint area requirement of
approximately 210 ha including for the peripheral infrastructure such as roads, paddocks, pipelines and
drains, please refer to site of works Map 3 and Appendix A. SRK has further assumed that the TSF will
be developed as a conventional ring dyke construction using the day wall method. Typical PGM tailings
will provide the prerequisite strength to construct the outer raising walls via this method where coarse
tailings fractions would form outer perimeter walls above the elevation of a constructed starter wall. This
assumption is based on previous experience, and the grading and specific gravity of typical PGM type
tailings. The geotechnical characteristics of the tailings specific to the project are still being determined
(SRK, 2016).
Top soil
Stripped top soil from mining activities and the tailings dam site will be stock piled vegetated and re-used
for rehabilitation of open disused areas.
3.2.2 Surface infrastructure and equipment required

Surface infrastructure required to support the proposed mining operations has been allowed for at each
of the decline sites. The surface infrastructure clusters will be positioned near the portals at each of the
decline sites refer to site layout Map 3 below and Appendix A. Surface infrastructure will include:
Surface Ore Handling

Ore from underground workings will be transferred onto a network of surface conveyors, (refer to site of
works plan in Appendix A and Map 3) for offloading into a 3000 tonne surge silo. Ore will be withdrawn
from the silo using vibrating feeders and fed onto a conveyor for transfer to the plant’s crushing plant.

Map 3: Proposed mine layout plan
A bifurcated chute with a flopper gate installed at the head-end of the first dip conveyor will allow ore to
be diverted from the mainstream conveyors to an emergency stockpile in the event of prolonged
unavailability of the surface conveyor system. Each portal’s emergency facility will be used to stockpile
approximately 100 000 tonnes of ore which is anticipated to be produced during the construction of the
overland conveyor system and process plant facilities. A hopper will be provided for re-loading ore from
the emergency stockpile once the overland conveyors and crusher plant are operational.

Conveyor Road Crossing

To transfer run-of-mine ore from Portal 1, which is located on the southern side of the Murombedzi
highway, to the silo on the northern side of the highway, a conveyor will be installed in an underpass
constructed under the highway. Figure 17 illustrates the conveyor underpass to be constructed for Portal
1 conveyor crossing the Murombedzi highway.
Figure 17: Conveyor Road Underpass
Ancillary Equipment
Ancillary equipment for the conveyor system includes all instruments required for the operation and
control of the conveyor belt system, fire detection and dust suppression equipment at transfer points.
Allowance has also been made for a tramp iron magnet at the head-end of the first decline belt (day
lighting from the shaft) for the removal of tramp iron before material is discharged onto overland conveyor
belts.
Surface Ventilation
Two surface fan stations, each station comprising of two fans in a bifurcated duct arrangement will be
established for life of mine. Each fan will be designed for a duty of 130m2/sec at 2.4kPa and driven by a
429kW electric motor.
3.2.3 Services and Civil Infrastructure

Services and civil infrastructure to be established at each underground mine include:
Terraces, Earthworks and Infrastructure

Approximately 64,500m2 of terrace will be constructed for each underground portal’s surface
infrastructure area. Due to the flat terrain, one big level terrace, sloped at 1:150 for adequate rainwater
drainage will be constructed. The terrace will be approximately 600mm thick, providing only a level
capped surface for stormwater management and storage of materials. The terraces will be capped with
a G5 wearing course. Bituminous seal or asphalt will not be used.
The terrace will cater for the following areas:

 Mine complex platforms;

 Parking area for passenger vehicles;

 Truck parking area;
 Brake test ramps;
 Bus and taxi drop off area;
 Contractor's laydown area;
 Stores area;
 Salvage yard and
 Waste collection and disposal yard.
Contractors Laydown Areas

An approximate 18,300m2 of terrace will be constructed at each underground portal’s surface
development area. This terrace will be used as “laydown” area for contractors to establish their site offices
and storage yards during construction.
Boxcuts and Declines Shafts

The mineral Reef will be accessed via portals from a boxcut. Boxcuts vary in depths from one portal to
the other and have a slope of 9 degrees, protected by dry stone pitching to minimise soil erosion.
An earth berm and trench will be constructed around the boxcut to divert and minimise the amount of
stormwater into the boxcut. Surface run-off from the boxcut’s projected area will be captured in an open
grit concrete drain and sump constructed at the bottom of the highwall for subsequent pumping to the
stormwater pollution control dam.
Storm water Reticulation

All storm water drains for the underground Portal surface complex will be concrete lined. This will ensure
ease of cleaning of silt in the drains during the maintenance periods. The drains will be trapezoidal in
shape with the bottom section having a minimum width of 300mm and a side slope of 1:1.5.
Approximately 1,740m of drains will be constructed on terraces, channelling storm water to the silt trap
and Pollution Control Dam (PCD). Concrete slabs will be provided over drains where roads cross storm
water channels.
Pollution Control Dam

A concrete silt trap facility will be constructed for settling out silt before stormwater enters the Pollution
Control Dam. The PCD will be constructed to contain 19,000m3 of water during a stormy event or a 1:100
year flood event. In the case of an event larger than the 1:100 year flood, PCD overflow will be channelled
to the environment through a spillway. The PCD will be lined with a 1500 micron thick uPVC liner with
subsoil drains and pipes below the liner. The dam will have an 800mm spillway freeboard. Internal
embankments will be constructed to 1:2 slopes and outside embankments to a slope of 1:3 to ensure
proper re-growth of grass and vegetation on embankments. Re-growth will slow and eliminate erosion of
the embankments. A pumpstation with submersible pumps will be installed at the PCD to pump water to
the Clean Water Dam located adjacent to the boxcut for use in underground workings.

3.2.4 Services
Potable Water Treatment and Reticulation
Raw water will be provided from the Raw Water Balancing Dam and will gravity feed to the Water
Treatment Works at each portal. The Water Treatment Facility will be a modular packaged plant for
processing raw water to meet the World Health Organisation potable water standards . The plant will be
designed to meet the water requirements for 1 200 employees, that is each employee using 180 litres
per day which equates to 216 m3 of potable water usage per day.
Potable water from the treatment plant will be pumped into an 820 m3 potable and fire water storage tank
at ground level. The tank will comprise of two compartments to ensure one compartment can be cleaned
or maintained without affecting supply. A variable speed controlled booster pump system will be installed
to supply and maintain system pressure to different water demands area on the mine. Potable water
reticulation pipes vary in diameter from 32mm to 200mm and will be buried underground.
Fire Water Reticulation

A fire pump station comprising an electric, a jockey and diesel pump will be constructed close to the
potable and fire water tanks forming part of surface infrastructure. Water from the pumpstation will be
reticulated to surface infrastructure via a 160mm diameter, Class PN12 buried uPVC pipes to a grid of
firefighting hydrants. To provide fire protection on underground and surface conveyors, fire water will be
reticulated via steel pipes installed along conveyor routes, with fire hydrants installed at intervals not
exceeding 90 metres. Overland and plant conveyors will have a fire water line along the full length of the
conveyor with hose reels fitted at 60 m intervals. Due to the various lengths and location of surface
conveyors, fire water to each conveyor will be supplied from the nearest fire pump station.
Services Water Reticulation

Raw water will be supplied from the Raw Water Balancing Dam and will be gravity fed to the underground
surface infrastructure area. Raw water will be distributed to the engineering and maintenance areas for
washing of machines and gardening. The reticulation system will also be connected to top up water level
(if required) in the Clean Water Dam located adjacent to the boxcut for use in underground workings.
110mm diameter, PN10, PE100, (High-density polyethylene) HDPE pipe will be installed for this purpose.
Settling and Clean Water Storage Dams;

Each underground mine will be provided with a settling and clean water dam arrangement adjacent to
the boxcut. Settling dams will consist of two compartments each of approximately 1850m3 in volume. The
allowance for two compartments has been made to ensure that mining production is not interrupted while
the settling dams are cleaned during maintenance. Settling dams will be constructed using clay soil walls
with an embankment slope on the inside and outside of 1:3. A stone pitched access ramp will be provided
for small cleaning equipment to access each compartment.
Mine return water from underground workings will be pumped to either one of the compartments for
settling of silt before clean water overflows into the 300m3 clean water storage dam. Water from the clean
water storage dam will be gravity fed through a 150NB steel pipe to the underground service water
reticulation. Top up water will be supplied either from the Pollution Control Dam (during the rainy season)
or from the raw water supply pipeline.

Sewerage Reticulation and Treatment Plant

Sewerage reticulation will be installed on the underground mine surface terraces. The sewerage lines will
be installed from all buildings with toilets, showers or kitchens etc. from where waste water is generated.
Sewerage reticulation will consist of 160mm or 250mm diameter, uPVC Class 34 “Durodrain” type buried
pipes. An estimated 900m length of piping will be installed. A total of 31 manholes will be installed for
maintenance purposes.
A modular type Sewage Treatment Plant will be constructed at the lowest point of the terrace. All the
sewerage pipe reticulation will gravity feed to the sewage treatment plant. The plant will be designed to
treat sewage for 1 200 people per day. The sewage treatment plant inlet works will consist of a screen to
remove solid and non-sewerage items such as plastic bags etc. from raw sewage before treatment.
Treated effluent will be pumped to the Pollution Control Dam for re-use as mine service water.
Sludge from the sewerage treatment plant will be disposed into dry beds. Once the sludge has dried out,
it will be mixed with wooden chips and spread onto the tailings dam or waste dump embankments which
will be used as fertiliser for the lawns around the plant and offices. . Sludge will be removed once or twice
a year.
Waste Management
A waste management procedure will be developed to ensure that waste generated is collected and
disposed of correctly. The procedure shall prescribe methods for:
 Identifying different waste streams and containment thereof,
 Separating and managing waste,
 Recycling waste products and
 Waste disposal.
Waste will be collected in waste bins located at offices, buildings, workshops, laboratories, medical
facility, laundry, kitchens, sewage plants etc. and transported to a fenced, waste management area for
sorting before disposal to the waste disposal facility on site. These fenced areas will be located at each
of the mining surface infrastructure and process plant areas. Figure 18 shows waste management area
for Portal 1 surface infrastructure.

Waste
Management
Area
Figure 18: Portal 1 Waste Management Area.

High Mast Lighting

High mast lighting will be provided for the mining surface infrastructure area. High mast lighting will consist
of 22 m swivel pole structures with 6 x 1000 W floodlights per pole.
Low and Medium Voltage Power Reticulation

Mine surface infrastructure will be supplied with electrical power from the main 11kV substation by means
of miniature substations located at various consumer points i.e. workshops, change houses, offices, etc.
The substation dedicated to supply power to the main ventilation fans will be located on a terrace at the
top of the box-cut high-wall.
Back-Up Power (Gensets) including Fuel Storage Facility

Backup Generators will be provided at the underground portal surface area. These generators will be
installed on concrete plinths. Fuel storage tank for the generators will be installed in a concrete bunded
sump catering for more than 110% of the fuel stored.
Power Factor Correction (PFC)

Power factor correction will be provided at each Portal and will be connected to the 11 kV main substation.
The power factor correction equipment will be sized such that the overall power factor, as measured on
the 11 kV bus bars, is at least 0.98.
IT Networks
The mining infrastructure will be connected to the overall IT Network for the operation via a fibre optic
cable installed on the 33 kV overhead lines supplying power to each portal area.
Control and Instrumentation Networks

Each portal will have its own dedicated control room for the control of its surface and underground
infrastructure.
Site Communication Systems.

General site communication system consists of:
 PABX telephone system utilising IT system infrastructure and
 Hand held radio base station and radios.
Underground communication will be effected by a leaky feeder system.
Fencing
Three types of fencing has been planned; around the underground portal surface areas namely low,
medium and high security fencing. Low security fencing is intended to keep cattle and people out of areas
such as the pollution control dams. Medium security fencing will be installed around the stores areas
while the high security fencing will be installed around the mining surface complex area.
Approximate distances of fencing that will be installed are as follows:

 Low Security fencing : 1 065m

 Medium Security fencing : 509m

 High Security fencing : 1 136m
3.3 BUILDINGS AND INFRASTRUCTURE

3.3.1 Existing Infrastructure: On site
Existing infrastructure within in the mine lease area include the following:
 Railway line stretching a total length of approximately 4.02 km ZIMPLATS water pipeline with a
total length of 9.70km and a
 ZIMPLATS Water pumping station
 A 9.69 km tarred road network
 Seven sewage ponds, with a 33,007 m2 capacity situated less than 200 m from the Manyame
River and at 2.1% slope towards the river in the east-west. Please refer to Image 3 below.
Image 3: Existing on site infrastructure

(a) Location of seven sewage ponds and elevation transect line in the northern part of the mining claim
(b) Elevation of the transect cutting across the ponds.
Residential buildings include:

 The training institute (ZIPAM);
 A minimum of 32 settlement units were noted inside the claim area (satellite images from Google
Earth (2016);

 The Lake Manyame Residential Park (owned by Mr Drummond, a local farmer) comprising of 70
sub-divisions covering a total area of 6.98 km2 located in the south eastern part of the claim area.
The stands are at different stages of development ranging from completed houses to
undeveloped stands. The location of these stands is within the mining claim area, and the
proposed underground main conveyor from Portal 1 block 4, are below The Lake Manyame
Residential Park.
3.3.2 Proposed on site buildings

Buildings and infrastructure required to provide a fully functional underground mine will be constructed
either from brick and mortar structures or from steel portal structures which are either clad with IBR
sheeting or with brickwork. Roof structures shall be either constructed from steel or timber depending on
the purpose of the structure and the cost of the construction of such a system. Internal finishes to the
buildings will be plastered and painted and in areas such as bathrooms, toilets, kitchens, boardrooms
etc. the walls will be clad with tiles. The floors in working areas such as workshops, stores etc. will be
concrete with a screed additionally in areas such as offices, toilet facilities, boardrooms, kitchens the
floors will be tiled.
The buildings and structures for each portal underground mine surface infrastructure will include:
 Security and Access Control Facility;
 First Aid Station;
 Changehouse including Lamproom and crush, laundry facility and Water Heating;
 Mine Operations Offices;
 Mine Control Room;
 Proto Room Facility;
 Engineering and EC & I Workshop;
 Underground Mobile Equipment Workshop (surface);
 Tyre Handling Facility;
 Mine Stores Facility;
 Paint And Oil Stores;
 Portal Substation;
 Ventilation substations;
 Bus and Taxi Ablution facility;
The following structures will also be constructed to ensure that the mine operates optimally:
 Bulk Emulsions Storage Facility;
 Bulk Fuel storage and Dispensing Facility;
 Washbay Facility including a Silt Trap and Oil/Water Separation Facility;
Employee Accommodation
No employee accommodation will be constructed on site. Employees will be paid an accommodation
allowance in lieu of housing facilities. It is envisaged that the majority of employees will live in nearby
towns including Harare and transported to the mine and process plant using company owned buses.
Great Dyke Investment’s Management accommodation camp

The existing accommodation camp is deemed sufficient for the client’s management team during
construction. No extensions will be made to the camp.
Contractors Accommodation
A provisional area for possible contractor camps has been identified next to the existing GDI management
accommodation camp. Refer to the site of works map.
Medical Centre
Each underground mine will have a small First Aid Station to cater for minor injuries. A medical centre
will be constructed to attend to major injuries emanating from the process and mining operations. The
medical centre will also serve as a First Aid training and occupational health test centre. The facility will
be manned by nurses and paramedics. The medical centre will also serve to stabilise serious injuries
before patients are transported by Ambulance to a fully-fledged hospital presumably located in Harare. .
The medical facility centre will be a brick and mortar structure with plastered and painted walls. The roof
structure will be wooden trusses clad with Inverted Box Rib (IBR) sheeting. Ceilings will be installed below
the trusses, floors and toilet interior walls will be tiled.
Central Store and Store Yard

A central store and store yard will be constructed for receiving, storing and subsequent “issuing-out” of
material requirements for mining and process plant operations. The main stores building will be
constructed from a steel portal frame structure on concrete bases and a concrete floor slab. Steel frames
will be clad with IBR sheeting at the sides and roof and a ventilation ridge will be installed on the roof top.
Large roller shutter doors will be installed for access into the building. The stores office area will be a
brick and mortar structure with plastered and painted walls. The roof structure will be wooden trusses
clad with IBR sheeting. Ceilings will be installed below the trusses, floors and toilet interior walls will be
tiled.
A store yard comprising of a fenced hard stand will be provided adjacent to the stores building for storage
of bulky and outdoor type spares and equipment. Vehicles will be loaded and offloaded in designated
areas and security control points will provided at appropriate areas around the stores and store yard.
Administration Offices
A central office complex will be constructed to accommodate administration and senior management
personnel for plant and underground mining operations, Safety, Health, Environment and Quality, Human
resources etc. The remaining management and administration functional requirements directly
associated with mine operations will be located at the respective process and/ or mine infrastructure
offices.
Offices will be of brick and mortar structures with plastered and painted walls. The roof structure will be
wooden trusses clad with IBR sheeting. Ceilings will be installed below the trusses, floors and toilet
interior walls will be tiled.
Carports and Walkways

A parking area will be constructed close to the centralised office complex and 30 steel carports for senior
management will be installed. The carports will be fenced off with a manually controlled access gate.
Fuel Storage and dispensing area

Fuel storage and dispensing facilities will be provided outside the plant area. Fuel storage tanks will be
installed on concrete bunded slabs to contain spillages. Vehicles that are envisaged to fill up at the fuel
area are:
 Management vehicles;
 Concentrate trucks;
 Employee buses and
 Plant mobile equipment.
Explosives Magazine
A central magazine will be constructed to service all underground mining operations. The magazine will
be located at least 3km away from any permanent infrastructure in accordance to the Explosives
Magazine Regulations (refer to the legislative framework section). Additionally, Explosives Magazine will
be constructed in accordance to the requirements stated in the Explosives Regulations, S.I 72 of 1989.
High security fencing and lockable gates with a security guard house will be provided to ensure 24 hour
security at the facility.
Training and Induction Centre

A training and induction centre will be located close to the plant area where training and long term visitor
inductions will be conducted for both plant and mining operations. Daily visitor inductions will be carried
out at each respective operation’s security gatehouse. The centre will incorporate two open plan areas
with a small kitchen and toilet facilities and will be a brick and mortar structure with plastered and painted
walls. The roof structure will be wooden trusses clad with IBR sheeting. Ceilings will be installed below
the trusses, floors and toilet interior walls will be tiled.
Bus Terminus and Ablution Facilities;

Bus/taxi terminus facilities will be constructed for employees using public or mine transport i.e. company
owned busses. A brick and mortar ablution structure with plastered and painted walls will be provided at
the bus terminus for the convenience of the commuters. The roof structure will be wooden trusses clad
with IBR sheeting. Ceilings will be installed below the trusses, floors and toilet interior walls will be tiled.
Mobile Equipment required

Mobile equipment required for the proposed project will include; underground, plant and surface
machinery and vehicles. Surface mobile machinery includes but is not limited to service and maintenance
vehicles, man and material transport, plant mobile equipment. Underground mobile machinery will include
all trackless mobile machinery required for a room and pillar mine including but not limited to mining and
development equipment, man and material transport, supervisory, service and maintenance vehicles.
The required mobile equipment is indicated in Table 5 below.

Table 5: On Surface Mobile equipment required
Plant Mobile Machinery

Skid-steer Loader(s)
Front End Loader(s) (general plant operations)
Wheel Loaders (concentrate handling)
Tele handler
Construction & Maintenance
Road Grader(s)
Compactor(s)
All Terrain Mobile Crane
Rough Terrain Mechanical Handlers
Water Bowser(s)
TLBs
Tractors
7T Crane Truck
Light Duty Vehicles
Personnel Transport
Buses (66 passenger carriers)
Minibuses (15 passenger carriers)
Materials Handling & Transport
Forklifts
Heavy Duty Vehicles
Light Duty Vehicles
Operations and General Service Vehicles
Light Duty Vehicles
Emergency Vehicles
Ambulance
Fire Truck
Source DRA, September 2016
3.3.3 Existing infrastructure: Off site

Existing infrastructure around the mine lease area includes the following:
 An 80kV national grid conductor runs east west from Norton to Selous. A 330kv conductor from the
main Alaska substation is located 10km to the north en-route to Harare. A network of 11kv
conductors connects the surrounding farms and plots but none of it passes through the project area.
The nearest 11kV connection point is on Plot No 4 to the south.
 ZESA 33kv power line dedicated to the National Railways of Zimbabwe (NRZ)

 Darwendale Dam and the dam wall, stretching 1.23 km, with its centre approximately 900m from the
mine lease area is located to the south-west. The dam was constructed between 1973 and 1976 with
an effective capacity of 480,200Ml and a water yield of 107,220Ml from a catchment of 3740 km2 in
extent. Upstream is Lake Chivero, constructed in 1952, which retains a further 250 million cubic
metres of water. The two reservoirs are interlinked by means of the 15 kilometre-long Darwendale
Tunnel, which at a depth of 80 metres, draws water back to the Morton Jaffray Waterworks below
Chivero for treatment and transmission to the cities of Harare and Chitungwiza. Apart from
downstream release, the dam has four 800mm outlet valves, that can be connected for other uses.
Please refer to Photo 1a below One of these serves the pumphouse dedicated to the 40km-long
transmission line to Zimplat’s Smelting and Metallurgical Complex at Selous, please refer to Photo
1b below. This pipeline passes downstream along the left bank of the Manyame River and then
follows the western side of the Great Dyke, in part traversing the proposed plant area for the
Darwendale Platinum Project, as well as the current chrome mining activities.
(b)
(a)
Photo 1: Outlets at Darwendale Dam

(There are four 800mm outlets one of which is utilized for the Zimplats Metallurgical Complex at Selous)
3.3.4 Project Infrastructure and Services required Off-site•
Water Supply
Neither surface nor ground water form viable options for a sustainable water supply for mining operations
within the northern portion of the mining lease. Supplementary ground water from boreholes could be
developed along the western Great Dyke margin with granite, and also from mine workings. Although
there are significant farm dams on the Saruwe, neither the Makwiro nor Saruwe catchments can be
considered as a potential future source of impounded water for mining purposes. Again ground water
might only provide a supplementary water source with boreholes concentrated along the eastern Dyke
contact. If this activity is contemplated, conflict for ground water could arise with resident farmers. Again
ground water potential is low across the central portion of the Great Dyke in the south where gabbronorite
is the predominant bedrock. Underground mining here may reach depths in excess of 700 metres below
ground level along the axis of the Great Dyke syncline where ground water should not be an issue. .
Given what amounts to limited ground water potential and alternative surface water resources to provide
an adequate water supply for the Darwendale Project, the only reliable source of industrial, mining and

domestic water is from the Darwendale Dam. An agreement for the purchase of bulk water from
Darwendale Dam will need to be concluded with the Manyame Catchment Council, who may be willing
to enter into a 15-year and potentially renewable agreement with GDI for this purpose. A dedicated pump
station below the dam; an 800mm pipeline and water treatment plant would become the responsibility of
GDI, as would the judicious use and recycling of water within the process that will reduce or negate loss
to the surrounding and downstream environment.
There is a precedent in that Zimplats draws water from the dam, which is piped south to the Selous
Metallurgical Complex.
GDI proposes to utilize the existing off take infrastructure that is, it proposes that suction (500NB) will be
taken from the “spare” suction pipe next to the Zimplats suction pipe. Currently the “spare” suction pipe is
fitted with a blank flange and a small diameter (~100mm) stub. Please see Photo 1a.
Raw Water reservoir
A 48 000m3 lined raw water reservoir will be constructed on the highest hill between the Manyame dam,
processing plant and mining areas. The capacity of the reservoir is such that it will be able to provide
storage equivalent to three day’s water demand for the mines operations in the event that there is a
breakdown at the main pump station.
The reservoir will be lined with a 1500 micron uPVC liner with subsoil drains and pipes below the liner
and will have a freeboard of more than 800 mm before spilling. Internal embankments will be constructed
to 1:25 slopes with outside embankments to a 1:3 slope. This will ensure proper re-growth of grass and
vegetation on embankments protecting them against soil erosion.
The reservoir will be divided into two compartments to ensure continued water supply during maintenance
and cleaning. Scour valves are provided for cleaning and draining purposes of respective compartments.
Process, mining and tailings waters will be contained within closed systems that will ensure recycling and
reuse, losses to evaporation being accepted.
Water recycling/closed system

Mine waters, underground, and runoff diverted from mining operations will be canalized and recycled
within the closed system. The closed water circuit within the concentrator plant area combined with a
return water dam designed below the tailings facility. This will include drainage design to divert all runoff
waters from the plant, and other infrastructure that will allow water storage and reuse.
Any overflow structures will include within their design silt traps and a means for seasonal water quality
monitoring based on a network of sampling points identified by the mine’s SHE department.
Electricity Supply
Electrical power will be supplied by the Zimbabwe Electricity and Distribution Company (ZEDTC) by
means of two 132 kV overhead power lines. The 132 kV overhead lines will terminate at the Darwendale
132 kV Consumer substation which will consist of:

 2 x 30 MVA 132 kV / 11 kV transformers (and associated switchgear) for 11 kV power reticulation to

the main 11 kV concentrator substation.
 2 x 20 MVA 132 kV / 33 kV transformers (and associated switchgear) for 33 kV power reticulation via
two overhead lines to the Portal 1, Portal 2, Portals 3, Tailings Storage Facility and the Manyame
Water Pump Station.
3.3.5 Roads
Access Road and Turn-off
Two sealed turn-offs will be constructed on the Murombedzi highway to provide access to mine and
process plant infrastructure complexes. Consideration for slowing down and overtaking lanes will be
made. The existing Murombedzi highway width will be increased from one lane to two lanes each
direction at each turn off zone, to allow uninterrupted traffic flow in the event of vehicles turning off to
the mine or joining the highway. Figure 19 shows the main turn-offs and access roads to the mine and
process plant infrastructure.
Figure 19: Access Roads

Approximately 940m of sealed access road will be constructed from the Norton – Murombedzi turn-off
providing access to Portal 1 infrastructure and contractors’ laydown area. Access roads to the
Concentrator Plant and Portals 2 and 3 accounting for an additional 2 500m of sealed access roads.
Internal Mine Roads

Approximately 2150 m of internal roads will be constructed with gravel wearing course on the terrace
platforms. Gravel roads will be constructed in designed layer works approximately 750mm in depth.
These roads will be slightly elevated above the terraces and would take into consideration storm water
drainage requirements. Storm water crossings will be by means of concrete slabs over open trapezoidal
storm water trenches.
Road Markings, Signage and Lighting

Proper road markings will be provided on the stretches leading to intersection points to aid motorists in
selecting the correct lanes. “Cat’s eye” road reflective studs will be installed for ease of identifying lanes
during night driving. Road signage shall be in accordance to the Southern African Development
Committee (SADC) Road Traffic Signs Guidelines.
Road safety recommendations provided by the Department of Roads will considered for placement of
tower lights around intersection points.
3.4 HUMAN RESOURCES

Human resource requirements are based on proposed operational parameters for:
 Mine development (flat end and incline end development);
 Production related (ledging and stoping);
 Mine equipping;
 Logistics and engineering and
 Processing plant.
Additional labour will be required for general services applicable to both mining and mineral processing
operations. Estimated employment figures indicate that during full mine operation, employment numbers
will be between 3 000 and 3 500 employees (these include both full and part time employees). During
the construction phase, approximately 350 people will be employed on a permanent basis, with additional
manpower on contract or task specific contract.
The bulk of the labour will consist of mining employees, 46%; followed by Engineering, 24%; Mine
Services (22%); Concentrator plant, 7% and Mine management 1%. Refer to the pie chart, Figure 20
below:

Figure 20: Total Labour Split
The high level organisational structure comprises:

 Senior management
 Operations management for mining, processing plant and general services
Senior management will consist of:
A General Manager and Head of Departments (HOD) of the following:

 Concentrator
 Engineering
 Mine Production (the number of HOD will depend on the number of portals operating)
 Production services
 Finance
 Safety Health, Environment and Quality (SHEQ)
 Mine Technical services
 Human Resources
Departmental management will consist of; A Manager – Responsible for each of mining, processing,
central services assisted by various functional heads of services.
3.5 PROJECT TIMELINE

The build-up of production from underground will take approximately two and a half years from the start
of decline development. Refer to the proposed project time line below.

2015 2016 2017 2018 2019
Nov
May
Nov
May
Nov
May
Nov
May
Nov
Mar
Mar
Mar
Mar
Jan
Feb
Jun
Aug
Sep
Jan
Feb
Jun
Aug
Sep
Jan
Feb
Jun
Aug
Sep
Jan
Feb
Jun
Aug
Sep
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Dec
Apr
Apr
Apr
Apr
Oct
Oct
Oct
Oct
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Feasibility Study
Feasibility Study
Board Approval Stage Gate
Kick off Execution Phase
Mining - Underground
Front End Engineering and Design
Detailed Design (Mining & Engineering)
Procurement (Contract Negotiations)
Mining Contractor Mobilization
Site establishment - Mining Contractor Start of Portal 1 & 2 First Concentrator
Internal Haul Roads Implementation Ore (stockpiled) Plant
Topsoil - Start Removal Phase Commissioned
Portal 1 Boxcut & Portal
Portal 2 Boxcut & Portal
Manufacture
Fabrication and Delivery
Earthworks & Early works
Portal 1 Dip 1 Conveyor Belt Construction
Emergency S/pile Feed Conveyor Construction
Portal 1 Overland Conveyor Construction
3000T Silo Construction
Crusher Bin Feed Conveyor Construction
Portal 2 Dip 1 Conveyor Belt Construction
Emergency S/pile Feed Conveyor Construction
Silo Feed Conveyor Construction
Overland Conveyor System Commissioning
Portal 1 Ore to Crushing Plant 140ktpm
Portal 2 Ore to Crushing Plant 140ktpm
Process Plant & Stockpile 400, 000t
Procurement
Detail Design
Manufacture
Fabrication and Delivery
Earthworks & Early works
Construction
Commissioning
Ore into mill (280 ktpm) 280 ktpm
Infrastructure
Detailed Geotechnical Investigation
Procurement
Detail Design
Earthwork Contractor Mobilization
Borrow Pit Material
Laydown Areas x 2 (Underground Mining)
Laydown Areas (Plant & Infrastructure)
Access Roads
Terraces
Tailings Storage Facility (TSF)
Raw Water Supply
Construction Power
Permanent Power (GDI)
Construction
Long Lead Time Items
Mills

3.6 PROJECT COSTS AND BILL OF QUANTITIES
Aspect Estimated Cost (USD) millions

Underground mining 209 845 131
Concentrator 122 586 119
Services 2 114 653
fencing 1 28 259
Infrastructure 23 405 507
Total 383 499 864
Please refer to Appendix D for the bill of quantities.

4 ALTERNATIVES CONSIDERED
In terms of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Policy Guidelines, 1997, feasible alternatives
are required to be considered within the Environmental Study. The identified, feasible alternatives are
required to be evaluated in terms of social, biophysical, economic and technical factors.
4.1 THE DO NOTHING ALTERNATIVE

The ‘do-nothing’ alternative is the option of not undertaking the mineral exploration. This option means
that the potential social and economic benefits of the project will not be realised if the project does not
go ahead.
The following alternatives were considered for tailings site location as well as the mining method.
4.2 TAILINGS DAM FACILITY SITE

Four (4) potential sites were considered for the Tailings Storage Facility (TSF). This section provides a
discussion as to the best site and explains how the site selection evaluation, assumptions made and
recommendation was based.
The site selection evaluation was based on a projected 20 year LoM TSF, with a storage capacity of 67
200 000 tonnes, based on a maximum annual deposition of 3 360 000 dry tonnes.
SRK, engineering companies contracted to design the tailings dam evaluated four (4) proposed potential
TSF sites on the following criteria: -
 Maximum closure rate of rise 1.7 metres/annum.
 Side slope Factor of Safety greater than 1.5, this would require outer side slopes of approximately
(1v:3h). As the closure rate of rise is one of the TSF limiting criteria when determining the footprint
area requirements. SRK has determined that the closure top surface area cannot be less than 137
hectares (ha) assuming that the outer walls will be constructed with the deposited tailings once above
the starter wall.
 Assuming the average height of the facility is approximately 30 m with an outer slope of 1(v):3(h) on
all sides, the minimum TSF footprint area requirement would be approximately 210 ha including for
peripheral infrastructure such as roads, paddocks, pipelines and drains.
 SRK has assumed that the TSF will be developed as a conventional ring dyke construction using the
day wall method. Typical PGM tailings will provide the prerequisite strength to construct the outer
raising walls via this method where coarse tailings fractions would form outer perimeter walls above
the elevation of a constructed starter wall. This assumption is based on previous experience, and
the grading and specific gravity of typical PGM type tailings. The geotechnical characteristics of the
tailings specific to the project are still being determined. The site selection process is therefore based
on a wet tailings deposition methodology, a clay lined tailings storage facility, with impoundment
perimeter walls being formed by a dry wall; upstream construction methods using the settled out
coarser tailings fraction and an initial starter wall constructed from locally sourced soils.

4.2.1 Identified Potential tailings dam Sites

The site inspection and associated evaluation highlighted the following pertinent information that had a
direct bearing on the site selection process of the TSF:-
 Generally very flat ground should be avoided where possible, as a lack of perimeter drainage
(clean and dirty water) is generally associated with these areas;
 Steep sloping ground should be avoided where possible, unless forming sides are to a potential
valley dam impoundment or a hillside; and
 SRK has assumed that the outer walls of the TSF will be constructed with consolidated tailings
and an initial starter wall constructed from local soils.
The four (4) proposed potential TSF sites which were identified are as follows (refer to image 4 for
locations of identified TSF site):-
 TSF Site 1 (TSF 1) is located directly north of the proposed plant site;
 TSF Site 2 (TSF 2) is located further north of TSF Site 1 (further north of the plant site), on land
not currently owned or leased by the mine;
 TSF Site 3 (TSF 3) (also referred to as the Hillside site) is located south east of the proposed
plant site within the mid regions of the mining concession area (i.e. in the northern portion of the
north south divide of the mine concession area allocated for future mining);
 TSF Site 4 (TSF 4) (also referred to as the Valley site) is located in the southern most parts of
the mine concession area.

Image 4: Potential Tailings Dam Sites

Source SRK, August 2016

SRK used an empirical method of ranking the sites in terms of their characteristics was employed.
The following information was used in the quantitative ranking of the proposed potential TSF sites, using
utility functions and weighting factors, which enable the sites to be ranked on an impartial basis.
a) Land ownership/surface rights/mining concessions/prospecting concessions
b) Land use
c) Survey Available
d) Access/Servitude/Major Trucking Route Crossings Required
e) Stability/Geotechnical
i) Dam base area
ii) Average slope of ground
iii) Maximum dam height
iv) Preliminary Hazard Rating
v) Depths of Construction Materials on Site
f) Relocation of Existing Services
i) Structures and/or Boreholes (sealing of boreholes)
ii) Relocation of Homesteads and Families
iii) Access Roads/ Farm Roads or Cattle Enclosures
iv) Storm-water Drainage Lines
v) Compensation Payments
g) Potential for expansion
h) Slurry and Return Water Pumping (length)
i) Slurry Pumping Static Head (Plant to Top of Tailings Dam Final Elevation)
j) Power Supply
k) Environmental Impact
i) Contamination of watercourse, wetlands and groundwater
ii) Destruction of minor wetlands and/or natural vegetation
iii) Air Pollution - Dust contamination due to wind.
iv) Proximity to major residential areas/communities
v) Proximity to major public thoroughfare (National/Provincial Road)
vi) Proximity to closest mining infrastructure (Plant/Mining Areas)
vii) Potential to Lock-up/Sterilise Ore Deposits
viii) Public Participation Exercise (Interested and Affected Parties)
ix) Proximity to Significant Cultural Features
x) Exhumation and Reburial Costs
l) Estimated Capital Budget Costs based on 4 major criteria
It should be noted, that the estimated capital costs are still to be determined and an appropriate spread
of the capital costs, based on the main categories which contribute to at least 80% of the capital
expenditure, viz. LoM wall building bulk earthworks, slurry delivery and return water pipelines and return
water complex.
The site ranking matrix results indicates that TSF 1 ranks higher than the other remaining TSF sites, while
TSF. TSF 2 to TSF 3 rank lower and similar to each other and TSF 4 is the least desirable site. The

main reasons which contributed to each potential TSF site ranking position is summarised in the Table 6
below.
Table 6: Tailings Storage Facility site ranking
Potential Ranking Main Reasons for Ranking Position

Site Position
TSF 1 1 - Located within the existing mining concession and infrastructure lease
area.
- Close proximity to plant which reduces the capital costs associated with
pipelines, power supply or access roads.
- Wall construction materials available within relatively close proximity to the
site thereby reducing capital costs associated with overhaul associated
with wall construction materials.
- Limited degree of disruption to large scale agricultural land use.
- Lesser degree of disruption to existing water courses.
- No impact on/or risk associated with undermining or ore reserve
sterilization.
TSF 2 2 - Close proximity to plant reduces the capital costs associated with pipelines,
power supply or access roads.
- Wall construction materials available within relatively close distance from
the site, thereby reducing capital costs associated with overhaul associated
with wall construction materials.
- Limited disruption to agricultural land use.
- Limited degree of structures to be relocated and exploration boreholes to
seal off.
- Ranking of this site reduced as the risk of environmental impact related to
soil types and also infringement on seasonal wetland areas and the
Manyame River are higher compared to the other sites.
- Ranking of this site reduced as the site is not located within the existing
mining concession or infrastructure lease area.
TSF 3 3 - Located within the existing mining lease and concession area.
- As the plant site is somewhat removed from this site its preliminary Hazard
rating would be lower as the impact of a failure is not likely to result in loss
of life or damage to other mining infrastructure.
- Ranking of this site reduced due to the excessive distance from the plant
which in turn increases the capital costs associated with slurry and return
water piping.
- Ranking of this site reduced due to moderate to high potential disruption to
agricultural land use as observed during site walk over investigations.
- Ranking of this site reduced due to a higher degree of structures to relocate
and exploration boreholes to seal off.

- Ranking of this site reduced as a higher degree of disruption to existing

water courses or downstream water courses is expected with increased
impacts for the downstream valley.
- Ranking of this site reduced as the risk of being located over future mining
resources, although in excess of 250m below Normal Ground Level, is
considered undesirable.
TSF 4 4 - Located within the existing infrastructure lease and mining concession
area.
- As the plant site is somewhat removed from this site its preliminary Hazard
rating would be lower as the impact of a failure is not likely to result in loss
of life or damage to other mining infrastructure.
- Ranking of this site reduced due to the excessive distance from the plant
which in turn increases the capital costs associated with slurry and return
water piping.
- Ranking of this site reduced as wall construction materials may be
associated with high overhaul and hence capital costs for wall construction
materials.
- Ranking of this site reduced due to a higher likelihood for the need to seal
of exploration boreholes.
- Ranking of this site reduced as a higher degree of disruption to existing
water courses is expected.
- - Ranking of this site reduced as the risk of being located over future mining
resources, although in excess of 700m below Normal Ground Level, is still
considered not ideal.
TSF 1 was identified as the most viable option based on the economic and environmental aspects for the
development of a tailings dam disposal facility based on the relevant ranking criteria.
The main differentiator is the significantly lower capital and also operating cost of TSF 1 due to its close
proximity to the planned plant site. It is also close to readily available sources of construction materials.
The environmental impact assessments completed to date has further confirmed that the site will not
disturb any sensitive environmental areas. All sites evaluated will however impact to some degree on
surface and subsurface water drainage and seasonal wetland areas.
SRK recommends that site TSF 1 be considered for development as the preferred 20 year LoM tailings
storage facility for the Great Dyke Mining project. Please refer to Appendix C for a copy of the SRK
Tailings Dam Feasibility Study Report.

4.3 MINING ALTERNATIVES
4.3.1 Open Pit mining

The initial project design had considered commencing the project with open pit mining to the northern
part of the mine lease area. The ore-body at Darwendale is a shallow dipping (less than 15 degrees)
tabular ore-body, ranging in thickness from 2.0 m to 3.0 m, which outcrops at or near surface. As the
potential to extract shallow portions of the ore-body by open pit mining method exists, Oxide material is
marginally economic at the current estimated metallurgical recovery of 40 % and therefore no oxide
material is currently being planned to be mined. The initial project suggestions were that there was
potential to mine the fresh ore zone below the oxide zone down to a vertical depth of approximately 30
m to 95 m. It was believed that there was approximately 15,000,000 tonnes of economic material
extractable by open pit methods on the western and eastern edges of the ore-body at a run of mine
(ROM) grade of 2.50 g/t (4E) and at strip ratio of 10 to 17 (t/t).
The open pit operations were considered as follows:

 By standard drill, blast, truck and shovel methods. Mining will be undertaken by establishing four
box cuts in each planned open pit mining block, creating one or two faces.
 Two mining contractors will each mine two of the four open pits. The contractors plan to mine 70,000
t/month per pit, therefore, the total amount of ore to be mined is 280,000 t/month to the processing
facility.
 Underground Portals 1, 2 and 3 to break away from the base of open pits 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
An economic analysis of open pit mining undertaken in August/September 2016, by DRA and Great Dyke
Investments, indicated that it made more economic sense for GDI to focus on underground mining
activities only.

5 REGULATORY LEGISLATIVE FRAMEWORK

This section provides the legislative and policy framework for the proposed project, as well as a summary
table of permits required.
The National Environmental Policy is the overall policy guiding environmental management in Zimbabwe.
The Policy is supported by legal instruments which operationalizes the aspirations of the policy.
Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27 and the accompanying Regulations; specifically form the
legal framework for Environmental Management. The Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines,
1997 further provide guidelines for environmental impact assessments in Zimbabwe.
5.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
5.1.1 National Environmental Policy

The National Environmental Policy, which was officially launched in September 2009, supports and
follows closely the National Development objective:
‘to alleviate poverty and improve the quality of life of the people of Zimbabwe’ through the
measures aimed at ‘sustaining the long-term ability of natural resources to meet the basic needs
of people, enhance food security, reduce poverty and improve the standard of living of
Zimbabweans through long-term economic growth and creation of employment’
The policy asserts that environmental degradation is a result of unmanaged social and economic activities
and pressures. Accordingly, the Policy calls for sustainable development guided by a legislative policy
framework. The policy highlights sixty guiding principles, the first being, the right of ‘the people of
Zimbabwe to clean air and a healthy environment’. Other guiding principles hinge on environmental
management, conservation, economic issues which include mining, industry and energy.
The Ministry proposes that the policy be reviewed at least once every 10 years.
5.1.2 Environmental Impact Assessment Policy Guidelines, (1997)

The purpose of these guidelines is to ensure that environmental consequences of any development
proposals (mining, housing, industry etc.) are understood and adequately considered in the planning
process of the project. The guidelines provide check lists to be considered during the three phases of
project development. Key issues to be considered during the construction and operational phase of a
mine include:
 Current and future water requirements
 Effect on ground water / hydrology
 Loss of biodiversity
 Deforestation
 Loss of scenic value of landscape / aesthetics
 Demographic changes in and around the development
 Stakeholder identification and involvement.

5.1.3 Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27

The Environmental Management Act (EMA), 2002 forms the foundation for all Environmental
Management in Zimbabwe. The Act repeals the Natural Resources Act, Chapter 20:13, the Atmospheric
Pollution Prevention Act, Chapter 20:03, the Hazardous and Articles Act, Chapter 15:05 and the Noxious
Weeds Act. The Act translates the Environmental Policy Guidelines (discussed above) proposed in 1997
into a legally binding requirement for all specified developments under Part XI, section 97 and listed in
the First Schedule, of the EMA. These include mining projects. Failure to undertake an EIA for specified
developments becomes an offence. The proponent becomes liable to pay a penalty or face 5 years
imprisonment (Part XI, section 97, EMA, Chapter 20.27).
5.1.4 Statutory Instrument No. 7 of 2007 the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact
Assessments and Ecosystems Protection Regulations)
Section 106 of EMA (1) outlines how the Environmental Management Agency (EMA) will carry out bi-
annual environmental audits to ensure that all projects are compliant with ecosystem protection
regulations. It requires developers to submit quarterly environmental monitoring reports on the projects
and state of the environment.
Environmental Orders
In the interest of environmental protection, Part XII, sections 114 – 115 permits the Environmental
Management Agency through its officers and inspectors to issue environmental orders to any owner,
occupier or user of any land in respect to activities that may be detrimental to the environment and people.
The scope of orders includes:
 Requiring the construction or maintenance of soil or water conservation works;
 Controlling water, including storm water;
 Prohibiting or restricting the excavation or removal of clay, gravel or sand deposits, including any
overburden or topsoil;
 Prohibiting or limiting the cutting, felling or destruction of or injury to any vegetation whatsoever;
 Requiring the removal and disposal of any chemical residue, effluent, waste or hazardous
substance;
 Limiting the use of agricultural pesticides;
 Reducing or minimising pollution of any kind;
 Removing and disposing of litter or other refuse or waste from any land or premises
 Requiring the rehabilitation of a mining site.
The Act, in Part XIII places responsibility on any person, to –

 Clear or cause to be cleared any invasive alien species growing or occurring on land in respect
to which he is responsible;
 Report forthwith to an inspector the occurrence of any invasive alien species on any land in
respect of which such person is responsible;
Invasive species, listed in the fifth schedule of the Act are listed below:

Botanical name Common Name

Avena fatua L Wild oat
Azolla filiculoides Lam Water lettuce
Cuscuta spp Dodder
Eichhornia crasspipes Solms Water hyacinth
Harrisia martini (Labouret) Britton Moonflower cactus
Lantana camara L Cherry pie
Opuntia aurantiaca Lindl. Jointed cactus or jointed prickly pear
Pistia Stratiotes L. Azolla
Source: Environmental Management Act, Fifth Schedule
5.1.5 Statutory Instrument 7 of 2007 of the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact

Assessment and Ecosystem Protection) Regulations, 2007
These regulations are issued in accordance to the Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27,
section 140. The regulations translate the requirements of section 97 of the Act, stating the requirements
and procedure of an Environmental Impact Assessment as:
 Environmental Prospectus prior to a full EIA. The Environmental Agency, will review the
prospectus within 20 working days on payment of a prescribed fee;
 Only Environmental consultants registered with the Environmental Management Agency are
permitted to undertake Environmental Impact Assessments;
 Review of Environmental Impact Assessment Report or Environmental Management Plan
will be within 60 working days, upon payment of 0.4% of the total project, being one third
payment of the stipulated 1.2% of total project cost as review fees for mining activities. The
remaining two thirds are paid as follows; 0.4% on commissioning of the mine; and the last 0.4%
two years after commissioning of mine.
 Failure of the EMA to inform the developer of the Agency’s decision within 60 working days will
mean that the EIA report has been approved by the Agency;
 Requirements to submit quarterly environmental monitoring reports on any issues raised in the
Environmental Impact Assessment report or any other issues that arise as a result of the
implementation of the project.
Extraction of sand and clay deposits

The regulations also stipulate that no person is permitted to excavate, remove, possess or licence the
removal of clay or sand deposit for commercial purposes without a licence issued by the Environmental
Management Agency. The licence is issued at a fee and will remain valid for a year and is not
transferable.
Prevention of Fires
Part IV, section 15 of the regulations requires that any land user, owner or designated authority shall put
in place appropriate fire prevention measures on their land. The regulations also prohibit the lighting of
fires outside residential or commercial premises during the period from 31 July to 31 October of each
year.

Any person who lights a fire, which then causes damage to people, property and the environment and
any person who deliberately fails to extinguish a fire on his property shall be guilty of an office and liable
to a fine or a year in prison.
Part IV, section 18, states that at least seven days after a fire outbreak, launch an investigation and
documentation of the cause of the fire and the extent of damage (to property, environment and life) be
undertaken by the land owner, designated authority in the case of state land; village head in the case of
a village, chief, ward councillor or the chairperson of the environment subcommittee in the case of a
district; the mayor chairperson of commission in the case of an urban local authority area. Following the
investigations, within seven days, the land owner or authority is required to report the findings to the
nearest EMA offices and ZRP offices.
Wetlands
With respect to Wetlands, no person is allowed to – ‘reclaim or drain, drill or make a tunnel, introduce
any exotic animal or plant species, cultivate, or licence the cultivation or, or destroy any natural vegetation
on or dig up, break up, remove or alter in any way the soil or surface of –
 Wetland;
 Land within 30m of the naturally defined banks of a public stream;
 Land within 30m of the high flood-level of any body of water conserved in artificially constructed
water storage work on a public stream or
 Bed, banks or course of any river or stream.
5.1.6 Forest (Control of Firewood, Timber and Forest Produce) Regulations, SI 116 of 2012
The regulations, which came into force in July 2012, require that any person who sells or trades in
firewood to so under a licence obtained from their district offices (that is from the District Forest extension
Officer, or licensing officer appointed by a local authority). Any person selling or trading in fire wood
without the licence will be liable to a fine or one month in prison or both, as well as confiscation of their
firewood. The licence will have a validity date of 1 year.
5.1.7 Parks and Wildlife Act 20:14 Forest (Control of Firewood, Timber and Forest Produce)
Regulations, SI 116 of 2012
The Parks and Wild Life Act should be read in conjunction to the Environmental Management Act, Part
XII that advocates for the protection and conservation of the natural environment. The Parks and Wildlife
Act, aims to establish (1) areas of wildlife conservation through the establishment of national parks,
sanctuaries, safari areas and recreational parks, (2) areas of natural flora, natural landscape and scenery
through the establishment of botanical reserves, gardens etc. The sixth and seventh schedules of the
Parks and Wildlife Act highlight specially protected animals, and specially protected indigenous plants
respectively. Please refer to table below:

Specially Protected Animals (Parks and Wildlife Act)

LATIN NAME COMMON NAME
Mammals
Proteles cristatus Aardwolf
Otocyon megalotis Bat eared fox
Acinonyx jubatus Cheetah
Oryx gazella Gemsbok
Manis temmincki Pangolin
Diceros bicornis Black rhino
Ceratotherium simum White rhino
Hippotragus equinus Roan antelope
Reptiles
Python sebae African Rock Python
Birds
Raptors All Eagles, some Hawks and Peregrine & Lanner Falcons
Family: Otidae All Bustards and Korhaans
Family: Gruidae All Cranes
Family: Phoenicopteridae All Flamingoes
Family: Pelecanidae All Pelicans
Family: Ciconiidae All Storks
Family: Aegypiidae All Vultures
Scopus umbretta Hammerkop
Sagittarius serpentarius Secretary Bird
5.1.8 Parks and Wildlife Act, 20:14: Specially Protected Plants

The Seventh Schedule, Parks and Wildlife Act, 20:14 lists Specially Protected Plants which include all
species of aloes and epiphytic orchids.
Biodiversity
The EMA guidelines (1997) lists the major issues associated with mining developments and those
relevant to biodiversity are:
 Loss or change of local and surrounding ecosystems
 Effect on threatened/protected species
 Loss of biodiversity (= loss of species)
 Existence of protected areas or habitats
 Introduction of alien weed/pest species
 Interference in animal populations (migration, free movement, behaviour, breeding)
Mining and Conservation Areas

Section 119 (2) of the Parks and Wildlife Act, prohibits mining or working within a National Park, Botanical
Reserve, Botanical garden, Sanctuary or Recreational park except by written consent between the
Minister and the persons concerned has been approved by the President or if the mining rights had been
obtained before the area was declared a national parks area.

The GDI mine lease area encroaches into the Lake Manyame recreation area to the north east. In light
of this section, GDI is required to obtain written consent from the Minister of Environment and Water to
undertake mining activities within this Conservation area.
5.1.9 Mines and Minerals Amendment Bill, 2007
In November 2004, application to amend the Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 were proposed by
the Ministry of Mines and Energy. The proposed amendments of concern in relation to environmental
management are:
 to require miners to establish funds or to make other provision to meet the cost of restoring the
environment when their mining operations come to an end;
Section 42 of the Mines and Minerals Amendment proposes a new part to be inserted in the Mines and
Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 which is concerned with ‘Environmental Protection”
Proposed new section 257 requires large-scale miners to establish environmental rehabilitation funds for
the purpose of –
 Any quittance work or other work that will be required in accordance to the Act upon cessation
of mining operations in the miner’s mining lease or mining location;
 Any other work required, whether under the Mines and Minerals Act or any other enactment, to
protect or restore the environment from consequences of the miner’s mining operations.
The amendments in section 257, state that the environmental rehabilitation fund should be established
by a written trust deed or other constitution with the following features:
(a) Assets of the fund shall be vested in two or more trustees who shall not be employees or partners
of the miner whose work is to be financed by the fund;
(b) The trustees of the fund shall be responsible for its management and operation, and in that
regard shall not be subject to the control, whether direct or indirect, of the miner whose work is
to be financed by the fund;
(c) The assets of the fund shall be held in sufficiently liquid form to enable the fund to meet without
delay any costs or expenses of which it is responsible.
The fund established under section 257D, is subject to approval and scrutiny by the Board, established
under the Mines and Minerals Act. Section 257E requires that books of account and audits be undertaken
for the environmental fund.
Under section 257G, the amendments state that two or more large-scale miners may establish a single
environmental rehabilitation fund to finance quittance or other work at all or some of their mining leases
and mining locations.
Failure to rehabilitate or manage any negative impacts on the environment by the holder of a mining right,
will (a) result in the ‘Minister using all or part of the fund to rehabilitate or manage negative environmental
impacts’; (b) be lodged into the Environmental black list logbook.

5.2 WATER MANAGEMENT AND POLLUTION CONTROL

The pollution of natural water resources is generally regulated by three pieces of legislation. These are
the Water Act, Chapter 20:24; The Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal)
Regulations, 2007 SI 6 and The Environmental Management Act Chapter 20: 27.
5.2.1 WATER ACT, CHAPTER 20:24

The Water Act, enacted in 1998, provides the overall framework for the management and utilisation of
water resources in Zimbabwe. The Act makes it mandatory for any person abstracting water for any
purpose other than for primary purposes (domestic, support of animal life, making of bricks for private
use by the owner) to obtain a written permission by the local catchment council to do so. Authority from
the catchment council is also required for sinking, altering or deepening a well or borehole.
Under the Water Act, discharging or disposing of effluent into public streams or any other surface water
or ground water either directly or indirectly through seepage is an offence.
Section 46 of the Act also requires that if any operations in public streams, marshes swamps or vleis are
to be undertaken, input from the appropriate Catchment Council is required.
Given there is some marshes/vleis within the mine lease area, GDI to solicit input from ZINWA Manyame
Catchment for further guidance if any operations are going to infringe to be constructed on these sensitive
environments.
The act also removes the onus for pollution control from the Government to the polluter. It introduces the
‘Polluter Pays Principle’ where the responsibility for pollution control and detection lies with the polluter.
Under this system a polluter has to apply for a permit to pollute.
The Water Act designates Catchment Areas to be administered by Catchment Council, an elected body
of stakeholders that has been created through Statutory Instrument 209 of 2000, to control and administer
water affairs in the catchment. Each Catchment Area is subdivided into sub-catchments, to provide for
water management by an elected sub-catchment council within a more localized river sub system.
The principal functions of the Catchment Council are:

1. To prepare a Catchment Outline Plan (COP) for its river system.
2. To determine and grant water use permits.
3. To regulate and supervise the exercise of rights to the use of water.
4. To ensure proper compliance with the Act and to supervise Sub Catchment Councils (SCC).The
SCC regulates and supervises the rights to water within the area for which it was established.

Section 57 of the Environmental Management Act prohibits the pollution of water through discharge or
application of poison or toxic, noxious or obstructing matter, radioactive waste or other pollutants into the
aquatic environment in contravention of water pollution control standards contained in SI 6 (discussed
below) shall be guilty of an offence and liable to a fine or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding five
years, or to both such fine and such imprisonment.

5.2.3 Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations, 2007 SI 6
These regulations repeal the Water (Waste and Effluent Disposal) Regulations, 2000. The primary
objective of the regulations is to control, regulate and prohibit the disposal “of waste water or effluent into
a public stream or into any other surface water or ground water, whether directly or through drainage or
seepage (which may affect the quality of the environment) except under a permit”. A permit will also be
required for the disposal of solid waste.
Under these regulations the following activities will require permits:

 Any effluent released directly into rivers, streams or onto land (applies to individual operations,
sewerage treatment plants and landfills);
 Disposal of solid wastes anywhere other than a municipal refuse site;
 Disposal of natural soil or rock that has the potential to contaminate water resources through
leaching because of its mineral content. Otherwise disposal of solid rock would not normally
require a permit, classified as follows:
Permit class Criteria

Blue Disposed waste water or waste is considered to be environmentally safe
Green Considered to present a low environmental hazard
Yellow Considered to present a medium environmental hazard
Red Considered to present a high environmental hazard
The regulations also stipulate that within every period of three months the licence holder shall render to
the agency a quarterly return of the total volume of liquid waste or effluent and of the quantity no later
than 14 days after the quarter to which the return relates.
The table below shows the classification of effluent standards for discharge
Table 7: Classification of effluent standards for discharge
Parameter Blue Green Yellow Red

Sensitive Normal
Alkalinity * * * * *≤500
Aluminium * * * * ≤5
Ammonia (N) ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤1.0 ≤1.5 ≤2.0
Arsenic (As) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.15 ≤0.3
Barium (Ba) ≤0.1 ≤0.5 ≤1 ≤1.5 ≤2
BOD ≤15 ≤30 ≤50 ≤100 ≤120
Boron ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤1.0 ≤1.5 <2
Ca+ Mg * * * * *
Cadmium (Cd) ≤0.01 ≤0.01 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.3
Chloride (Cl) ≤200 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500

Chlorine residual (free ≤Nil ≤0.1 ≤0.2 ≤0.3 ≤0.5

chlorine)
Chromium ≤0.05 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.2 ≤0.5
Chromium, total (Cr) ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.2 ≤1.6 ≤2
Cobalt (Co) * * * * *
COD ≤300 ≤60 ≤90 ≤150 ≤200
Colour (TCU) ≤15 ≤15
Conductivity (µS/cm) ≤200 ≤1000 ≤2000 ≤3000 ≤3500
Copper (Cu) ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤2.0 ≤3 ≤5
Cyanides and related ≤0.07 ≤0.07 ≤0.1 ≤0.15 ≤1
Compounds (CN) ≤0.07 ≤0.07 ≤0.1 ≤0.15 ≤0.3
Cyanide (as free CN)
Detergents*** ≤0.2 ≤1.0 ≤2 ≤3 ≤5
DO % saturation ≥75 ≥60 ≥50 ≥30 ≥15
Faecal coliforms(No./100ml) ≤1000 ≤1000 ≤1000 ≤1500 ≤2000
Fluoride (F) ≤1 ≤1 ≤2 ≤4 ≤6
Grease & oil Nil ≤2.5 ≤5 ≤7.5 ≤10
Helminth eggs (No./100ml) ≤1000 ≤1000 >1000 >1000 >2000
Iron (Fe) ≤ 0.3 ≤1 ≤2 ≤5 ≤8
Lead (Pb) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.2 ≤0.5
Manganese (Mn) ≤0.1 ≤0.1 ≤0.3 ≤0.4 ≤0.5
Mercury (Hg) ≤0.01 ≤0.01 ≤0.02 ≤0.03 ≤0.05
Nickel (Ni) ≤0.3 ≤0.3 ≤0.6 ≤0.9 ≤1.5
Nitrite Nitrogen (NO2) ≤3 ≤3 ≤5 ≤8 ≤10
Nitrogen total (N) ≤10 ≤10 ≤20 ≤30 ≤50
Oxygen Absorbed ≤5 ≤10 ≤15 ≤25 ≤40
pH 6.0-7.5 6-9 5-6 4-5 0-4
9-10 10-12 12-14
Phenolic cpds (phenol) ≤0.01 ≤0.01 ≤0.04 ≤0.06 ≤0.1
Phosphates total ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤1.5 ≤3 ≤5
Potassium (K) * * * * ≤500
Selenium (Se) ≤0.05 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤1.5 ≤3
Sodium (Na) ≤200 ≤200 ≤300 ≤500 ≤1000
Sulphate (SO4) ≤100 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500
Sulphide (S) ≤0.05 ≤0.2 ≤0.3 ≤0.4 ≤1
TDS ≤100 ≤500 ≤1500 ≤2000 ≤3000
Temperature ≤25 ≤35 ≤40 ≤40 ≤45
Deg.C
Total heavy metals ≤1.0 ≤2.0 ≤4 ≤10 ≤20
TSS ≤10 ≤25 ≤50 ≤100 ≤150
Turbidity (NTU) ≤5 ≤5
Zinc (Zn) ≤0.3 ≤0.5 ≤4.0 ≤5.0 ≤15
Source: SI 6 of 2007

5.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT

Waste management is regulated primarily by the Environmental Management Act Chap 20:27,
Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) S1 6 of 2007 Regulations and
Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste Management) Regulations, SI10. Reference is also
made to the Importation and transit of hazardous substances and waste regulations, SI 77.

Section 70 of the Environmental Management Act 20;27 prohibits against discharge of waste whether
generated within or outside Zimbabwe and the transportation of waste other without a permit, it also
recommends waste generators to employ measures essential to minimise wastes through treatment,
reclamation and recycling. According to the Act hazardous waste which include corrosive waste,
flammable waste, toxic waste and radioactive waste shall not be discharged into any waters or any parts
of the environment, with failure to comply being an offence
5.3.2 Import and Transit of hazardous substances and waste regulations, SI 77, 2009
Waste Management Regulations are meant to streamline the handling, transportation and disposal of
various type of waste. The regulations place emphasis on waste minimization, cleaner production and
segregation of waste at source.
 The regulations have classified various types of waste and recommended appropriate disposal
methods for each waste type. Under the Waste Management Regulations, EMA licences
transporters, incinerators, landfills, composers, recyclers and transfer stations. Facilities to be
licensed include local authorities, transporters and handlers of various types of waste. The
licensing employs a risk-based approach by concentrating on facilities considered to pose a high
risk to the environment.
 The Waste Management Regulations also provide an opportunity for investment in various
aspects of waste management.
Section 7 (1) (b) of the regulations states that any person who causes any spillage of hazardous
substances or waste into the environment shall be guilty of an offence and liable to a fine not exceeding
level fourteen or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding one year or to both such fines or
imprisonment.
5.3.3 Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations, SI 6 of 2007
These regulations prohibit the disposal of any waste or effluent into a public stream or into any other
surface water or ground water, whether directly or through drainage or seepage, except under a licence
to do so. The type of licence to be issued (at a cost) will depend on the quality of waste or effluent to be
discharged as follows:
Permit classification Criteria

Blue Environmentally safe
Green Presents a low environmental hazard
Yellow Presents a medium environmental hazard
Red Presents a high environmental hazard

Part IV, section 12 (1) requires that every generator and operator of waste (except at household level)
develop a waste management plan not later than the 31 December every year. The waste management
plan is to include, but not limited to:
 An inventory of the waste management situation specifying the quantity of waste produced and the
components of waste;
 Specific goals for:
- The adoption of cleaner production methods
- Reduction of the quantities and pollutant discharges of waste
- Recycling and sorting, wherever practicable, of wastes in an environmentally safe form and
manner
- Safe transportation and disposal of the wastes that can be neither prevented nor recycled;
- Generally the adoption of environmentally sound management of waters.
Part 13 (1) states that from time to time, the Agency will set waste prevention target with regard to the
emission and disposal of waste by any generator of waste. Waste prevention target may relate to (among
other issues) –
 Acceptable levels of the emission and disposal of waste by generators of waste;
 The development, manufacture, processing, treatment and design of products in such a form
that the residual substances can be recycled;
 The incorporation or use of a certain proportion of recycled materials in the manufacture of
specified products.
The regulations also make littering an offence liable to a fine and imprisonment for a period not exceeding
six months. An operator of a public passenger conveyance is required to put in place sufficient bins
within the vehicle for us by the passengers. Failure to do so attracts a fine or imprisonment for a period
not exceeding a year or to both such fine and imprisonment.
Section 22 of these regulations requires that general waste or hazardous waste be disposed of at a
licensed general landfill or a hazardous landfill which should be appropriately lined.
22 (1) No person shall dispose general waste or hazardous waste at any other place except in a licensed
general landfill or a hazardous waste landfill
(2) with effect from the date of publication of these regulations all new solid waste sites shall be lined with
the appropriate (as approved by the Agency) lining specific to the nature of the environmental risk,
whether it is an industrial, domestic, mining or any type of solid waste. Specific recommendations for the
design of the hazardous waste site are contained in the Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste
Management) Regulations, 2007, SI10 section 11 discussed below.
Section 24 (1) of SI, 6, of 2007, states that: - Any person authorized to carry out any type on mining
activity in accordance with the Mines and Minerals Act (chapter 21:05) shall do so in a manner that does
not adversely affect the environment, on cessation of operations, rehabilitate the environment to the

satisfaction of the Agency within 12 months of cessation of operations. The person shall also pay fees as
financial guarantees for security for complying with environmental conditions predicted or actual
environmental impacts during and after mining, and other post-closure management of reclaimed sites.
5.3.4 Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste Management) Regulations, 2007, SI 10

The Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste Management) Regulations make it illegal for a
person to generate, store, sell, transport, use, recycle, discharge or dispose of hazardous waste to the
environment, except under licence, which will be valid for 12 months and is not transferable to another
person except with the leave in writing to the Environmental Management Agency. The regulations also
state in section 11 (1) that disposal of hazardous waste should only be done at licensed waste disposal
sites or landfill.
A holder of a licence will be required to –

 Submit to the Environmental Management Agency every three months in a year - 31st March;
30 June, 30 September and 31st December a quarterly return of the total volume or mass of
hazardous waste and of the quality and nature of waste disposed of.
 Maintain records of all relevant information pertaining to management of the licensed waste or
effluent, including flow or disposal records, waste analysis, receiving environmental analysis,
accidental discharges and pertinent correspondence with the Agency.
A generator of hazardous waste is also required to produce a waste management plan before the 31st
of December of each year which include – an inventory of the waste management situation specifying (i)
the quantity of waste produced and the components of such waste and specific goals for cleaner
production methods; reduction of the quantities and pollutant discharge of the hazardous wastes; the
recycling, wherever practicable of wastes in an environmentally safe form and manner; the safe
transportation and disposal of wastes that can be neither presented nor recycled and the general adoption
of environmentally sound management of wastes.
With respect to waste oils, the regulations state that waste oils can only be disposed of as waste oils
unless they have a flash point of below 55˚C and more than –
 15 per cent of its volume consists of pollutants from foreign substances resulting from its use
 30 part per million of its volume consists of poly-chlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or poly-chlorinated
triphenyls (PCTs); or
 0.5 per cent of its volume consists of halogens (fluorine chlorine, bromine, iodine)
The regulations also make provision for the recycling of waste oils for the purpose of –
 Cleaning them
 The production of useable mineral oil products;
 Production of energy.
If the waste oil is used for the purpose of the production of useable mineral oil products, the resulting
mineral oil product shall –
 Confirm to the minimum quality criteria of a usable mineral oil product and

 Not contain more than 5 parts per million or poly chlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or poly-chlorinated
triphenyls (PCTs) or contain halogens exceeding 0.03 per cent of its volume.
The regulations prohibit the mixing and blending of hazardous wastes and waste oils. All hazardous
waste and waste oils should only be stored only on the premises of the generator of the hazardous wastes
or waste oils or at a site other than a public collection site or a site approved by a local authority.
In the event of an accidental spillage of hazardous waste, either at the point of use, storage facility,
transportation vessel, treatment plant or recycling plant, the person concerned is required through these
regulations to-
 Notify the agency both orally and in writing of the accidental discharge;
 Notify all users of the receiving environment who are or may be affected by the accidental
discharge;
 Notify the Agency with information on the circumstances of the accident including – quantity of
the disposal or discharge; time the accident occurred; location where the accident occurred;
impacts that the accident has already caused or will cause to the environment; plan of action that
are to be taken to militate against the apparent environmental impacts.
 Conduct the reclamation as approved by the Agency;
 Pay appropriate monitoring and environmental fees to the Agency;
 Reimburse the Agency for the clean-up costs incurred on their behalf;
 Compensate any losses incurred by any stakeholders as a result of the accidental discharge.
In the event of a traffic accidental spillage, the vessel consignment and everything else belonging to the
polluter remains in the custody of the Police until the owner of the vessel or consignment satisfies the
Agency that all the clean-up operations and associated costs will be settled by the polluter.
Section 11 (1) specifies the minimum design aspects of a hazardous waste landfill site:
(a) Lining that is resistant to corrosion by hazardous substance in question as approved by the
agency;
(b) Mechanism for the collection, quantification, treatment and disposal of any leachate;
(c) Mechanism to protect the site from surface runoff
(d) Devices to test and monitor the quality and quantity of any waste finally discharged to the
environment;
(e) Devices to test and monitor the quality and quantity of any waste finally discharged to the
environment;
(f) Devices to monitor impact of the site on the environment e.g. groundwater and surface water
contamination, air pollution;
(g) Access points for sampling by the Agency’s inspectorate;
(h) Separation and isolation of the hazardous waste from any other general waste.

5.3.5 Environmental Management (Plastic Packaging & Plastic Bottles (Amendment)

Regulations, 84/2012
This recent SI prohibits the production and importation of certain plastics and places the responsibility for
the recycling and disposal of polystyrene on the user:
(3) Any person who-
(a) uses polystyrene in packaging to protect goods from damage during transportation or storage
(b) uses polystyrene in construction; shall take responsibility for recycling any polystyrene packaging
material they manufacture and sell;
The regulations also introduce a levy on the manufacturers, importers and distributors of plastics
5.4 AIR QUALITY
5.4.1 Environmental Management (Atmospheric Pollution Control) Regulations, Si 72 /2009

The regulations prohibit the emission of any substance into the atmosphere for the following prescribed
activities –
 The burning of waste at landfill; or
 The burning of vehicle tyres; or
 The burning of bitumen; or
 The burning of metallic wire coated with any material; or
 The burning of oil in the open air or
 The operation of an incinerator; or
 Any activity that causes the emission of a pollutant into the atmosphere shall in the course of the
activity emit any substance into the atmosphere in excess of the amount prescribed in the third
Schedule of the regulations for the activity concerned. Anyone who is found guilty of emitting
amounts in access of those prescribed in the third Schedule will be guilty of an offence and will
be liable to a fine or temporary closure of the facility for up to three weeks until the level of
emissions have been rectified or Prosecution. The Table 8 below shows the permitted amounts
of environmental dust for each permit band.
Table 8: Permitted amounts of environmental dust for each permit band
Dust
Blue Green Yellow Red
Fraction
PM10
<10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3 <50mg/^3
levels[1]
The regulations, according to section 4, set standards for the emissions from motor vehicles, and allows
an inspector to require the driver of any motor vehicle to stop the vehicle and to test and inspect the
vehicle whether on the road or elsewhere in order to ascertain whether or not the vehicle complies with
PM10 levels are particles smaller than 10µm. The results in mg/m3 are weighted average over time (Dose). The
[1]
concentration of all the dust captured is shown for information.

the emissions standards in the fifth schedule. If the vehicle does not comply with the standards the
inspector shall by written notice –
Direct that the vehicle not be used on any road; or shall be used subject to conditions specified in the
notice which may be – that the vehicle be repaired or adjusted so that it complies with the emission
standards; deliver the vehicle to a place specified in the notice for testing and inspection to ensure that it
complies with the emission standards as follows:
Compound Limit Exposure

CO2 100mg/m^3 or 90ppm 15 minutes
Pb 0.5-1mg/m^3 Annual
NO2 200ug/ m^3 or 11ppm 1 hour
O3 120ug/ m^3 or 6ppm 8 hours
Particulate matter 50ug/ m^3 or 25ppm Annual
SO2 500ug/ m^3 or 175ppm 10 minutes
If the owner fails to comply with the notice, the Environmental Management Agency may compulsorily
send the vehicle for rectification at the expense of the owner. For owners or occupiers of any premises
on which there is a solid-fuel burning appliance, the Environmental Management Agency may require by
written notice that:-
 The owner provides, or install within three months, facilities or equipment for the sampling of
emissions (at the owners expense);
 Submit to the EMA information regarding the quantity and quality of the emissions. Failure to
comply with the written notice will constitute an offence and the offender shall be liable to a fine
or to imprisonment for a period not exceeding six months or both.
Table 9 shows classification of air emissions and maximum permissible discharge, according to
pollutants and types of processes.
Table 9: Classification of air emissions and maximum permissible discharge
Type
Pollutant Blue Green Yellow Red
Process
H2S
Chlorine gas <0.001 <0.002 <0.003 <0.004ppm
(Ambient)
C12 <10mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <35mg/m^3 <50mg/m^3

Uranium
Particulates <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^
Calcium
carbide
Hydrochloric
Acid

Type
Process
HCI fumes <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^
HCI fumes Acetylene <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^
NH3 Ammonia <40mg/m^3 <60mg/m^3 <80mg/m^3 <100mg/m^
<70mg/m^3a <130mg/m^3a <150mg/m^3a

Nox Nitric acid <1000mg/m^3as
s s s
NO2
NO2 NO2 NO2
<70mg/m^3a <130mg/m^3a <150mg/m^3a

Ammonium <100mg/m^3as
Nox s s s
Nitrate NO2
NO2 NO2 NO2
Particulates Sulphuric acid <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3
SO2 <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
Particulates, Phosphoric <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

fluorides acid <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
Superphosphat
Particulates, <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3
e
fluorides <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
Particulates, Copper and/ <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

SO2 Nickel smelting <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
Particulates, Iron and <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

SO2 steel <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
Particulates cement <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^
Particulates Ferro-alloys <70mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <110mg/m^3 <150mg/m^
Particulates lead <10mg/m^3 <16mg/m^3 <19mg/m^3 <23mg/m^
Particulates Gas or coke <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

SO2 <30mg/m^3 <40mg/m^3 <45mg/m^3 <50mg/m^3
Nox <70mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <130mg/m^3 <150mg/m^3
as NO2 as NO2 as NO2 as NO2
CO <40mg/m^3 <60mg/m^3 <80mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3

Type
Process
Particulates Thermal <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

SO2 power <5mg/m^3 <10mg/m^3 <15mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3
Nox <70mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <130mg/m^3 <150mg/m^3
Particulates Granular <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3

Nox fertilizer <70mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <130mg/m^3 <150mg/m^3
Arsenical ores
As203 dust <12mg/m^3 <24mg/m^3 <36mg/m^3 <46mg/m^3
& concentrates
Particulates Caustic soda <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3
C2H4 Zinc ** ** ** **
Particulates lime <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^
Particulates Chemical <40mg/m^3 <60mg/m^3 <80mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3

HCI incineration <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^3
SO2 <10mg/m^3 <20mg/m^3 <25mg/m^3 <30mg/m^
Particulates Producer gas <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3
Sulphur
CO <40mg/m^3 <60mg/m^3 <80mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3
dioxide gas
Limestone
and/or
SO2 <30mg/m^3 <40mg/m^3 <45mg/m^3 <50mg/m^3
dolomite
crushing
Particulates Tanning <60mg/m^3 <90mg/m^3 <100mg/m^3 <120mg/m^3
5.4.2 Environmental and Natural Resources Management (Prohibition and Control of Ozone
Depleting Substances and Ozone Depleting Substances Dependent Equipment)
Regulations, SI 7/2011
These regulations prohibit the import and use of ozone depleting substances and equipment depending
on these substances or chemicals listed within the third, fourth and fifth schedules. A person wishing to
import the substances listed in these schedules is required to apply to the Ozone Office and pay the
prescribed fee. The licence when issued will be valid for a year and not transferrable.

The regulations also prohibit the installing and decommissioning of ozone depleting substances and
ozone depleting dependent equipment unless he or she has been trained and authorised to do so by the
Natural Ozone Unit, Ministry of Environment and Natural Resources Management. A written request is
required for installing and decommissioning. The request should be made to the National Ozone Office.
5.5 NOISE

The Environmental Management Act, in section 79 of Part IX, states that a Standards Enforcement
Committee to make recommendations to the board in respect to noise. These recommendations are to
include:
 Minimum standards for emission of noise and vibration pollution into the environment as are
necessary to preserve and maintain public health and the environment;
 Criteria and procedures to be prescribed for the measurement of noise and vibration pollution
into the environment;
 Criteria and procedures to be prescribed for the measurement of sub-sonic vibration;
 Noise level and noise emission standards to be prescribed that are applicable to construction
sites, plants machinery, motor vehicles, aircraft including sonic bonus, industrial and commercial
activities;
 Guidelines to be prescribed for the abatement of unreasonable noise and vibration pollution
emitted into the environment from any source.
5.5.2 International Finance Corporation Noise Standards

The environmental guidelines outlined by the International Financial Corporation (IFC) are shown below.
1 hour LAeq (dBA)

Receptor Day time Night time
07:00 to 22:00 22:00 to 07:00
Residential, Institutional, Educational 55 45
Industrial, Commercial 70 70
5.6 EXPLOSIVES
5.6.1 Explosives Regulations SI 72 (1989)

The explosives regulations are made in terms of section 27 of the Explosives Act Chapter 3 07. The
regulations are concerned with the granting of blasting licenses, manufacture, storage and sale of
explosives. Part IV, section 73 requires that any persons who will store explosives to apply for a permit
from the District Mining Inspector, which will be issued with conditions to be adhered to by the applicant.
Additionally section 75 provides details on the requirements of the construction of an immovable
magazine as follows:

(a) the walls shall be constructed of reinforced concrete not less than 150mm thick;
(b) no iron or steel used in the construction or in the fittings shall be exposed internally;
(c) the floor shall consist of reinforced concrete not less than 150mm
(d) the building shall be covered with a rood of reinforced concrete not less than 150mm thick which
shall be securely bonded to the walls;
(e) there shall be no windows
(f) ventilation shall be provided by means of flues which are:
- constructed in the thickness of the walls; and
- fitted with gratings covered with fine wire gauze at both external and internal
openings and
- not lower than 750mm from the floor and not higher than 250mm below the ceiling
(g) the door shall –
- be constructed of steel plate not less than 5mm in thickness and lined with wood or
similar non-ferrous material so that no iron or steel is exposed to the interior of the
magazine;
- be hung in a substantial steel frame which is securely set in the concrete of the
building;
- open outwards and the hinged edge shall be secured when closed by not less than
five internal fixed dog bolts or lugs engaging with the frame;
- be locked by means of two or more concealed and protected security dead locks
each fitted with at least five lever or a bolt mechanism with a concealed and
protected dead lock fitted with at least five levers and such door and lock or bolt
mechanism shall be of a design approved by the Chief Inspector.
(h) Magazine shall be provided with an efficient lighting protection system which shall be tested for
earth resistance at least once every 12 months and the lighting shall
- Confirm to the requirements of the Standards Association of Zimbabwe CC2 of 1973
(i) A magazine other than a magazine for the storage of fuse, initiators or detonators only shall be
surrounded by a substantial earthen mound which shall be
- At least as high as the caves of the roof of the building and;
- Not less than one metre wide at the top; and
- At a distance of not more than one metre from the magazine, which distance shall
be measured from the foot of the interior slope of the mound; the exterior slope of
the mound shall be at the natural slope of the earth with the entrance to the
magazine through the mound in a broken line (provided that a magazine not
surrounded by a mound may be licensed if in the opinion of the Chief Inspector, a
mound is not necessary for the protection of persons or property.
(j) Provision for the proper drainage shall be made.
Additionally, the first schedule details the distance immovable magazine is to be separated from other
structures for installations. These distances are to be observed in light of the proposed explosives
magazine proposed.

Maximum quantity of Minimum distance of magazine from structures or installations

explosives that may (distance in meters)
be stored in
magazine
Weight in Kg Class ‘A’ Class’ B’ Class ‘C’
250 16 31 58
500 20 49 98
1000 26 77 154
1500 29 99 198
2000 32 118 236
2500 35 134 268
3000 37 148 296
3500 39 159 319
4000 40 171 341
4500 42 180 360
5000 43 189 379
7500 50 224 448
10000 55 250 500
12500 59 270 539
15000 62 289 639
20000 69 320 639
25000 74 345 691
30000 79 367 734
35000 83 386 771
40000 87 404 808
45000 90 420 840
50000 94 436 872
75000 109 499 999
100 000 121 549 1 098
125 000 132 592 1 147
150 000 142 603 1 183
200 000 154 634 1 257
300 000 168 634 1358
Notes
Class ‘A’’; in relation to a structure or installation, means an immovable magazine or an overhead
power line.
Class ‘B’; in relation to a structure of installation means –

(a) a public railway, a public road or a private road which is a principal means o access to a
church, chapel, market or other building where the public are accustomed to or assemble or
(b) an aerodrome or landing ground, pier, jetty or reservoir
(c) an electricity substation or a pipeline which is not owned by the owner of the magazine or
(d) a dwelling house or factory building which is owned by the owner of the magazine
(e) a cemetery, public recreation or sports ground or a public space.

Class ‘C’; in relation to a structure or installation, means-

(a) a structure used for the storage in bulk of petroleum, spirit, gas or other inflammable
substances; or
(b) a dwelling house or factory building not owned by the owner of the magazine
(c) a hospital, church, chapel, market place, cinema, theatre, college, school or other building
where the public are accustomed to assemble.
The Darwendale Project will store less than 500kg of explosives on site,
5.7 CONSERVATION AND PRESERVATION OF NATURAL HERITAGE
5.7.1 National Monuments and Museums Act 25:01

The National Museums and Monuments Act Chapter 25:01 protects all areas of historical, architectural,
archaeological and paleontological value predating 1890 and any other site so specified by the Executive
Director of National Museums and Monuments of Zimbabwe (NMMZ). Such sites cannot be altered,
excavated or damaged and material on them cannot be removed without the written consent of the
Executive Director of the NMMZ.
A guideline paper entitled “Archaeological Impact Assessments: Guidelines for Planning Authorities and
Developers” explains the law as well as indicating additional requirements (NMMZ 1998). The statutory
instrument (SI 143 of 2011) seeks to legally enable these recommendations and sets various standard
fees.
The law specifies that:

 Only qualified Zimbabwean heritage practitioners approved by the Executive Director NMMZ may
undertake this work. This should be an archaeologist in the case of cultural investigations and a
palaeontologist where fossils are likely to occur. The name, qualifications and contact details of
the consultants must appear on all reports.
 It is assumed that a comprehensive suitable field survey will be undertaken in preparing the final
EIA, sampling all topographical points often associated with prehistoric habitation and land-use
as well as areas in between. On discovery all fossils or sites of prehistoric remains and activity
as well as isolated traces must be documented and mapped.
 On discovery all paleontological, archaeological and cultural sites and isolates must be recorded
by GPS. In line with the maps of the Surveyor General of Zimbabwe, site positions should be
recorded as UTM-readings based on the global positioning system ARC 1950. Other mapping
systems and Google Earth images are not compatible and are therefore not acceptable.
 Article 21 of the NMMZ Act requires the immediate reporting of any ‘discovery of ancient
monument or relic’ to NMMZ. Contravention is deemed to be an offence. All site records must
include description of the location; description of the contexts (i.e. is the site intact and in primary
contexts or is it in a secondary and thus disturbed state); a full description of the cultural or
paleontological material; as well as details of the discoverer and landowner/user thereof. The
materials and the site setting should also be photographed. It is standard Zimbabwean practice

that no artefact or fossil is removed unless third party confirmation of identification is necessary.
All sites must be evaluated taking into consideration site extent, integrity, condition and social
associations. Following evaluation, the consultant offers suitable suggestions as to mitigation
procedures. Where possible it is preferred that sites are left untouched, but this may not always
be possible and partial or complete removal may be necessary. This work is at the developer’s
cost, although they may appoint any approved Zimbabwean specialist to undertake the work.
The developer must understand that some sites are of such local or national significance, often
those of intangible value, that they cannot be interfered with. Generally these are sacred sites,
grave sites (unless relocation is completely necessary), and it is Zimbabwean practice is that no
rock art site or Zimbabwe-type stonewalled ruin should be interfered with.
 Following the fieldwork and prior to the submission of the EIA report to EMA a detailed heritage
report is submitted to the NMMZ. This information cannot be treated as client confidentiality. Hard
copies are sent to the Executive Director, National Museums & Monuments of Zimbabwe, Rotten
Row, Harare (P.O. Box CY1485, Causeway, Harare, Zimbabwe). A written response will be
received back from NMMZ and this letter should be kept on file and a copy included in the EIA
report to show EMA that heritage studies have been undertaken at a standard approved by
NMMZ. SI 143 of 2011 provides for the developer to pay a fee to NMMZ of US$125.00 for them
to assess the report and provide a written response. This is paid by the developer at the time of
submission.
 Once the initial heritage report is approved mitigation or preservation may be required. Article 24
of the NMMZ Act specifies that excavation or alteration of any site of archaeological, cultural,
historical and paleontological presence cannot be undertaken without the prior written consent
of the Executive Director, NMMZ. This provision has been legally strengthened in the recent SI
143 of 2011 in the light of failure by developers to follow up on earlier instructions. Only approved
persons may undertake such work as directed by the Executive Director, NMMZ. Contravention
of any of these requirements is an offence.
EXCAVATIONS AND/OR ALTERATION

IFC Standard 8 (Clauses 11-12) sets out the necessary conditions and procedures for the removal or in
situ preservation of both replicable and non-replicable Cultural Heritage. These being:
 ’Replicable Cultural Heritage is defined as tangible forms of Cultural Heritage that can
themselves be moved to another location or that can be replaced by a similar structure or natural
features to which the cultural values can be transferred by appropriate measures. Archaeological
or historical sites may be considered replicable where the particular eras and cultural values that
they represent are well represented by other sites and/or structures’. The implication is that
archaeological sites of a common occurrence may be considered Replicable Cultural Heritage
where other, better preserved and more diverse occurrences are known in the vicinity;
 ‘Non-replicable Cultural heritage may relate to the social, economic, cultural, environmental, and
climatic conditions of past peoples, their evolving ecologies, adaptive strategies, and early forms
of environmental management, where the (i) cultural heritage is unique or relatively unique for
the period it represents, or (ii) cultural heritage is unique or relatively unique in linking several
periods in the same site’. Such sites should not be removed or altered except in rare
circumstances.

These definitions should be read in conjunction with Article 24 of the NMMZ Act, supported by SI 143 of
2011. These specify that excavation or alteration of any site of archaeological, cultural, historical and
paleontological presence, i.e. sites of Replicable Cultural Heritage, cannot be undertaken without the
prior written consent of the Executive Director, NMMZ. Furthermore Article 25 of the Act specifies that
no artefacts or fossil specimens may be removed from their original contexts without such permission.
Only approved persons may undertake such work as directed by the Executive Director, NMMZ.
Contravention of any of these requirements is an offence.
In practice select artefacts are sometimes collected in the field when necessary for further identification
or where accidental and immediate destruction is imminent. Such action on the part of the consultant
must be subsequently acknowledged by the Executive Director of NMMZ as having been absolutely
necessary. Details of the material removed should be recorded and the artefacts deposited back on site
or with NMMZ.
Only in rare instances will sites of Non-Replicable Cultural Heritage, including those considered especially
significant as listed in Section 3.4 of this report, be subject to development and possible
excavation/alteration. In these instances it is imperative that the developer prove all of the following
before work begins and a written response to their request be received from NMMZ:
 that the project as a whole is unable to proceed without including the area/s concerned;
 that there are no technical or financial alternatives;
 that ‘the benefits of the project conclusively outweigh the anticipated Cultural Heritage loss from
removal (IFC Standard 8, Clause 12);
 that the developer has sought and been given full community and stakeholder support. This must
be given in the form of documentary support with minutes and photographs of meetings,
signatures of all impacted stakeholders and authority by all relevant government and traditional
authorities;
 that only the best available techniques will be applied to remove this heritage;
 that the process is fully documented and paid for by the developer.
In most such cases simple avoidance is the best option. In the case of legally protected sites, in Zimbabwe
these are designated “National Monuments” no development shall be considered in or within a buffer
area, notwithstanding the above. All appeals against this must be lodged with NMMZ for onward
discussion and approval/rejection by the minister.
MITIGATION PROCEDURES
Where Replicable Cultural Heritage sites are located and development cannot be avoided the following
mitigation procedures apply. While not specified in the NMMZ Act, practise, in line with the IFC
Performance Standard 8 (Clauses 11-12), provides for a hierarchy of possible responses:
 Avoidance of development through realigning project footprint. This means that the area is fully
excluded from the project with no development in the vicinity;
 Preservation in situ. This sets standards for maintaining or restoring the local setting of the site
in question. The project may be developed in the vicinity and around it, but the site is preserved
and cared for. This includes the delineation of a suitable buffer zone;

 Scientific removal, sometimes with active community involvement, where it is deemed absolutely
necessary to relocate remains elsewhere or to a NMMZ-specified depository;
 Community compensation.
It must be stressed that while the consultant may locate sites in the field during the impact assessment
process and make value judgements as to site importance and the need or otherwise for secondary work,
the final decision of what should or should not happen remains with the Executive Director, NMMZ. After
consideration of the submitted heritage report the Executive Director will issue final written directions to
the developer.
NMMZ, through the Executive Director, might permit destruction of the reported sites without further ado.
Their letter will indicate this. Alternatively NMMZ may require additional work that could include controlled
surface collections, excavations and public presentation. This Phase 2 or Phase 3 work can only proceed
with the issuing of a permit by the Executive Director NMMZ. SI 143 of 2011 sets cost of such a permit
as US$500.00 for any foreign-based researcher and US$300.00 for a local based consultant. Often
NMMZ nominate one of its own employees to do the work, but the legislation allows the developer to
choose any suitable and registered heritage consultant. Either way the cost of the work must be covered
by the developer.
Submission to NMMZ of detailed fieldwork documentation is expected, as well as a final written report.
All artefacts or fossils recovered should be lodged with NMMZ. NMMZ may require the payment of a
once-off curatorial fee to handle the processing and storage of these remains.
In the case of particularly significant sites a preservation order may be issued by NMMZ. This order
prevents any development in or around the site. Suitable management plans will need to be drawn up
and the developer funds the process.
Where there are sites deemed to be particularly significant, NMMZ will issue a preservation order. This
prevents any development. Suitable management plans will need to be drawn up and the developer funds
the process.
OFFENCE
Failure to investigate, report and protect intangible cultural remains and paleontological sites is an
offence. In all cases the NMMZ Act specifies a fine and/or three months imprisonment for all parties who
have committed the offence, directly and indirectly, knowingly or unknowingly. This would be in addition
to any legal procedures that may be instigated under the auspices of other environmental or local
authority acts.
CHANCE FINDS PROCEDURES

While the developer may work to avoid adverse impacts on known cultural and fossil heritage, there is
always the chance that material, hitherto unexpected, may be uncovered during excavation, construction
and operation. This is because it was buried and without surface indication. Very often these occurrences
are human burials, although other sites may be fully covered in the soil profile.

There is no provision for “Chance Finds Procedures” in the NMMZ Act, although its importance is stressed
in the IFC Standard 8 (Clause 8). Statements as to what to do in these circumstances are always
incorporated in any good management plan. Where projects are in an archaeological or paleontological
sensitive area, it is suggested that developers employ on its staff a suitably experienced heritage expert/s.
Most chance finds are made once ground breaking operations begin. In this case mining may expose
hitherto unknown sites. In addition extraction of soil, sand and gravel for building infrastructure or as infill,
especially at closure may expose heritage sites. The procedure to be followed in the case of chance
finds is:
 On-site work is stopped. This is stressed in IFC Standard 8 (Clause 8) - ‘The client will not disturb
any chance find further until an assessment by competent professionals is made and actions
consistent with the requirements of this Performance Standard are identified’;
 Notification of NMMZ (and the police in the case of human skeletal remains);
 Where possible an employee of NMMZ will come to the project to make further suggestions.
This is usually excavation and removal before allowing the development to proceed. The use of police
and local residents alone is inconsistent with proper heritage mitigation. They should be engaged with
and be present, but with NMMZ directing the process;
 The developer must pay all costs incurred by NMMZ and may be also the other parties as
mentioned above;
Should the client quarry or extract outside of the Mining Lease (for soil, sand or gravel) these additional
borrow pits must be subject to separate heritage investigations before work is started.
5.8 REHABILITATION OF MINED AREAS

In terms of the rehabilitation of mined areas both the Environmental Management Act Chapter 20:27 and
the Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 and accompanying regulations (as well as the proposed
amendments to the Mines and Minerals Act) provide for the rehabilitation of mine areas by the miner.
5.8.1 Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05
Removal of Buildings and Machinery

Section 267 of the Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 require, within 3 months of the cessation of
mining activities (abandonment or forfeiter) that the miner, remove, all buildings and machinery as well
as beacons belonging to them.
Section 268 of the same Act, places the onus of ensuring public health and safety on cessation of mining
activities:
‘…on or before the abandonment, forfeiture or cancellation of a registered mining location or not later
than thirty days after the posting by the mining commissioner of the notice of abandonment, the holder

of location shall fill in all shafts, open surface workings and excavations or otherwise deal with them as
permanently to ensure the safety of persons and stock’.

Section 48 of the Environmental Management Act provides for the establishment of the environmental
fund, the proceeds of the fund are to be used for the rehabilitation of degraded areas. The funds
contributing to the Environmental Fund will be through levies from persons whose activities impact on the
environment.
5.8.3 Mining (General) Regulations, Notice 247 of 1977

The mining (General) Regulations Notice 247 of 1977, Part V, Section 32, stipulates the manner in which
workings are to be protected for the purposes of subsection (1) of section 252 and subsection (2) of
section 399 of the Mines and Minerals Act shall be any of the following:
(a) By the erection of fences which –
- entirely enclose the shaft, open surface working or excavation and
- Conform to the requirements specified design of fences and the specifications of the materials
to be used as outlined in the fourth schedule, section 32.
Or
(b) By filling the shaft, open surface working or excavation from the bottom to a sufficient height above
ground-level to ensure that future subsidence will not render the shaft, open surface working or
excavation dangerous provided that –
- The provisions of this paragraph shall not apply in respect of a shaft open surface open surface
working or excavation exceeding 10 metres in depth, except with the written permission of the
mining commissioner;
- No wood, timber or similar material shall be used for the purpose of filling in any shaft, open
surface working or excavation.
Or
(c) By the erection of dry stone walls in accordance with the following provisions –
- They shall be at least one metre in height and six hundred millimetres in width at the base.
- They shall be placed at such a distance from the lip of the shaft, open surface or excavation as
will ensure that they will not be subject to subsidence, and In no case shall any part of the wall
be placed at a distance of less than one metre from such lip;
Or
(d) by sloping back to the shaft, open surface working or excavation to a gradient of not more than on in
one;
Or
(e) by doing such other permanent work as will render the shaft, open surface working or excavation
less safe that if had been protected by any of the methods previously referred to in this section.
The regulations also state that any other measures can be used as long as the method will not render
the shaft, open surface working or excavation less safe than if it had been protected with any of the
stipulated methods in the regulations.

5.9 STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION

Stakeholder or public participation during the Environmental Impact assessment phase is specified
through the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact Assessment and Ecosystems
Protection) Regulations, SI 7 of 2007.
Part III (4) of the Environmental Management (Environmental Impact Assessment and Ecosystem
Protection) Regulations, 2007 make it mandatory for a developer to undertake wide consultations with
stakeholders during the Environmental Impact Assessment phase of project development. The Director
General has a right to verify whether full stakeholder participation was undertaken.
5.10 SOCIO ECONOMIC LEGAL FRAMEWORK

Economic policy framework is provided by the economic blue print document: the Zimbabwe Agenda for
Sustainable Economic Transformation (Zim Asset), 2013.
5.10.1 Zimbabwe Agenda for Sustainable Socio-Economic Transformation (Zim-Asset)

Zimbabwe experienced a deteriorating economic and social environment since 2000. This resulted in a
deep economic and social crisis characterized by a hyperinflationary environment and low industrial
capacity utilization, leading to the overall decline in Gross Domestic Product (GDP) by 50% in 2008.
In 2013, to guide national development, the Government of Zimbabwe crafted an economic blue print
known as the Zimbabwe Agenda for Sustainable Socio-Economic Transformation (Zim Asset), whose
focus is on the full exploitation and value addition to the country’s own abundant resources for the period
2013 – 2018.
Zim Asset is a cluster based Plan, reflecting the strong need to fully exploit the internal relationships and
linkages that exist between the various facets of the economy. These clusters are as follows:
 Food Security and Nutrition;
 Social Services and Poverty Eradication;
 Infrastructure and Utilities; and
 Value Addition and Beneficiation.
During the plan period, the economy is projected to grow by an average of 7.3%. It is expected to grow
by 3.4% in 2013 and 6.2% in 2014 and continue on an upward growth trajectory to 9.9% by 2018 as
shown in the Table 10 below
Table 10: ZimAsset Projections sector projections
Sector 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018

Proj. Proj. Proj. Proj. Proj. Proj.
% % % % % %
Agriculture, hunting and fishing -1.3 9.0 5.1 7.0 8.0 12.5
Mining and quarrying 6.5 11.4 9.2 6.5 12.0 12.6
Manufacturing 1.5 3.2 6.5 7.5 8.4 9.5

Electricity and water 4.2 4.5 7.0 9.8 11.0 16.0

Construction 10.0 11.0 13.5 12.0 13.0 15.0
Finance and insurance 2.6 6.4 6.2 6.2 8.1 10.3
Real estate 10.0 11.0 13.5 12.0 13.0 15.0
Distribution, hotels and restaurants 3.4 5.2 5.0 5.0 7.1 9.3
Transport and communication 3.4 4.4 5.5 5.3 5.4 8.0
Public administration 5.2 4.2 4.5 3.5 2.4 2.5
Education 5.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 4.5 4.4
Health 4.3 3.4 4.3 6.2 2.0 4.0
Domestic services 1.5 1.5 3.0 1.8 2.1 2.2
Other services 2.5 2.5 3.0 2.5 2.8 2.8
GDP at market prices 3.4 6.1 6.4 6.5 7.9 9.9
Source: Ministry of Finance and Economic Development
5.11 ROAD DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

Consideration for the design and construction of roads is contained within the Roads Act, Chapter 13:18
and the Rural District Councils Act, Chapter 29:13.
5.11.1 Rural District Councils Act, Chapter 29:13

Part VIII section 58 makes provision of the establishment of a roads committee who are responsible for
looking into all matter relating to the construction and maintenance of roads in the council area.
In light of the proposed road upgrade and proposed underpass along the main Robert Mugabe highway,
GDI should liaise with Chegutu Rural District Council for the upgrade of roads within the mine lease area
and with the Provincial Department of Roads Engineer based in Chinhoyi. The proposed road
improvement designs and drawings should be submitted to the District Council and Department of Roads
for approval.
5.11.2 Roads Act, Chapter 13:18

The Roads Act Chapter 13:18 makes provision for the establishment of a National Road Administration
and Road Fund and Department of Roads Fund. The Act also provides for the planning, construction,
rehabilitation and management of the road network in Zimbabwe and to provides for the regulation of the
standards applicable in the planning, design construction, maintenance and rehabilitation of roads with
regard to safety and environmental considerations and provides for the regulation of the erection of
structures; acquisition of land and materials for road works.
The Act also reclassifies roads and defines the responsible authority in accordance with the function of
roads as follows:
Road Type Function Responsible authority

Primary road Means a road not forming part of the Department of Roads
Regional Trunk Road Network which links
regional roads to urban centres or urban

centres to each other and which has been

declared to be a primary road under this
Act.
Regional road Any road forming part of the Regional Department of Roads
Trunk Road Network which has been
declared to be a regional road in terms of
the Roads Act.
Regional Trunk Road Roads linking countries within the Department of Roads
Southern African Region
Secondary road Road which connects regional, primary, Department of Roads
tertiary and urban roads, industrial and
mining centres, tourist attractions and
minor border posts to each other and
which has been declared to be a
secondary road in terms of this act
Tertiary road Road which provides access to schools, Rural District Council (some
health centres, dip tanks and other roads are the responsibility
services or facilities within a rural district of the District Development
council area or connects and provides Fund – section 72 of the
access to secondary, primary and regional Roads Act)
roads within and outside a rural district
council area and which has been declared
to be a tertiary road in terms of this Act
Urban Road Any road within an urban council area, Municipality or rural district
other than a secondary, primary or regional council
road
Road Width
Shall be 31,5 meters in width
Bridges and culverts

A bridge or culvert shall have a clear span of one coma five meters or more (in accordance to a design
and specification approved by the Minister); Failure to design in accordance to the requirement, the
Department of Roads may:
 Demolish the bridge or culvert or
 Rebuild the bridge or culvert; or
 Make alterations as he may consider necessary.
Storm water from adjoining roads

Section 40 of the Act, stipulates that every road authority shall have power to construct drains for the
purpose of safely leading storm water which would naturally gather or impinge upon a road to the nearest
natural drainage.

If any property owner suffers damage to their property as a result of the construction of any drain, the
road authority concerned shall pay reasonable compensation to the aggrieved owner of the property. If
any dispute regarding compensation arises, the matter shall be referred to the Administrative Court.
Section 47 outlines the offences with respect to diversion, closure, obstruction, encroachment and
damage of road whereby diversion or closing roads in an offence. Additionally, any person who leaves
or places over any road any timber, stones, rubbish material within 50 metres from the boundary of any
road or encroaches on any road by making or erecting any building, fence, ditch or planting trees, marks
without reasonable cause, digs up, removes or alters in any way the soil, surface or scarping of any road
or below the surface commits an offence. The section also prohibits making a structural alteration on,
over or below the surface of a road. The offender is liable to imprisonment and/ fine.
5.12 SUMMARY OF LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS & ENVIRONMENTAL PERMITS REQUIRED

In light of the above legislative requirements, Table 11 below highlights some of the legislative
requirements and environmental permits required.
Table 11: List of Environmental legislative requirements and permits required
Environmental legislative Legal Reference Priority

requirement
Obtain Environmental Impact Environmental Management High (to enable
Assessment Licence Act, Chapter 20:27 development to proceed)
Line waste facility (lining and Environmental Management High (to avoid
design of waste facility to be (Effluent & Solid Waste environmental pollution on
approved by the Environmental Disposal) Regulations, SI 6 of land or water. ESIA may not
Agency) 2007. be approved if the design
and lining are not approved
by EMA)
Permit for abstraction of Water Water Act Chapter 20:24 High (GDI to obtain permit
from the Manyame Catchment during the planning phase)
Council
Road/ Designs Approval: GDI to submit for High (Obtain approval from
approval the proposed road Ministry Of Transport,
upgrade designs. Department of Roads)
Protect all areas of historical, National Museums and High (Proposed project area
architectural, archaeological, Monuments, Chapter 25:01 has a number of areas of
paleontological value predating historical interest to be
1890 protected during
construction)
Submit a separate Heritage National Museums and High (to be submitted to
report to the NMMZ for approval Monuments SI 143 NMM before the ESIA is

submitted to EMA and to

include the letter from NMMZ
within the EIA report) Please
refer to Appendix A of the
Public Consultation Report
Volume III.
Undertake public consultation Environmental Management High (show evidence of
during EIA process (Environmental Impact public consultation. Failure
Assessment and Eco-systems) to undertake or show
Regulations, SI 7, 2007 evidence of public
consultation can result in
rejection or delay in issuing
of EIA licence). Please refer
to the Public Consultation
Report Volume III.
Permit for abstraction & Environmental Management High (required during
transportation of sand and / or (Environmental Impact construction)
clay Assessment and Ecosystems
Protection) Regulations, 2007
Protection of specified species Parks and Wildlife Act Chapter High (relocation of protected
20:14 Aloe spp during
construction)
Put in place appropriate fire Environmental Management High (especially during the
prevention measures on premises (Environmental Impact dry season)
Assessment and Eco-systems)
Regulations, SI 7, 2007
Licence for discharge into public Environment (Water & Effluent High (When fully
stream or surface water Disposal) Regulations operational )
Permit to store explosives in an Explosives Regulations, 1989, High (When fully

immovable magazine SI 72 of 1989 operational )
Clearing of invasive species Environmental Management High (Onus is on developer

Act, Chapter 20:27, fifth to ensure that they clear all
schedule invasive species during
construction and operation
listed in the fifth schedule –
discussed above)
Waste/hazardous waste licence Environmental Management Low (during operation if
(Effluent & Solid Waste there are hazardous waste
Disposal) Regulations, SI 6 of materials)
2007.

Solid waste licence Environmental Management Medium-High During

(Effluent & Solid Waste operation)
Disposal) Regulations, SI 6 of
2007.
Waste Management Plan Environmental Management Low (Relevant when site is
(Effluent & Solid Waste operational).
Disposal) Regulations, 2007.
Vehicle Emissions to comply with Environmental Management Medium – High (Ensure that
standards (Atmospheric Pollution Control) all mine vehicles comply to
Regulations, 2007. these regulations)
Emissions permit Environmental Management Low (No smelter is proposed

(Atmospheric Pollution Control) within the current project
Regulations, 2007. design)
Hazardous substances storage Environmental Management Medium –High. (During

and use permit (SI 12 of 2007) Hazardous operational phase) Storage
substances, pesticides and of chemicals considered
other toxic substances hazardous)
5.13 INTERNATIONAL FINANCE CORPORATION STANDARDS

The International Finance Corporation (IFC) Standards provide a Sustainability Framework that
articulates the IFC’ s strategic commitment to sustainable development, and is an integral part of IFC’s
approach to risk management. The Sustainability Framework comprises IFC’s Policy and Performance
Standards on Environmental and Social Sustainability. IFC uses the Sustainability Framework along with
other strategies, policies, and initiatives to direct the business activities of the Corporation in order to
achieve its overall development objectives. The Performance Standards may also be applied by other
financial institutions.
The eight Performance Standards the client is to meet throughout the life of an investment by IFC are:
Performance Standard 1: Assessment and Management of Environmental and Social Risks and
Impacts, establishes the importance of (a) integrated assessment to identify the environmental and social
impacts, risks, and opportunities of projects; (b) effective community engagement through disclosure of
project-related information and consultation with local communities on matters that directly affect them;
and (c) the client’s management of environmental and social performance throughout the life of the
project.
The objective of the PS1 is:

o To identify and evaluate environmental and social risks and impacts of the project.

o To adopt a mitigation hierarchy to anticipate and avoid, or where avoidance is not possible, minimize,
and, where residual impacts remain, compensate/offset for risks and impacts to workers, Affected
Communities, and the environment.
o To promote improved environmental and social performance of clients through the effective use of
management systems.
o To ensure that grievances from Affected Communities and external communications from other
stakeholders are responded to and managed appropriately.
o To promote and provide means for adequate engagement with Affected Communities throughout the
project cycle on issues that could potentially affect them and to ensure that relevant environmental
and social information is disclosed and disseminated.
Refer to section 7 of this report, anticipated impacts.
Performance Standard 2: Labour and Working Conditions recognizes that the pursuit of economic
growth through employment creation and income generation should be accompanied by protection of
the fundamental1 rights of workers. For any business, the workforce is a valuable asset, and a sound
worker-management relationship is a key ingredient in the sustainability of a company.
The objectives of PS2 are:

o To promote the fair treatment, non-discrimination, and equal opportunity of workers.
o To establish, maintain, and improve the worker-management relationship.
o To promote compliance with national employment and labor laws.
o To protect workers, including vulnerable categories of workers such as children, migrant workers,
workers engaged by third parties, and workers in the client’s supply chain.
o To promote safe and healthy working conditions, and the health of workers.
o To avoid the use of forced labor.
GDI recognizes the requirements of this performance standard. GDI Human Resources policy is to treat
employees fairly; comply with national labor laws and protect workers including the vulnerable. In
addition, the policy bans the employment of children and implores against forced labour.
Performance Standard 3: Resource Efficiency and Pollution Prevention recognizes that increased
economic activity and urbanization often generate increased levels of pollution to air, water, and land,
and consume finite resources in a manner that may threaten people and the environment at the local,
regional, and global levels.1 There is also a growing global consensus that the current and projected
atmospheric concentration of greenhouse gases (GHG) threatens the public health and welfare of current
and future generations.

o To avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health and the environment by avoiding or
minimizing pollution from project activities;
o To promote more sustainable use of resources, including energy and water;
o To reduce project-related GHG emissions.

It is the responsibility of GDI and service providers to avoid or minimize adverse impacts on human health
and the environment by avoiding or minimizing pollution from project activities; promote more sustainable
use of resources, including energy and water and reduce project-related GHG emissions.
Recommendations on resource efficiency and pollution prevention are outlined in the Environmental
Management and Monitoring Plan, Volume II and in the impacts section of this report.
Performance Standard 4: Community Health, Safety, and Security recognize that project activities,
equipment, and infrastructure can increase community exposure to risks and impacts. In addition,
communities that are already subjected to impacts from climate change may also experience an
acceleration and/or intensification of impacts due to project activities.

o To anticipate and avoid adverse impacts on the health and safety of the Affected Community during
the project life from both routine and non-routine circumstances.
o To ensure that the safeguarding of personnel and property is carried out in accordance with relevant
human rights principles and in a manner that avoids or minimizes risks to the Affected Communities.
Community health and safety plan is outlined in the Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan,
Volume II.
Performance Standard 5: Land Acquisition and Involuntary Resettlement recognizes that project-
related land acquisition and restrictions on land use can have adverse impacts on communities and
persons that use this land. Involuntary resettlement refers both to physical displacement (relocation or
loss of shelter) and to economic displacement (loss of assets or access to assets that leads to loss of
income sources or other means of livelihood) as a result of project-related land acquisition and/or
restrictions on land use.

o To avoid, and when avoidance is not possible, minimize displacement by exploring alternative project
designs;
o To avoid forced eviction;
o To anticipate and avoid, or where avoidance is not possible, minimize adverse social and economic
impacts from land acquisition or restrictions on land use by:
(i) providing compensation for loss of assets at replacement cost and
(ii) ensuring that resettlement activities are implemented with appropriate disclosure of
information, consultation, and the informed participation of those affected;
o To improve, or restore, the livelihoods and standards of living of displaced persons;
o To improve living conditions among physically displaced persons through the provision of adequate;
housing with security of tenure at resettlement sites.
A number of families will be affected by the Darwendale project, please refer to the Resettlement Action
Plan, Volume IV.

Performance Standard 6: Biodiversity Conservation2 and Sustainable Management of Living

Natural Resources recognizes that protecting and conserving biodiversity, maintaining ecosystem
services, and sustainably managing living natural resources are fundamental to sustainable
development. The requirements set out in this Performance Standard have been guided by the
Convention on Biological Diversity, which defines biodiversity as “the variability among living organisms
from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial, marine and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological
complexes of which they are a part; this includes diversity within species, between species, and of
ecosystems.”

o To protect and conserve biodiversity.
o To maintain the benefits from ecosystem services.
o To promote the sustainable management of living natural resources through the adoption of practices
that integrates conservation needs and development priorities.
It is the responsibility of GDI and their suppliers to protect and conserve biodiversity, maintain the benefits
from ecosystem services and promote the sustainable management of living natural resources through
the adoption of practices that integrate conservation needs and development priorities. In order to protect
and conserve biodiversity the rehabilitation, as far as is reasonably possible of all disturbed land resulting
from the prospecting activities is be carried out. Recommendations on biodiversity, conversation and
sustainable management of natural resources is outlined in the Environmental Management and
Monitoring Plan, Volume II and section 7 of this report, anticipated impacts.
Performance Standard 7: Indigenous Peoples

Not applicable.
United Nations defines indigenous people as people who inherited and practice unique cultures and ways
of relating to people and the environment. Indigenous people have managed to emulate and practice the
social, economic and political way of living of the original inhabitants of the area they are living in.
Due to the Government of Zimbabwe’s resettlement programme embarked on in the early 2000’s, settlers
not wholly indigenous to the area now predominantly occupy the project area, who were brought in from
different areas therefore there are no any indigenous people affected by the project.
Performance Standard 8: Cultural Heritage recognizes the importance of cultural heritage for current
and future generations. Consistent with the Convention Concerning the Protection of the World Cultural
and Natural Heritage, this Performance Standard aims to ensure that clients protect cultural heritage in
the course of their project activities.
2Biodiversity refers to the diversity of living organisms and the interactions between themselves and with the physical environment.
Measuring and monitoring biodiversity gives an indication of the health of the environment and its resilience (ability to absorb impacts) and
likelihood of recovery from disturbances (Childes & Gardiner, 1999).

o To protect cultural heritage from the adverse impacts of project activities and support its preservation.
o To promote the equitable sharing of benefits from the use of cultural heritage.
A detailed Archaeological and Cultural Heritage study has been undertaken and sites of special
significance identified. Further reference should be made to the Cultural Heritage Report, Volume V
and section 6.7.3 ESIA report.

6 BIO-PHYSICAL BASELINE SETTING
6.1 TOPOGRAPHY
The central gabbronorite ridge dominates the topography north from the Railway line to its synclinal
closure just south of the Manyame River in the north. The elevation is consistently above 1370 masl with
the low bounding scarp becoming more prominent northwards and up the western contact with the
ultramafic rocks. The Manyame River reaches an elevation of 1320 masl at the road bridge downstream
of the Darwendale Dam. Again the western Dyke margin is occupied by a north-trending tributary wetland
to the Manyame where the elevation is about 1310 masl.
The railway crossing of the Great Dyke takes advantage of the low watershed separating the Manyame
catchment to the north and the Mupfure river catchment to the south. This watershed also separates the
northern mining blocks from those to the south. On the eastern flank the elevation stands at about 1370
metres above mean sea level (masl) with a gradual descent westwards along the line of rail to 1320 masl.
South and east of the line of rail, following the western margin of the Great Dyke lies the Makwiro River
valley, which is entrenched to a level of 1250 masl adjacent to Makwiro Station. The source of the
Makwiro River and its right-bank tributary actually lies to the east of the Great Dyke across the mature
granitic land surface south of Lydiate Siding at an elevation of 1370 masl. The western boundary of the
southern section of the Mining Lease is crossed at an elevation of 1300 masl. Marking the southern
boundary of the mining lease on Cromdale Estate is the Saruwe River, which also crosses the Dyke and
meets a south-flowing tributary at an elevation of about 1270 masl. Despite the entrenchment of the
Makwiro and Saruwe rivers, the intervening centrally situated gabbronorite ridge of the Dyke maintains
an elevation of 1320 to 1340 masl, rising perceptibly northwards. The western contact of the gabbro with
the ultramafic units of the Dyke creates a low scarp up the eastern extent of the Makwiro Valley, which
rises up to 40m from the valley floor.

6.1.1 Climate
Although climatic records have been monitored at the Darwendale Dam since its construction in 1972,
these figures for rainfall and pan evaporation are not available. The most complete climatic records for
the region are from the Chibero College weather station some 40km southeast of the Darwendale Lease
area. Rainfall figures are available from Selous, 22km south, Makwiro, 13km to the southwest and
Philiphaugh, 7km southeast of the mine office3.
Minimum and Maximum Temperatures

The average annual minimum temperature recorded for Chibero station between 1969 and 2007 was
11.1°C whilst the average annual maximum temperature was 27.1°C recorded between the same years.
The highest temperatures may exceed 30oC in October of any one season.
Open pan evaporation and rainfall comparisons have been measured at Chibero weather station as
follows to give a 12-year average between 1968 and 1980.
Evaporation and Rainfall

Rainfall events are usually of short duration with limited periods of high intensity of the thunderstorm
variety. These events can result in increased runoff on slopes that may cause sheet erosion and
aggravate gully formation, especially in zones of disturbed ground. Lighter rains of greater duration can
be experienced should the intertropical convergence zone be drawn southwards over Zimbabwe.
Similarly south-easterly airflows may draw in cold weather accompanied by light drizzle or ‘guti’,
especially during the cooler months. Cyclonic conditions can introduce prolonged rainfall distribution, or
conversely all moisture can be drawn away from the country.
Open pan evaporation and rainfall comparisons have been measured at Chibero weather station as
follows to give a 12-year average between 1968 and 1980:
JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN TOTAL
mm
Evaporation 129 173 223 246 191 148 153 136 147 131 126 113 1916
Rainfall 0.9 0.2 9.4 47.4 104.7 174.4 181.9 142.9 102.8 33.3 7.0 0.3 805.2
The record for Lake Chivero over a 22-year average is as follows:

(mm)
Evaporation 97 126 166 193 160 146 140 126 141 124 105 87.2 1611
Rainfall 2.5 1.9 5.9 31.7 109.5 169.5 145.6 157.4 59.6 45.6 11.4 1.4 741.9
Rainfall records for Selous (1961-91), Makwiro Station (1961-91) and Philiphaugh (1971-83) are given
as follows:
mm
3 Ministry of Water Resources and Development. Hydrological Summaries, 1980 & Department of Meteorological services

Selous 0.4 1.4 5.6 38.4 94.9 166.6 171 149.2 87.6 33.6 4.5 1.8 755
Makwiro 0 2 5 33 121 165 202 164 100 30 8 2 832
Philiphaugh 1.3 0 9.3 34.4 105.6 197.3 188.5 193.9 84.9 39.3 2.7 0 857.2
In the 1991-92 rainfall drought season Selous received 518.5mm and Philiphaugh 535.2mm of
precipitation. From these figures there is an indication that total rainfall reduces slightly from north to
south and from east to west.
Prevailing wind direction

Winds blow primarily from the east to the west. Wind speeds are highest in August when they can exceed
7 knots. The annual wind speed measured at Chibero Meteorological station averages 3,3 knots. Highest
daily wind speed of 30 knots was recorded on 6 April 2001. The highest monthly wind speed was recorded
as 14.3 knots in August 1974 whilst the lowest monthly wind speed of 2,5 knots was recorded between
1969 and 2007.
6.1.2 Geology
The Great Dyke of Zimbabwe cuts the granite-greenstone terrain of the Zimbabwe Craton along a NNW-
trending gash that is some 550km long. It comprises four contiguous lopolithic layered igneous
complexes. Each complex of the Great Dyke may be broadly defined as having an upper mafic
succession of gabbro and norite and a lower sequence of ultramafic units comprising pyroxenite, dunite
and chromitite as essentially mono-mineralic cumulates. Most of the surface expression of olivine
cumulates, namely the dunites and harzburgites, show extensive alteration to serpentinite, the degree of
which decreases with depth and is less apparent in hartzburgite. The ultramafic sequence comprises a
number of cyclic units made up of these alternating rock-types. Up to six ultramafic cycles are
progressively exposed northwards up the western margin of the Dyke, whilst three cycles are recognized
in the east before the ultramafic sequence becomes masked by the Darwendale Dam, please refer
Figures 21 and 22. The northward closure of the gabbronorite and progressive horizons beyond the
Darwendale Dam wall together with repetition of individual cyclic horizons up the east and west Dyke
flanks define the synclinal nature of the Hartley Complex structure with a general axial plunge to the
south. The Main Sulphide Zone (MSZ), which represents the platinum group mineral (PGM), copper,
nickel and gold ore horizon, occupies a stratigraphic position that is towards the top of what is referred to
as the P1 Pyroxenite layer where this merges into an ultramafic rock referred to as websterite. The top
of the websterite is in contact with the base of the mafic succession, commonly comprising the
gabbronorite. Thus the defined opencast areas follow the exposure down dip at 15 to 17 degrees from
both the west and east. The attitude of the MSZ will be flat across the Dyke axis with a gentle plunge of
5 to 7 degrees to the south such that unoxidized ore body may vary from 40 metres below surface in the
north to 700 metres in the far south. From time to time later dolerite dykes will be encountered, as will
be the presence of aplitic dykes.

Figure 21: Geological layering

(Within the Hartley Complex of the Great Dyke between Selous, and the Darwendale Dam on the Manyame River. T.J.
Broderick 1983)

Figure 22: Vertical Succession of the Great Dyke

(As represented in the Hartley Complex after Wilson & Wilson, 1981)

The elevated portions of the gabbronorite exposure are generally reflected by the presence of shallow
red-brown loamy soils with associated small rounded boulder forms. The decomposed gabbronorite is
normally seen as a grey-white friable material beneath the soil horizon due to the kaolinization of feldspar.
In elevated localized dambo developments in depressions on the high gabbronorite surface shallow grey-
black vertisol may develop locally, or become more widespread as it does across much of the east-facing
lithologies of the Great Dyke south of the railway line and within depressed valleys such as that of the
Makwiro River and that flowing south down Cromdale Estate to the Saruwe River. These catenary effects
result in a shallow, friable expanding-lattice clay soil with included round boulder forms. The level plain
across the western ultramafic sequence north of the main road is characterized by the presence of
shallow grey-black vertisol particularly defining grassy dambo features. It is this area that is intended as
the site for plant and tailings dam. Diamond drill holes for geotechnical investigation of the subsurface
will include the recording of standard penetration rates (SPR) and a number of observation boreholes will
be drilled and tested in this area.
A sample of diamond drill logs shows that black vertisols over the open cast area south of the Manyame
River in the north are 0.35 to 0.95m thick. Red to red-brown silty clay soils with associated boulders
occupy the elevated ridge to the south at depths ranging from 0.14m to 2.30m. South of the railway dark
clayey soils dominate, especially across the eastern margin of the Dyke with depths of 0.2 to 2.14m, often
with boulders and grey-white decomposition of gabbronorite below. Weathering profiles vary from 6 to
30m in boreholes and tend to be deeper over projected fault zones. Judging from the hanging wall faces
of chrome pits, dark vertisols rarely exceed a depth of 1m over decomposed to highly weathered
ultramafic rocks across the western plain. Please see Photo 2 and 3 below.
Photo 2: GDI Weathering Library

(Indicating Soil, Decomposed to Completely Weathered, Highly Weathered and Fractured, Weathered and Jointed, Slightly
Weathered to Fresh Gabbronorite)
The predominant fault trends across the northern part of the Mining Lease are north-westerly in
orientation as shown on Figure 21 above. Their definition dictates the proposed mining blocks in this
area, as shown in Figure 22 above. Strike-slip displacements of lithological horizons are apparent with
magnitudes of a few to say 100 metres both sinistrally and dextrally. A convergence of some of these
faults is manifest in a prominent NW-trending quartz reef in the northwest bounding granite, crossing the

downstream Manyame River. In the south fracturing appears to be more easterly in their trend, rarely
extending beyond the Dyke margins. These are taken to represent sag faults within the Dyke itself and
may not have displacements exceeding a few metres. East-west faults that control the upper Makwiro
Valley tend to be more apparent, and these do appear to extend beyond the Dyke margins into the
bounding granite. An ENE-trending dolerite dyke traverses the Great Dyke east of Makwiro Station whilst
north-trending fractures are also apparent south of the Makwiro River extending down Cromlet Estate
and beyond the Saruwe River. The influence of the north-westerly fault set in the south should not be
discounted, but these remain to be defined spatially through the extended drilling programme.
Photo 3: Highly weathered and fractured websterite in the wall of the bulk open pit sample
The outcropping ore zone of the MSZ in the P1 pyroxenite is fairly consistently at 8 to 10m below the
websterite contact and is 2-2.5m wide. The ore is oxidized to a depth of 20 to 35m where the platinum
is often preserved in clay complexes. This ore will either be left in situ or be stock piled where the potential

for acid mine drainage will be minimized. Open pit mining previously considered was going to be focused
on the non-oxidized ore, which comprises Pt and Pd bismuth-tellurides (about 64%), Pt-arsenide as
sperrylite (11%), Pt-Pd sulphides with Ni (13%), and platinum group sulpharsenides 2.5% (Oberthur,
2012). In addition the mineralization comprises Cu and Ni sulphides and some gold. It is this horizon
that will be the target for both open pit and underground mining.
The existing waste rock dump for material from the bulk sampling open pit over P1 pyroxenite adjacent
and to the northeast was designed with a clay base over a footprint of some 10ha with drainage to deflect
runoff and intercept seepage through the rock pile as a measure against possible acid mine drainage.
Acid Base Accounting (ABA) analysis for the ore and waste rock from various excavation depths were
conducted to determine the acid-producing and acid-neutralising potential of the overburden, the results
of which can be used in future waste rock dump design.
6.1.3 Seismic Risk

The Great Dyke lies centrally within the Zimbabwe Craton, an ancient stable block that is regarded as
being generally aseismic. Small earthquakes of magnitude 2.8 to 3.9 on the Richter scale have been
recorded, one epicentre being near Chibero College and one to the north of Darwendale near Banket.
The chances of experiencing an event with magnitude 4.0-4.9 once in a few hundred years are
considered to be negligible. The maximum intensity on the Modified Mercalli Scale is IV whereby hanging
objects may swing, vibrations akin to the passing of a heavy truck are felt and windows, dishes and doors
rattle. The seismic hazard is considered to be low in that there is only a 10% probability indicated for a
peak ground acceleration of up to 0.2 m/s2 being exceeded once in 50 years.
6.1.4 Hydrology and Hydrology

At 3 to 4km width at any one point, the Lease is divided on an east-west line into two halves just south of
the railway line from Harare to Bulawayo, The northern part of the project site falls into the Manyame
hydrological Catchment Area, while the central and southern parts falls into the Sanyati Catchment Area)
Drainage forms part of Lazy and Manyame Rivers in the northern section, Makwiro River in the central
section and Saruwe River in the southern section. The altitudes of the project area and its surroundings
range from 1312 to 1389 m above sea level with the hydrological catchment boundary generally
representing the highest points.
The ground water and surface water resources of the mining lease and surrounding country are
undoubtedly linked by way of the hydrological cycle. Rainfall will dissipate by way of runoff to the river
system, recharge to the ground water system, base flow to streams and evapotranspiration to the
atmosphere. The crystalline nature of the substrate, comprising mafic and ultramafic rocks of the Great
Dyke, the bounding granitoid rocks of the Craton, and later dolerite and aplite intrusions, dictate that the
available ground water is unconfined and meteoric. Due to the lack of primary porosity in these rock-
types, ground water storage and transmission is wholly dependent on the availability of secondary
porosity, which relates to the degree of weathering and fracturing affecting the bedrock (photo 3).
Consequently most ground water will be stored superficially within the weathered and fractured zone,
known as the saprolite. Deeper circulation of ground water will be constrained to open fracturing and
fissuring associated with faulting and perhaps dyke intrusion, and will tend to be localized. Thus a
traverse during construction along the Darwendale tunnel, which conducts water from Lake Manyame

over 15km to the Morton Jaffray Waterworks near Lake Chivero at an invert level of 80 metres below
surface, showed that ground water circulation was insignificant except at the intersection of the East Dyke
where major influx took place. Similarly conditions within the deeper underground mining blocks on the
Great Dyke are likely to be dry below the level of saprolite development. Some ingress can be expected
where open fault planes are encountered. Conversely in the open pit mining areas one may expect
increased seasonal ground water ingress above a fluctuating water table. Due to the generally closely
jointed rock mass within the Great Dyke lithologies and to the topographic expression, this water table
may be depressed. However, surface ponding and retention of rainwater may take place over clayey
soils resulting in seasonally perched aquifer conditions and the development of vleis or dambos relating
to black expanding lattice soils. Vleis that develop across the neighbouring granites retain water above
massive, pavement-like bedrock. It is these vleis or seasonal wetlands that allow for attenuation of
meteoric water and provide the control on base flow to the river systems. Streams may therefore maintain
their flow for some time following the close of the rainy season, but drying may be accelerated due to
variable rainfall distribution and amount, the degree of evapotranspiration, and the amount of land
degradation within the catchment. Rainfall runoff way be stored by impoundment, the case in point being
the damming of the Manyame River as lakes Chivero and Manyame. Similarly annual flow along the
Mupfure River to the south is consistently held back by a series of weirs, one over-spilling to the next.
Outlet from the Manyame Dam maintains the river flow to downstream users and the environment. Thus
it is imperative to monitor and sustain the interaction between ground water and surface water to maintain
this cycle.
The Water Act of 2001 and accompanying permit regulations recognize this water cycle in the
establishment of Catchment Councils to control and sustain the use of available water to best advantage.
Mining Lease 03 relates to two Catchment Councils, namely the Manyame north of the watershed
effectively followed by the line of rail and the Sanyati to the south. Thus the northern mining blocks
representing the prime interest of this impact assessment are administered by the Upper Manyame
Subcatchment Council, whilst the southern extent of the lease awaiting refinement of ore reserve
estimation for future mining activity conveniently relates to the Upper Middle Mupfure Subcatchment
Council. Both ground water flow and surface runoff will respond to the respective topographic gradients
developed towards the controlling primary river system. In the case of the northern section the
development of the Great Dyke as a central ridge effectively divides and limits runoff east and north into
Lake Manyame from that flowing west and north into the downstream Manyame River. The more
aggressive backward erosion up the Saruwe and Makwiro valley from the Mupfure River have extended
that catchment eastwards to a point south of Norton town, and thus the Great Dyke in this zone is more
subdued and entrenched by the river system. In the case of the Manyame Catchment the lowest point
of influence is at the termination of the north-directed vlei marking the contact between the western Dyke
lithologies against the bounding granite at some 1300 masl. By contrast the lowest point to the south
within the mining lease at the confluence of the Saruwe River and the south-directed Cromlet vlei is at
some 1270 masl, whilst at the same latitude to the west the bed of the Makwiro River is at 1235 masl.
Thus the ground and surface water gradients in the north are directed to the east and west before verging
north and in the south the general gradient is to the west and south.
Ground Water
A survey of existing water boreholes, shown on Table 12 below shows that those drilled into the

gabbronorite forming the north-directed ridge of the Great Dyke within the Manyame Catchment have
invariably failed, including those boreholes drilled by GDI around the administrative and residential centre.
The producing boreholes on the east for both the local farmer and for the GDI water supply are related
to the north-westerly-trending cross faults where they cut the websterite and underlying ultramafic rocks.
This is also true of the borehole drilled by the diamond drilling contractor south of the open pit but
associated with a cross fault. This borehole was the only success following three other attempts adjacent
when dry holes were realized. From experience gained along other sections of the Great Dyke, boreholes
drilled into the P1 pyroxenite layer are usually low yielding or unsuccessful, even when situated along
projected faults. This is the case with monitoring borehole MW04 drilled to over 100 metres just west of
the open pit rock dump on 12th May 2016 and overseen by SRK, please refer to Photo 4 below. Farther
west are the first chromite seams, currently being mined open cast from south to north prior to being
backfilled. This chrome ore is usually associated with an olivine and pyroxene cumulate referred to as
harzburgite, which is often weathered to a friable, granular material, and with dunite, an olivine-rich
ultramafic rock. In both the olivine becomes altered to serpentinite near surface. Ground water is often
developed from the granular and fractured hartzburgite as might be evidenced by the presence of a
number of boreholes drilled into the western footwall of the chromite. These include private boreholes
drilled on the Chifombo and Samanga plots and for a Chinese mining contractor, shown on Photo 5.
Photo 4: The drilling of monitoring borehole

(MW04 to +100m through P1 pyroxenite in a dry situation near the open pit rock dump)

Photo 5: Drip irrigation from the Chifombo family borehole

(Drip irrigation from the Chifombo family borehole in footwall harzburgite below the uppermost chrome seam)
The serpentinized dunite found elsewhere across the lower cyclic units of the Great Dyke exposed to the
west, with intervening pyroxenite bands are more compact and do not have a history of effective ground
water delivery to boreholes. The geotechnical and water monitoring boreholes being drilled for the
planned tailings and plant facilities across the ultramafic alternation up to the western Dyke contact will
give a more detailed hydrogeological understanding for this area. Observations of the ground water level
in chrome pits show that the water level in this area was 11 to 12 metres below surface in February and
had subsided visibly to some 13 metres below surface in May 2016, please refer to Photo 6 below. In
February 2016 one of these pits was being dewatered with the pumped water being discarded directly to
the open vlei adjacent where return recharge will have been restricted by the underlying vertisol and
runoff impeded due to the imperceptible gradient and grassy vegetation. Ponding will have resulted with
increased evaporation.

Photo 6: Ground water in a chrome pit at 12 mbgl

Photo in February 2016, shows shallow vertisol horizon, weathered hanging wall ultramafic rock, landslip and the footwall
dipping at about 20o to the east. Water level declined to 13 mbgl in May 2016
The 2015/16 rainfall season has realized about 600mm with February receiving below average
local ponding (EC 177
-directed Dyke margin vlei above its Manyame River
confluence in February 2016, please see Photo 7 below. Rainfall and surface runoff will have contributed
to the surface water accumulation. In May 2016 the point of influence was dry but an adjacent shallow
ggested
that these points be developed as permanent wet and dry season monitoring points during the life of mine
due to their down-gradient locality to proposed development. A water sample from the well was collected
for baseline analysis, please refer to Table 14 below.

Photo 7: The northern extremity of the western Dyke margin wetland before influence to the Manyame River
Wet in February but dry in May. The location should represent a permanent monitoring situation from seasonal seepage
and from an adjacent well
From experience along the Great Dyke it is the east and west margins with the bounding granites that
give the most consistent results for ground water production from boreholes. This is amply illustrated
down the eastern contact on Philiphaugh, Makwiro Source and Childerley farms where irrigation water
has been developed. On Makwiro Source the cluster of boreholes is influenced by the presence of the
east-trending Makwiro Fault, which displaces and traverses the Great Dyke stratigraphy whilst developing
a marginal wetland with a high water table. One borehole on Philiphaugh Farm north of the main road
has a small yield in the P1 pyroxenite. It has been preserved with a hand pump for the local resettled
community. Most boreholes across Stanhope Farm are located in the gabbronorite south of the
watershed and are used for stock water. There are two boreholes associated with north-westerly fault
traces that have increased water yields. Similarly water yields to boreholes on Cromdale Farm are small,
although one has an elevated yield in association with a north-trending fracture. To the west of the
southern mining lease boundary a number of monitoring borehole sites were located for BHP over
favourable conditions in the gabbronorite. However, the geophysical results in the north across
Meadowlands, Netherfield and Pollockshields farms were not encouraging and the sites were not drilled.

Table 12: Mining Lease 31 and adjacent areas, Existing boreholes and ground water sites

Table 13 comprises two parts - listing details and observations on a sample of diamond drill holes
completed for the northern section of the mining lease with line numbering from 01 in the south to line
124 in the north before the Manyame River, and for those drilled or planned on grid lines south of the
main road numbered from D005 to D190 and thence D235 just north of the Saruwe River where drilling
is incomplete. The grid lines, separated by 250 metres, run from west to east with a 250-metre borehole
spacing except in the potential west and east open cast areas where the MSZ is at shallow depth and is
tested at a borehole spacing of 50 metres.
Table 13: Darwendale Platinum Project – Borehole Details and Ground Water Levels as of 10/2/2016

Table 13 allows identification of those boreholes that can be used for future ground water monitoring
such as Borehole 036-20 located at the main entrance gate to the mining lease. Please refer to Photo
8).

Photo 8: Water level monitoring point at diamond drill hole 036-20

(Located adjacent to the main entrance gate to the Darwendale Platinum Mine. Static water level at 20 mbgl. The flags
show an easterly wind direction).
It is observed that the depth to ground water over the watershed and central ridge of the Great Dyke to
the north across the gabbronorite is in excess of 30 metres below ground level (mbgl), increasing to over
40 mbgl in the elevated north. This lack of saturation within the saprolite of the gabbronorite accounts
for the negative water boring attempts along the central section of the Great Dyke. With the decrease in
elevation eastwards to the Darwendale road and shoreline of Lake Manyame the water level decreases
to between 15 and 20 mbgl reaching less than 10 mbgl around the far north lithological closure adjacent
to the Manyame River. Westwards the static water level again reaches 20 mbgl along the foot of the
central ridge, a situation that effectively defines the exposure of the MSZ. The depth to water level across
the western ultramafic plain, intended for plant and tailings dam construction, is about 12 mbgl reaching
zero at the point of influence at the downstream Manyame River confluence and far extent of the bounding
vlei to the northwest.
Details relating to surveyed collar co-ordinates for each chosen borehole, the borehole depth, soil,
weathering and fracturing depth, lithological changes and the interception of the MSZ were noted. A field
reconnaissance allowed a random selection of boreholes to be examined. The presence of boreholes is
marked in the field by a blue PVC standpipe set in a concrete base, which is identified by borehole number
and drilled depth. A high percentage of these boreholes are now inaccessible due to collapse, but a fair
sample across the northern section of the mining lease and to some extent south of the main road allowed
the measurement of the static water level. From these observations, taken in February 2016, contours

were constructed for both variations in the static water level and of the elevation of the ground water
surface, please refer to Figures 23 and 24 below.
Figure 23: Contours showing depth to static water levels in random diamond drill hole
(Taken in February 2016 across the Northern half of Mining Lease 03)

Figure 24: Ground water elevation contours across the northern half of Mining Lease 03

The ground water elevation contours shown on Figure 24 above, shows a mounding over the central
gabbronorite ridge at some 1340 masl, which is broadly equivalent to the full supply level in Lake
Manyame, but not affected by it. The elevation of the water table declines to 1330 masl along the eastern
front of the ridge paralleled by the Darwendale road and more apparently to the west where the ground
water elevation reaches 1310 masl along the topographic break, including the open pit, shown on Photo
9, and then 1300 masl along the northwest vlei and in chrome pits, and also in the southwest at the head
of the Makwiro River catchment south of the railway line. Ground water elevation declines progressively
south and south-westwards to about 1220 masl at the Saruwe and Makwiro river confluence west of
Selous town.
Photo 9: The GDI bulk sample open pit

Showing ground water at 29 mbgl near the western topographic break to the ultramafic plain where the water level is at 12
mbgl and an elevation of some 1310 masl. The water is being used for diamond drill purposes
Surface Water
The presence of surface water in the north and northeast is dominated by the presence of Lake Manyame
and the Manyame River downstream of the Darwendale Dam. Flow in the Manyame River is maintained
by outlet from the Darwendale Dam for both downstream users, including the Biri Dam near Chinhoyi,
and for environmental purposes. Further downstream the flow is augmented due to outlet from the
Mazwikadei Dam on the Mukwadzi River, now much reduced due to less demand from wheat growers.
Immediate observation is that the water stored in Lake Manyame is heavily eutrophic due to spill and
outlet from Lake Chivero upstream. The high nutrient content in the water is due to pollution, especially
from sewage and industrial overflow from both the City of Harare, Chitungwiza and increasingly from
Norton Town, which is a fast-expanding satellite to Harare adjacent to the upper reaches of Lake

Manyame. This imbalance has resulted in algae blooms, which can be seen both in the dam water itself
and in the outflow downstream, please refer to Photo 10 below. Urban-derived pollution to the lake and
downstream waters represent the greatest threat to sustainable water quality, and thus biodiversity in
and around Lake Manyame. Water samples for analysis were taken from both the Lake and river flow,
please see Table 14.
Photo 10: Eutrophic water in Lake Manyame supports algae bloom and lakeshore reed beds
Excessive pollution is evidenced by the soapsuds concentration along the shoreline. A fishing co-operative operates
adjacent. Algae remains strongly in evidence in the downstream flow of the Manyame River.
Electrical conductivity values in lake water, sampled at grid reference TR358270 and the Manyame River
flow at TR341265 Please refer to the water test results shown in
Table15 below. That recorded at the river sampling point below the old road bridge across the Manyame
River downstream of the dam wall at grid reference TR347275, Please refer to Photo
11 below

Photo 11: Manyame River looking downstream from the new road bridge
The recommended monitoring point for river water collection is in flowing water just downstream of the old bridge
Of significance is that the defined Recreational Parks surrounding the shorelines of both Lakes Chivero
and Manyame, which are administered and patrolled by the Zimbabwe Parks and Wildlife Management
Authority, were declared a recognized Ramsar Wetland on 3 rd January 2013, please see Image 5.
Further details are discussed in the biophysical section.

Image 5: The Lake Chivero and Manyame Recreational Areas

Recognized under the Ramsar Wetland Convention in January 2013. The western extent of this area, extending
downstream on the Manyame River, is immediately adjacent to the GDI Mining Lease in the north
South of the watershed the Makwiro and Saruwe river-systems, although more entrenched and better
developed, have enhanced rainfall runoff and are effectively ephemeral in their flow. Base flow however,
is attenuated by the eastern wetlands and by at least three irrigation dams constructed along the upper
reaches of the Saruwe River south of the mining lease. The potential for further dam site construction is
limited, given the restricted catchment available to the project.
Map 4 below shows the general hydrology of the mine lease area.

Map 4: General hydrology of the project site
Baseline Water Quality Analysis Results

A total of six water samples were submitted to the Environmental Management Agency Laboratory
(EMAL) for Base Line chemical analysis. These were classified as being two surface water samples, one
direct from Lake Manyame and one from flow just downstream of the old road bridge below the
Darwendale Dam outlet. Four ground water samples were analysed for Base Line parameters. These
were from the office tanks, which normally represent a blend of water from GDI boreholes 1 and 2.
Borehole 2 was not pumping on 12th May 2016, thus the analysis refers to Borehole 1. Water was taken
from the sump of the GDI open pit. Although this is ground water, inflow from direct rainfall and runoff
into the pit may introduce a dilution factor. The Chimfombo family borehole was sampled from the
ultramafic sequence in the footwall to the No.1 chromite seam. Lastly ground water from a shallow well
was sampled at the lower end of the western marginal vlei. Please refer to Table 14.

Table 14: Water sample locations with UTM co-ordinates and comparative EC values
Lake Manyame shore 235803 / 8027000 Zone

36k ARC1950 site analysis
Manyame River d/s of old 234673 / 8027533 Zone 449

road bridge 36k ARC1950
Office tanks BH1 & BH2 235556 / 8022560 Zone
36k ARC1950
GDI Open Pit ingress 233664 / 8022898 Zone
36k ARC1950
Chimfombo Family BH 232181 / 8023574 Zone
36k ARC1950
Shallow well at end western 230982 / 8026216 Zone
vlei, and surface 36k ARC1950 UTM
accumulation in February. accumulation
Tables 15 and 16 (Please also refer to Appendix E and F) are the results as presented by Environmental
Management Agency Laboratory (EMAL). The parameters analysed respectively for surface and ground
water are listed and results are compared against the band classification as published in the EMA
(Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations of 2007. Elevated results are indicated in bold in the
listing and a water quality classification is given in the range ‘Blue’, ‘Green’, ‘Yellow’ and ‘Red’.

Table 15: Analysis of surface waters from Manyame Dam and downstream in the Manyame River
Chemical
Customer Ref Manyame Manyame R. EMA(Effluent & Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations 2007
Dam North of Lower Bridge
Zipam
Type of Sample River River
Sampling method Grab Grab
Lab ref number 162772 162773 Blue Green Yellow Red
Sensitive Normal
Date sample taken 12/05/2016 12/05/2016
Date sample received 13/05/2016 13/05/2016
Parameters Units Method Status
Alkalinity mg/I HCOз Titrimetric SOP/CM02 171 162 * * * * ≤500
Chemical oxygen demand mg/I Spectrophotometric SOP/CM06 58 59 ≤30 ≤60 ≤90 ≤150 ≤200
Chloride mg/I CI Titrimetric SOP/CM07 SA 50 42 ≤200 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500
Copper mg/I Cu AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤2.0 <3.0 <5.0
Chromium mg/I Cr6+ Spectrophotometric SOP/CM08 SA 0.01 0.22 ≤0.05 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.2 ≤0.5
E. Conductivity uS/cm Electrode SOP/CM12 431 449 ≤200 ≤1000 ≤2000 ≤3000 ≤3500
Iron mg/I Fe AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.3 ≤1.0 ≤2.0 ≤5.0 ≤8.0
Manganese mg/I Mn AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA 0.04 0.01 ≤0.1 ≤0.1 ≤0.3 ≤0.4 ≤0.5
Nickel mg/I Ni AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 0.01 ≤0.3 ≤0.3 ≤0.6 ≤0.9 ≤1.5
Nitrates mg/I N Spectrophotometric SOP/CM23 SA 0.37 0.33 ≤10 ≤10 ≤20 ≤30 ≤50
pH Electrode SOP/CM27 9.03 8.86 6.0-7.5 6.0-9.0 5-6 9-10 4-5 10-12 0-4 12-14
Oxygen absorbed (PV) mg/I Titrimetric SOP/CM25 <0.01 5.9 ≤5 ≤10 ≤15 ≤25 ≤40
Phosphates mg/I P Spectrophotometric SOP/CM28 SA 0.03 0.02 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤1.5 ≤3 ≤5
Sulphate mg/I SO4 Turbidimetric SOP/CM33 46 45 ≤100 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500
Total Hardness mg/I CaCOз Titrimetric SOP/CM25 128 147 * * * * *
Turbidity NTU Nepholometric 51.40 30.10 ≤5 ≤5 * * *
Zinc mg/I Zn AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.3 ≤0.5 ≤4.0 ≤5.0 ≤15.0
Band Class Green Green

Table 16: Analysis of four ground waters collected from the Darwendale Platinum Project area
Chemical
Customer Ref GDI Open Pit GD BH 1 Chimfombo Well at end EMA(Effluent & Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations 2007
Office Tank B/H Near dombo Near
Type of Sample Borehole Borehole Borehole Borehole
Sampling method Grab Grab Grab Grab
Lab ref number 162774 162775 162776 162777 Blue Green Yellow Red
Sensitive Normal
Date sample taken 12/05/2016 12/05/2016 12/05/2016 12/05/2016
Date sample received 13/05/2016 13/05/2016 13/05/2016 13/05/2016
Parameters Units Method Status
Alkalinity mg/I HCOз Titrimetric SOP/CM02 128 463 536 334 * * * * ≤500
Chemical oxygen demand mg/I Spectrophotometric SOP/CM06 <20 <20 <20 <20 ≤30 ≤60 ≤90 ≤150 ≤200
Cadmium mg/I Cd AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.01 ≤0.01 ≤0.05 ≤0.1 ≤0.3
Calcium mg/I Ca Titrimetric SOP/CM04 SA 37.9 72.8 35.8 28.9 * * * * *
Chloride mg/I CI Titrimetric SOP/CM07 SA 2 1 1 5 ≤200 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500
Copper mg/I Cu AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤2.0 <3.0 <5.0
E. Conductivity uS/cm Electrode SOP/CM12 350 620 669 507 ≤200 ≤1000 ≤2000 ≤3000 ≤3500
Iron mg/I Fe AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.3 ≤1.0 ≤2.0 ≤5.0 ≤8.0
Magnesium mg/I Mg Titrimetric SOP/CM04 SA 23.18 44.40 78.24 41.95 * * * * *
Manganese mg/I Mn AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.1 ≤0.1 ≤0.3 ≤0.4 ≤0.5
Nickel mg/I Ni AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.3 ≤0.3 ≤0.6 ≤0.9 ≤1.5
Nitrates mg/I N Spectrophotometric SOP/CM23 SA 0.03 0.17 0.06 0.03 ≤10 ≤10 ≤20 ≤30 ≤50
pH Electrode SOP/CM27 8.73 8.07 8.24 8.32 6.0-7.5 6.0-9.0 5-6 9-10 4-5 10-12 0-4 12-14
Phosphates mg/I P Spectrophotometric SOP/CM28 SA 0.01 0.03 0.06 0.04 ≤0.5 ≤0.5 ≤1.5 ≤3 ≤5
Potassium mg/I K Flame Photometric SOP/CM31 SA 1.22 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 * * * * ≤500
Sodium mg/I Na Flame Photometric SOP/CM31 SA 3.52 7.02 8.32 26.92 ≤200 ≤200 ≤300 ≤500 ≤1000
Sulphate mg/I SO4 Turbidimetric SOP/CM33 121 23 16 41 ≤100 ≤250 ≤300 ≤400 ≤500
Total Hardness mg/I CaCOз Titrimetric SOP/CM25 190 364 411 245 * * * * *

Turbidity NTU Nepholometric 0.08 0.11 0.40 0.22 ≤5 ≤5 * * *

Zinc mg/I Zn AAS Flame SOP/CM22 SA <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 ≤0.3 ≤0.5 ≤4.0 ≤5.0 ≤15.0
Sulphides mg/I S Spectrophotometric SOP/CM34 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 ≤0.05 ≤0.2 ≤0.3 ≤0.4 ≤1
Band Class Blue Blue Red Blue

The two surface water samples fall within the Blue category except for turbidity values of 51 and 30 NTU
for near shore dam water and downstream river flow respectively. Both waters when collected presented
a green tinge due to the algal bloom, a clear indication of eutrophication brought about by upstream
urban sewage and industrial effluent pollution. Chemical Oxygen Demand at 59 mg/l almost reaches the
Green category limit of <60 mg/l. Chromium +6 is elevated at 0.22 mg/l in the river water, an indication
for the provenance of the water. Electrical Conductiv
The pH values of about 9 reflect a basicity for Manyame water above the neutrality of granite-derived
water. BOD and dissolved oxygen analyses were not done by EMAL due to technical difficulties at the
time.
All parameters for the ground waters analysed fall within the Blue category apart from the elevated
alkalinity returned for Chimfombo family borehole of 529 mg/l HCO3. Alkalinity is a measure of the ability
of an aqueous solution to neutralize acid, and in a process where the generation of acid mine drainage
is a risk, waters with high alkalinity can act in a favourable capacity. The Chimfombo borehole lies over
ultramafic rocks in the footwall zone of an actively mined chromite seam, and will be located in or adjacent
to the concentrator plant and tailings dam area where acidic products could be generated. On the Great
Dyke ultramafic one expects magnesium levels to exceed those for calcium, which is the case at the
Chimfombo borehole and also for the well water on the lower Dyke margin. Consequently Great Dyke
water is hard to very hard and the pH is alkaline, above a value of 8. Photo 12 below shows the white
inflorescence, an indication of the hardness of the ground water at the overflow off the receiver tanks for
borehole water at the GDI Office.
Photo 12: Receiver tanks for borehole water at the GDI Office.

The sulphate content in the pit water is elevated by comparison with other ground waters, and is almost
equivalent to the bicarbonate content of this water. It is uncertain why this should be. Comparatively
lower values for EC, Alkalinity and total Hardness in the open pit water may reflect dilution due to rainfall
and surface water inflow to the pit.
6.1.5 Soils
The soils are broadly classified as Cambisols in the Food and Agricultural Organisation (FAO)
harmonised database. According to Nyamapfene (1991) the soils at the project site fall into two major
soil groups, namely: (1) Siallitic (4X), comprising of black and grey clay soils from ultra-mafic rocks, also
known as Vertic Cambisol (FAO); and (2) Fersiallitic (5E), comprising of the red clays from mafic rock
intrusions also known as Ferralic Cambisol (FAO) or Oxic Ustropept, according to the United States
Department for Agriculture (USDA). Like many soils from ultramafic rocks along the Great Dyke,
agricultural potential is largely limited by the high Mg/Ca molar ratios, potentially high heavy metal
concentrations, and unfavourable landscape positions (Bangira, 2010).
Soil Analysis
Soil analysis was done according to texture, colour and mineralogy. The major soil types are the black
to grey clay soils followed by the red clay soils. Please refer to Map 5 below.

Map 5: Distribution of soils in the northern section of the project site

(according to texture, colour and mineralogy (E/C)
Clays (Siallitic Group)

The black to grey clays occupy the grassland area around the proposed infrastructure lease area as
shown on Photo 13a, and some cropland, shown on Photo 13b and woodland area towards the south,
covering a total area of about 44.3 km2. These soils display vertic morphological properties, especially
central sections but the cation exchange capacity of their clay fraction (E/C) fell below the 60 cmolc/kg to
be classified as Vertisols. The soils are conditionally rated under low sensitivity for the tailings site. The
general conditions are that: (a) effective depth extends more than 2m with no stone lining (unlike the case
as shown on Photo 13c and 12d); and (b) water table is not within 3 m during the wet season).

Photo 13: Land use on clays

(a) Grassland with few Mopane trees (Colophospermum mopane) inside the proposed infrastructure area [36K 0231762mE;
8022905mN; 1328 m asl]; (b) Maize field at Mr Mubaiwa's A1 farm [36 K 232578mE; 8019358mN; 1363 m asl]; (c) Soil
profile at the trial opencast mining bulk sampling site, point T18 [36K 233637mE 8022843mN; 1353 m asl]; (d) The 20-25 m
deep opencast pit mined by the Chinese [36K 232349mE; 8024309mN; 1318 m asl]
In terms of soil degradation by compaction the soils are fragile and have a high sensitivity, especially in
the sub-soil layers. The top-soils layer can regenerate structure owing to some evidence of self-mulching
as shown on Photo 14a, but there is need to restrict heavy machinery and vehicles to certain areas in
order to avoid soil degradation. The soils have a generally low infiltration rate, and their swelling and
shrinking properties may present challenges to civil structures and buildings. The assessment showed
that there is significant variability in soil depths at different locations as shown on Photo 14b. A profile
checking by auguring at a point within the proposed infrastructure area showed that the depth extended
beyond 1.4 m.

Photo 14: (a) Self-mulching properties of the black clay soil at a disturbed site near the Chinese opencast mine
[36K 232384mE; 8024443mN] (b) Opencast mining pit at Mr Matibhiri's A2 farm [36K 232571mE; 8021949mN; 1329 m asl]
However, this assessment could not ascertain the uniformity of the soil depth within the site proposed for
the tailings storage facility. In the absence of a uniform clay soil depth it is proposed that either a geo-
membrane or additional clay (imported from other areas) should be sourced in order to contain the
potential pollutants from a tailings storage facility. It is suggested that some of the clay can come from
open pits located to the south of the railway line.
Clay loams (Siallitic Group)

The clay loams occupy a small section of the northern part and are of very high sensitivity with respect
to the relatively high water table and proximity to Manyame River which is less than 200 m from the
sampling point, shown on Photo 15a. The soils cover an area of about 2.8 km2, and are mostly in
woodland area. Clay loam soils underlay the seasonal wetland located to the west and outside the mining
claim. This section is marked by a low altitude, ranging from 1315-1319 m. It is adjacent to the proposed
second pit from the north. A small portion of this soil unit covers a cropland under maize, Mr. Chimuka's
farm, shown on Photo 15b.
Photo 15: Land use on clay loams

(a) Site near river and drillhole, about 110 m from Manyame River [36K 234417mE; 8026865mN; 1331 m asl]; (b); Bulk
density sampling point in maize field at Mr Chimuka's farm [36 K 233599mE; 8025919mN; 1324 m asl]

The clay loams, unlike the black and grey clay soils, have a relatively better hydraulic conductivity
because their texture is coarser that that of the active clays, meaning there is improved drainage and
increased groundwater contamination. Extra precaution would be required to ensure that the
contamination of Manyame River is avoided or minimised. Residual materials from the blasting during
opencast mining in the north are likely to migrate into ground water considering the proximity of the
proposed open pit to Manyame River.
Red clays (Fersiallitic Group)

The red clays occupy areas of high altitude and are mainly under woodland and settlement, with small
portions towards the south being cultivated shown on Photo 16a and 16b. The red clay soils occupy an
area of about 24.4 km2.
The soil profile at bulk sampling site shown as Photo 13c and d showed that effective soil depth was
highly variable and almost non-existent in area near the mountains. Sensitivity of these soils is rated as
low due to their relatively low pollutant retention capacity and good drainage. The exceptions would be
rocky areas, near or on the mountains where the effective soil depth is shallow, especially in the northern
parts. Under such conditions sensitivity becomes high. The soils occupy an area of about 24.4 km2. Due
to the higher extent of weathering on the red clay soils, the cation exchange capacities of soils in this unit
is relatively lower than those of the Siallitic Group. Thus, these soils would not be suitable as lining
material.

Photo 16: Land use on red clays

(a) Maize on 3 ha plot at Mr Huchi's farm [36k 236280mE; 8017759mN]; (b) Housing complex near former College of Rural
Education (CREDO-Project) [36K 235463mE; 8026546mN; 1369 m asl]; (c) Soil profile at the trial open-pit [36K 233637mE
8022843mN; 1353 m asl]; (d) Shallow soil depths near and around mountains [36K 233731ME; 8025805mN; 1340 m asl]
Sandy loams (Fersiallitic Group)

The brown sandy loams are under open grassland and cropland as shown on Photo 17a and b to the
west-central parts of the mine lease area, in contact with the edges of the proposed infrastructure site.
These soils could have been derived from arenaceous metasediments that generally mark the boundary
of the Great Dyke. They cover an area of about 6.8 km2 stretching towards the Manyame River. The
area is given a high sensitivity status with respect to its poor pollutants retention capacity.

Photo 17: Land use on sandy loams

(a) Maize and round-nut field on dark greyish brown sandy soil; (b) and sampling point inside a sugar-bean field [36K
0230933mE; 8022966 mN; 1327 m asl] at Mr Kaswa's farm.
Soil Analysis Results

The results of soil analysis are given in Tables E1 to E5 as Appendix E. The particle size distribution
and texture of the soils (Table E1) confirmed the field observations discussed above. Soil salinity
(electrical conductivity <4000 µS/cm) and soil acidity (pH 5.4-7.9) were within acceptable limits. Please
refer to Table E2 of Appendix E. The proportions of basic cautions (Ca, Mg, Na and K) did not reflect
considerable nutritional imbalances, typical of soils along the Great Dyke. A lower Ca/Mg molar ratio
was found on only one location on the south eastern part of the mining claim, and this area was on red
clay soil under cropping. The remaining areas had substantial amounts of Mg, but the Ca levels were
generally sufficient to sustain average soil productivity.
With the exception of Drummond Hunyani Farm (Pvt) Ltd, there was no evidence that famers conditioned
their soils through the use of lime and gypsum to correct for low Ca in soil. This was also confirmed by
the AGRITEX Crop and Livestock Assessment Reports for the cropping seasons 2013/2014 and
2014/2015 in Wards 13 and 14. The condition of the natural vegetation and crops growing within the
sampled sites also supports that Ca deficiency is not a significant problem in the area.
The relative topsoil enrichment indices suggest no anthropogenic heavy metal contamination at the
project site as shown in Table E3 of Appendix E. However, background concentrations of Cr and Ni were
of concern in relation to other international standards. Total Ni limit in soil has not yet been stipulated in
Zimbabwe but elsewhere, the limits are as follows: 30-75 mg/kg (European Union standards); up to 110
mg/kg (United Kingdom) and 210 mg/kg (United States Environmental Protection Agency). Total Cr
permissible limits are also not set Zimbabwe but the international permissible limit is up to 400 mg/kg.
Twelve of the sampled points in the project area had between 400 and 1914 mg/kg of Cr, and 18 of the
samples had between 110 and 373 mg/kg of Ni. The potential implication of high background
concentrations of Cr and Ni in the soil is water contamination following the disturbance of such soils
through excavation or mechanical inversion and vegetation removal resulting in increased soil erosion. It
is therefore important to ensure that soil disturbance is kept at a minimum.

The cation exchange capacity of the soils were largely medium to high according to Landon (1991)'s
classification of tropical soils, hence medium to high pollutants retention potential as shown in Table E4
of Appendix E. Soil organic carbon was medium (1.2-2.3%) hence the contribution of organic matter to
pollutants retention in these soils may not be significant. Results of the exchangeable sodium percentage
(ESP) showed no evidence of sodium hazard, as also supported by pH which was less than 8.5 as in
Table E of Appendix E. Soil bulk density ranged from 1450 to 1630 kg/m3, and the upper values are
somewhat high for such soils indicating possible physical disturbance through compaction by traction,
especially under cropland.
6.1.6 Current Land Use

The current land use consists of agriculture, mining, recreation (including fisheries); natural woodland
and open natural grassland and seasonal wetlands and civil structures (buildings and civil structures)
The major managed land use categories noted within the project claim area and its immediate
surroundings were: agriculture, mining, settlements, recreation (including fisheries) and civil structures,
see section earlier sections on current infrastructure.
Natural/unmanaged land use categories comprised of the natural woodland, open grassland (not grazed)
and the seasonal wetlands.
Agriculture
Agriculture activities for most of the farmers is rain-fed and to some extent, irrigated cropping and to a
lesser extent livestock rearing, cattle, goats and chicken production, please see Photo 18 (a) to (f).
Cultivated land was noted on 27 land units covering a total area of less than 750,000 m 2, which is
considerably small compared to cultivated area in the immediate surroundings outside the mine lease
area. The Agritex Crop and Livestock Assessment Reports for the cropping seasons 2013/2014 and
2014/2015 for Wards 13 and 14 showed very small areas planted by farmers, which ranged between 0.2
to 7 hectares per farm, with an average area of 0.5ha under maize and less than 0.2 ha under crops such
as groundnut, sweet potatoes, sugar bean and cowpea. However, Mr Drummond, a large scale
commercial farmer and director of Hunyani Estate Farm had more than 200 ha of land under irrigated
maize as shown on Photo 18a below.

Photo 18: Agricultural activities

(a) Hunyani Estate 3B (Mr Drummond) Farm with maize crop under centre pivot irrigation [36K 235769mE; 8022757mN]; (b)
A healthy maize crop maize field at Mr Chimuka's farm [36 K 233599mE; 8025919mN; 1324 m asl]; (c) Maize crop further
south of (b) [no coordinates]; (d) Goats farming, about 900 m from the mining claim in the west-east direction [36K 232496mE;
8025208mN]; (e) Cattle farming, at Mr Huchi's A2 farm homestead [36K 236280mE; 8017759mN]; (f) View of the proposed
infrastructure site with grazing cattle, taken from the top of the rock waste dump created by the trial opencast mining [36K
233301mE; 8023107mN]
Based on site observations, most A1 farm land is occupied by subsistent farmers who practice mixed
farming namely maize cropping, groundnuts, nyimo (round nuts), and sweet potatoes; usually own a
small herd of cattle up to ten, small livestock consisting of goats, sheep and poultry. A2 farmers practice
almost the same type of agriculture except on a larger scale, A2 farms range from 30 to 35 hectares.
Previously A2 farmers in Ward 13 used to get between five and 30 tonnes of maize, but have been getting
much less in the 2013 to 2015 seasons due to financial constraints and inability to purchase inputs. Mrs.
Marimo, an A2 farmer and widow is into cattle ranching; Dr. Obadiah Moyo another A2 farmer is into

mixed farming consisting, cattle, goats rearing, maize and wheat growing, whilst Mr Rembo has a well-
established piggery. Another A2 farmer, Nancy, stated that she and her husband have been at Hunyani
Estate B for two seasons and grew tomatoes and cabbage and was earning approximately US$9 000
per week from the sale of tomatoes and vegetables.
Rothwell farm a Catholic owned commercial farm specialising in cattle ranching has over 500 cattle,
Diana another commercial farm practicing mixed farming grows maize, tobacco and cattle.
Mining
Apart from the trial open pit from which a bulk sample was collected by GDI, no other mining activity was
cited within the project claim area. However within the immediate surroundings there are disused chrome
pits and piles of waste rock, including one open pit which is said to have been mined by a Chinese
Company please refer to Photo 19.
Photo 19: Mining activities

(a) Excavation machinery for opencast mining by a Chinese mining company about 380 m north of the proposed infrastructure
area [36K 232427mE; 8024396mN; 1322 m asl]; (b) Fresh open pit by the same Chinese company [36K 232384mE;
8024443mN; 1317 m asl]; (c) disused fresh open pit approximately 500m long, 25 m deep and 80 m wide, located inside the
proposed infrastructure area [36K 232571mE; 8021949mN; 1329 m asl] (d) Rock waste dump inside Mr Mushangwe's A2
farm located 440 m north of the proposed infrastructure area [36K 232443mE; 8024482mN; 1321 m asl]
Lake Manyame Recreational Park

The Lake Manyame Recreational Park covers an area of 11 200 hectares (of which 8 100ha is occupied
by Lake Manyame Dam), which is managed by the Zimbabwe Parks and Wildlife Management Authority.

Approximately, 2.6 km2 of the mine claim area overlaps into the Manyame Recreational Park, please
refer to Image 6 below. To the north east of the mine lease area (the portion where it overlaps into the
Parks area) the National Parks and Wild Life Authority, have leased this land to the Zimbabwe Republic
Police (ZRP) and Zimbabwe Revenue Authority (ZIMRA) in accordance to section 42, of the Parks and
Wildlife Act which permits the Ministry to designate, on recommendation by the Parks and Wildlife
Authority, any area or area of land which may be alienated or leased for the erection of hotels, restaurants,
rest camps, caravan parks, camping grounds, shops, service stations and other buildings and facilities
for the accommodation, recreation, enjoyment or convenience of visitors or for such other purpose as he
deems fit and may in like manner revoke such designation (Tafangenyasha and Kavhu, 2015). Both
ZIMRA and ZRP propose to construct training schools. Please refer to Image 6 below. Both the ZRP
and the ZIMRA sites are also inside the Ramsar site boundary (refer to biophysical section for details on
the Ramsar site).
Image 6: Boundary overlap between the mining lease area and Manyame Recreational Park
Natural woodlands and open grasslands

This land use consists of open grassland, located within a small valley within the mine lease area;
woodland area along the mountain ranges. A detailed discussed on the natural vegetation and habituated
is given in the discussion on the biophysical environment.
Built structures
Farmers and ZIPAM staff's houses – Using Google Earth (2016), a minimum of 32 structures inside the
mine lease area were noted. The structures comprised; mostly of built houses and temporary shelters at
farms, clusters of staff quarters, please refer to Photos 20 and 21.

Photo 20: Built structures within the mine lease area

(a) Settlements in the proposed location of the tailings storage facility [36K 232009mE; 8022893mN; 1327 m asl]; (b)Mr
Matibiri's homestead near the peg marking the border between the mining claim and the infrastructure lease area [36K
232658mE; 8021920mN; 1332 m asl]; (c) ZINWA water reservoirs and a power station for the ZIPAM staff housing complex
[36K 235503mE; 8025689mN; 1385 m asl] (d) ZIPAM staff housing complex, surrounding red clay soil was considerably
disturbed due to construction activities at the site [36K 235486mE; 8025974mN; 1381 m asl]

Photo 21: Built structures within the mine lease area

(a) An abandoned lectures building, and (b) other buildings at the former CREDO-Project site [36K 235461mE; 8026681mN;
1374 m asl]; (c) ZIPAM dining hall within a building complex at ZIPAM [36K 235932mE; 8025939mN; 1353 m asl];
(d)Homestead at Mr Mubaiwa's farm [36K 232381mE; 8019515mN; 1349 m asl]
Lake Manyame Park (LMP) residential stands and partly constructed houses – the LMP residential area
comprises of 70 land sub-divisions covering a total area of 0.426 km2 to the eastern part of the mine
lease area, please refer to Figure 25 below. The permit to subdivide the land was given to Drummond
Hunyani Farm (Pvt) Ltd under permit No. MM/6/93 by the Ministry of Local Government, Rural and Urban
Development. The stands are at different stages of development ranging from completed houses to
undeveloped stands. The stands are within the GDI claim area, and the proposed underground main
conveyor from Portal 4, falls right below these residential stands.

Figure 25: Sub-division of Hunyani Estate 3B into residential stands
6.1.7 Vegetation / Flora

The natural vegetation of the project site and adjacent area is broadly classified as a deciduous miombo
savanna woodland characterised by Brachystegia spiciformis (musasa) and Julbernardia globiflora
(munondo) trees (Wild and Fernandes, 1967) on stoney red-brown loamy clay soils. This vegetation type
is widespread on the Mashonaland Plateau but has been extensively modified through clearing of fields
for agriculture, timber extraction for construction and firewood, and frequent hot fires. For much of the
project area, the taller B.spiciformis trees are now reduced in number and there is a fairly dense regrowth
of the faster growing and more resilient J.globiflora, indicating a history of human impact. The regular
and severe burning of the vegetation is very clear on the satellite imagery which indicates that most of
the area burns every year.
A total of 14 vegetation plots were sampled which were classified into 6 vegetation types, please see
Map 6.

Map 6: Vegetation map of claim area
Woodland types
 Brachystegia boehmii – Julbernardia globiflora woodland, sometimes with B.spiciformis. This
type is found on the red brown fersiallitic soils derived from gabbro norite and occurs on the top
of the catena with level terrain at an altitude of 1350-1380m. Grass and herbaceous cover is
fairly sparse and a mixture of annual and perennial species. There is evidence of hot fires and
tree cutting in most of the woodlands. Please see Photo 22;
 B. glaucescens woodland occurs in a narrow strip on the northern and north western edge of the
Dyke where there are large rocks and the terrain is steeper. This type grades into a Kirkia

acuminata – Afzelia quanzensis mixed woodland on the steep slopes. The trees are tall: 8-10m.
Please see Photo 23;
 Ecotonal mixed woodland is found in a narrow band on the lower slopes of the catena at the
base of the ridges. Altitude range is 1330m. The grass cover is denser with several perennial
species. The tree species found here are a combination of the Brachystegia and Julbernardia
types from the upper sections and those pioneer species on the lower sections which are adapted
to heavier soils and frequent hot fires, e.g. Acacia polycantha;
 Riparian woodland and thicket is characterised by Rhus lancea, Euclea divinorum, E.crispa and
Freisoldelsia obovata. Grass cover is very sparse. This type forms a narrow but dense band
along the perennial Manyame River,in the north, and a more open strip along the seasonally
flowing Makwiro River in the south. Altitude 1320-1340m. Please refer to Photos 24 and 25.
Grassland types
 Drainage line edaphic grassland on the upper ridges. The grass sward is dense, up to 1m high,
dominated by Andropogon gayanus and Setaria sphacelata with some Ischaemum afrum and
Cymbopogon caesius. There are occasional Acacia polycantha and A. karoo trees whose corky,
flaking bark protects them from fire. The soils are black self-churning clays (vertisols) and the
grasslands are seasonally inundated as the clay swells and forms a seal which prevent the
penetration of rainwater into the lower layers and the soil surface becomes waterlogged. Altitude:
1380m. Please refer to Photo 26.
 Open edaphic Andropogon grassland on vertisols derived from ultra-mafic rocks with occasional
Combretum hereroense, Bolusanthus speciosus and Flueggea virosa shrubs/ small trees. The
self-churning nature of the soil has a root pruning effect and only those tree species that can
withstand this pruning and seasonal waterlogging can survive. The grasses are hardy perennials,
high in silica and of fairly poor grazing value.
This grassland occurs in a broad band to the west of the norite ridges. The topography is level with a
slight drainage to the north and west towards the Manyame River and south to the Makwiro/Serui rivers.
This vegetation type has been highly disturbed through open cast chrome mining and agriculture. An
area of intensive irrigated maize was noted on the eastern side of the ridge, on the shores of Lake
Manyame.

Photo 22: Brachystegia – Julbernardia woodland on red fersiallitic soils on top of ridge.
Photo 23: Mixed woodland on edges of ridge. Tall trees in background are B.glaucescens.
Photo 24: Manyame River looking downstream from current road bridge.
Note riparian fringing woodland. The green colour in the water is caused by blue green algae (Microcystis aeruginosa)
which favours eutrophic conditions (high levels of nitrogen, phosphates etc.).

Photo 25: Riparian woodland and thicket fringing the Makwiro river in south of claim area.
The river was dry at the time of survey
Photo 26: Open Andropogon-Setaria grassland with scattered Acacia polycantha trees on black vertisols.
Note dead branches killed by fires.
Vegetation field data sheets are included in Appendix H

Specially Protected Plants and Endemic Species

The Seventh Schedule, Parks and Wildlife Act, 20:14 lists Specially Protected Plants which include all
species of aloes and epiphytic orchids, some of which are known to occur in the area. These plants will
require a careful mitigation measures should this area be disturbed by mining operations.
The Great Dyke is a unique geological feature that is divided into two sections by a large norite intrusion
extending from Norton to the Ngezi River, with exposures of the underlying serpentinite rocks along the
lower slopes of the Dyke and in the northern and southern sections. The Dyke supports over 20 endemic
plant species (Mapaure, 2002) whose distribution varies with the level of exposure of the underlying ultra-
mafic rocks, particularly serpentinite. Serpentine soils have a high exchangeable magnesium to calcium
ratio and often high nickel and chromium, creating extreme conditions for plant growth and thus driving
endemicity.
A significant population (at least 150 individuals) of Aloe excelsa was found growing amongst the rocks
on the hills above the Manyame River. Refer to Photo 27. This is the same site as the stone walling
reported in the heritage section.
Photo 27: Aloe excelsa colony growing in the northern hills of the project area
(Note stone walling of heritage site)
A large clump of an epiphytic orchid, Ansellia africana was found growing on a Brachystegia spiciformis
tree near 0234688S 8025480E , shown on Photo 28, and two epiphytic orchid species (Aerangis
verdickii.and Tridactyle tridentata) at 0234769S 8024654E, also in a B.spiciformis tree shown on Photos
29 and 30.

Photo 28: Ansellia africana epiphytic orchid
Photo 29: Aerangis verdickii

Photo 30: Tridactyle tridentata
Although Chapano (ASCON, 2011) reported four endemic plant species in his survey (Gnidia capitata,
Indigofera serpentinicola, Ozoroa longepetiolata and Dicoma niccolifera), none were found during the
current survey. This may have been due to the drought conditions prevailing at the time of this survey
as all but the Ozoroa are small plants that may have dried out and were therefore not noticeable.
Alien invasive Plants

Parts of the study area have been disturbed through roads, mining, and housing developments and as a
result there are numerous common weedy species present, particularly in the agricultural areas.
Significant species are the noxious weeds (FIFTH SCHEDULE (Sections 72 and 118) of the
Environmental Management Act) Lantana camara, which was found in the moister areas around Zipam
and the adjacent houses, and in the riparian thickets and Eichhornia crassipes (water hyacinth) which
was noted on the Lake Manyame shoreline and in the river.
The lake and the river were a bright green colour caused by a bloom of the blue-green algae, Microcystis
aeruginosa, which proliferates under hot weather and in water that is high in nitrogen, phosphates and
other chemicals.
6.1.8 Birds/Avifauna
Elsewhere in the region well developed miombo woodlands carry an assemblage of habitat-restricted
bird species such as Miombo Rock Thrush, Spotted Creeper, Rufous bellied Tit, Mashona Hyliota and
Whyte’s Barbet. Bird Life Zimbabwe’s records show over 400 bird species being recorded in the Lake
Chivero-Manyame area (Riddell, 2013). None of these special miombo bird species were noted during
this survey which is partly due to the level of degradation of the woodlands and to the hot dry weather
conditions that affected the birds’ activities, making them less visible and less vocal. A total of 91 bird

species were recorded on the study site from 8 - 11 February 2016 (wet season) and 73 species on 14
May 2016 (beginning of the dry season). Please refer to Table 17 below
Table 17: Number of Bird Species recorded in three habitat types
Vegetation / Habitat type No. of Species: 8-11 No. of Species 14

February 2016 May 2016
Woodland 50 31
Riparian thicket and woodland 10 7
Shrubland /Grassland 24 19
Dam/river 7 16
Total 91 73
Source: Black Crystal Consulting Ecologist on site observations
A full list of species recorded for both wet and dry season is given in Appendix I
Of significance are the sightings of an active Fish Eagle nest in the central woodlands on top of the ridge.
Please see Photos 31 and 32.

Photo 31: Fish Eagle

(Nest at 0234769S 8024654E on central road on top of ridge)
Arrow indicates nest.
Photo 32: Adult Fish Eagle incubating eggs.
And other significant sightings were:

 A pair of Fish Eagles in the tall B.glaucescens trees above the Manyame River at 0234209S,
8026665E. Although no nest was found, their behaviour suggests that these birds are likely to be
nesting in this area;
 A Black Coucal in the seasonally wet grassland near the bulk sample pit at 0233675S, 8022792E.
This species is a scarce localised altitudinal migrant, moving from the lowveld to the higher altitudes
to breed during the rainy season. It is classified as Near Threatened (IUCN criteria) (Roberts VII,
2013);
 Two White backed Vultures were seen flying overhead, heading southeast. All vultures are Specially
Protected Species and this species is now listed as Endangered (IUCN). Given the great distances
that these birds cover, it is very unlikely that they are resident in the study area. But developments
such as transmission lines pose a threat as vultures and other large birds can collide with the lines
(www.ewt.org.za).

The BirdLife Zimbabwe Waterbird Census in 2014 and 2015 recorded the following numbers of birds on
the shoreline of Lake Manyame. Please refer to Table 18 below.
Table 18: Baseline data for waterbird numbers on Lake Manyame

(Courtesy of I. Riddell, BirdLife Zimbabwe)
2014/2015
Highest
Waterbird Species Count Status
African Black Duck Anas sparsa 2 common
African Fish-eagle Haliaeetus vocifer 20 common
African Jacana Actophilornis africanus 250 abundant
African Openbill Anastomus lamelligerus 31 common NT
African Purple Swamphen Porphyrio madagascariensis 21 frequent
African Rail Rallus caerulescens 1 frequent
African Sacred Ibis Threskiornis aethiopicus 40 abundant
African Wattled Lapwing Vanellus senegallus 9 common
Black Crake Amaurornis flavirostra 55 common
Black Heron Egretta ardesiaca 3 uncommon declining
Black-headed Heron Ardea melanocephala 2 common
Blacksmith Lapwing Vanellus armatus 26 common
Black-winged Stilt Himantopus 1 frequent
Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis 160 very abundant
Collared Pratincole Glareola pratincola 95 frequent
Comb Duck Sarkidiornis melanotos 172 frequent but declining
Common Moorhen Gallinula chloropus 230 common
Crowned Lapwing Vanellus coronatus 15 common
Egyptian Goose Alopochen aegyptiaca 87 common
Fulvous Duck Dendrocygna bicolor 38 uncommon
Giant Kingfisher Megaceryle maximus 2 frequent
Glossy Ibis Plegadis falcinellus 66 frequent
Goliath Heron Ardea goliath 6 uncommon
Great (White) Egret Egretta alba 8 common
Great White Pelican Pelecanus onocrotalus 7 rare NT
Grey Heron Ardea cinerea 36 common
Grey-headed Gull Larus cirrocephalus 107 common
Hamerkop Scopus umbretta 1 common SPS
Hottentot Teal Anas hottentota 26 frequent
Kittlitz's Plover Charadrius pecuarius 3 frequent
Lesser Jacana Microparra capensis 1 uncommon NT
Lesser Moorhen Gallinula angulata 2 uncommon migrant
Little Egret Egretta garzetta 24 common
Little Grebe Tachybaptus ruficollis 152 common
Malachite Kingfisher Alcedo cristata 4 frequent
Osprey Pandion haliaetus 1 rare Palaeartic migrant

Pied Kingfisher Ceryle rudis 10 frequent

Purple Heron Ardea purpurea 6 frequent
Red-billed Teal Anas erythrorhyncha 150 common
Red-chested Flufftail Sarothrura rufa 1 uncommon
Red-knobbed Coot Fulica cristata 231 common
Reed Cormorant Phalacrocorax africanus 30 common declining
Rosy-throated Longclaw Macronyx ameliae 1 uncommon
Saddle-billed Stork Ephippiorhynchus senegalensis 1 uncommon NT
Southern Pochard Netta erythropthalma 8 frequent but declining
Spur-winged Goose Plectropterus gambensis 120 uncommon
Squacco Heron Ardeola ralloides 60 frequent increasing
Streaky-breasted Flufftail Sarothrura boehmi 1 uncommon declining
Three-banded Plover Charadrius tricollaris 1 common
Western Marsh-harrier Circus aeruginosus 5 rare Palaeartic migrant
Whiskered Tern Chlidonias hybridus 21 uncommon
White-backed Duck Thalassornis leuconotus 5 frequent
White-breasted Cormorant Phalacrocorax lucidus 35 common declining
White-faced Duck Dendrocygna viduata 573 common
Wood Sandpiper Tringa glareola 18 common Palaeartic migrant
Yellow-billed Egret Egretta intermedia 6 common
Yellow-throated Longclaw Macronyx croceus 6 frequent
total no. species = 57
KEY:
SPS = Specially Protected Species
NT = Near threatened
Of significance are the records of six rare or uncommon species (Great White Pelican, Lesser Jacana,
Lesser Moorhen, Osprey, Rosy throated Longclaw, Saddlebilled Stork, Western Marsh Harrier,
Whiskered Tern), four near threatened species and two Specially Protected Species (Fish Eagle and
Hammerkop). The highest numbers of individual species were White-faced Duck: 573 birds; Red knobbed
Coot: 231 birds; Common Moorhen: 230 and African Jacana: 250 birds.
6.1.9 Wildlife/Fauna
The miombo woodlands would have supported a range of larger wildlife ungulate species in the past,
including Sable Antelope, Kudu, Waterbuck and there were apparently plans to develop a private wildlife
conservation area on the Park boundary (Lake Manyame Park on the former Hunyani Estates). This
conservation area, together with similar initiatives in the surrounding farms created corridors for wildlife
movement in the district and was a potential source of income through hunting and photographic safaris.
Please refer to Table 19 below.
However increased human disturbance, fires and illegal hunting have depleted the wildlife populations
on the claim area.

Table 19: List of larger wildlife species currently occurring in study area
Species Notes / Status

Aardvark/Antbear (Hwiribidi) Old holes noted on northern ridge. No new holes. This animal is
Orycteropus afer easily snared and populations are probably minimal or non-existent.
African Civet (Jachacha) Spoor seen near Manyame Bridge. Common nocturnal omnivore.
Civettictis civetta
African Rock Python (Shato) Reported by local people. This is a Specially Protected Species.
Python sebae
Bushpig (Humba) Spoor noted in several sites in the woodlands and riparian thicket.
Potamochoerus larvatus
Chacma Baboon (Gudo) Seen and heard during field work. A generalist, opportunistic
Papio ursinus species. Can be a problem animal.
Common Duiker (Mhembwe) Seen near Aloe colony. This antelope is able to survive fairly close
Sylvicapra grimmia to settlements and houses
Epauletted Fruit Bat A single individual was discovered during the vegetation survey in
(Muremwaremwa) open shrubland/grassland just south of the railway line.
Epomophorus sp.
Impala (Mhara) Reported by GDI staff. Unlikely to occur in large numbers any more.
Aepyceros melampus
Kudu (Nhoro) Spoor of 2-3 animals seen on northern ridge. Secretive species but
Tragelaphus strepsiceros unlikely to occur in large numbers.
Porcupine (Nungu) Spoor seen in several sites. Fairly common but easily snared.
Hystrix cristata
Rock Hyrax (Mbira) Small colony of 4-6 animals on rocks downstream of Manyame
Procavia capensis Bridge
Scrub Hare (Tsuro) Reported by GDI staff.
Lepus saxatilis
Slender Mongoose (Hovo) Seen near Manyame river. Common small carnivore.
Herpestes sanguineus
Vervet Monkey (Tsoko) Seen and heard around Zipam complex. Common, opportunistic
Chlorocebus pygerythrus species. Can be a problem animal.
6.1.10 Aquatic Fauna

In 1982 Lake Chivero was reported to contain 27 species of fish (Marshall, 1982) and presumably these
would be present in Lake Manyame, although some species may have disappeared with increasing levels
of eutrophication. The lake was at one time renowned for high quality of bass fishing but these fish
populations have decreased due to extensive gill netting and pollution and little sport fishing now occurs
here.
Nile Crocodiles (Crocodylus niloticus) also occur in the lake (CFAZ, pers comm.).

6.1.11 Habitats and sensitivity

The Lake Manyame Recreational Park forms the eastern boundary of the project site. This park was
gazetted in 1975 following the construction of the dam and is part of the Parks and Wildlife Estate,
administered by the Zimbabwe Parks and Wildlife Management Authority. The water of the lake up to
the high level mark forms the major part of the park, with a small section of land extending west from the
dam wall. Please see black circle on Map 7 below. Of importance is the overlap of the claim boundary
with the western triangle of land belonging to the Recreational Park (Parks and Wildlife Estate), also refer
to the land use section.
Map 7: Location of Lake Manyame (formerly Robertson) and Lake Chivero (formerly Robert Mcllwaine)
Recreational Parks,
(Source: Surveyor General Map SE-35-5 Harare, Scale 1:250 000)
This lake, together with the upstream Lake Chivero, cover 29,260 ha and are an internationally listed
Important Bird Area (IBA) (Childes and Mundy, 2001) and a Ramsar Wetland Site
https://rsis.ramsar.org/ris/2015). Please see Figure 26 below. The two Lakes support globally significant
numbers of waterbirds and are particularly important sites for African and Palaearctic migrant waders.
Population counts of 16,000-19,000 African waders and 11,000 Palaearctic waders were reported by
Tree (1988, 1989). In recent years the numbers of some waterbird species have declined through the
escalating eutrophication of Lake Chivero from upstream pollution of the Mukuvisi and Manyame rivers
(Moyo, 1997; Tendaupenyu, 2012), although both lakes are still significant waterbird sites (Rockingham-
Gill, 2015). Increased gill netting, disturbance by fishermen and livestock and general developments on
the lake shore are also having a negative impact on the bird populations (Chiweshe and Caron, 2012).

Criteria for the designation of Wetlands of International Importance:
Group B Criteria: Sites of international importance for conserving biodiversity

 Criterion 5: A wetland should be considered internationally important if it regularly supports
20,000 or more waterbirds.
 Criterion 6: A wetland should be considered internationally important if it regularly supports 1%
of the individuals in a population of one species or subspecies of waterbird.
Figure 26: Darwendale Ramsar site (EMA, 2015)
The macro habitats in the northern section of the project site and adjacent areas are listed in Table 20
below together with an assessment of the level of disturbance or modification and the level of sensitivity
Map 8 below.
Table 20: Main habitat types and levels of modification and sensitivity
Habitat Type Level of Level of Comments/ Notes

Disturbance/Modification Sensitivity
Aquatic - lake Critical Modified. High: Ramsar Effluent discharge
Manmade lake; previously Site from Harare city into
popular bass fishing venue the Manyame river has
but now fish populations resulted in highly
are depleted although eutrophic conditions in
lake; algal bloom was

some artisanal fishing still evident (Microcystis

take place. aeruginosa).
Aquatic – Critical Modified. Natural High: aquatic River flow rate was
Manyame river river flow has been ecosystems are quite slow and algal
downstream of modified by upstream dam; highly sensitive to bloom was clearly
dam flooding and scouring of pollution and evident in the river
the river bed has been changes in flow water. Increasing
reduced; presume that a rates demands for water
minimum environmental supplies for Harare city
flow is discharged from the and large mines will
dam to maintain ecological further impact upon
functions and supply water the outflow from this
to the downstream users. dam.
Miombo Natural although there is Low: miombo These woodlands
Woodlands on evidence of tree cutting, woodlands are have the ability to
Great Dyke frequent hot fires which widespread in the regenerate if fire
has caused secondary area frequency and
regrowth so there is some intensity is reduced
level of modification. and tree cutting is very
limited.
Aloe excelsa Critical Natural. High: aloes and With much care, aloes
colonies and epiphytic orchids and orchids can be
epiphytic orchids are Specially successfully
Protected Plants transplanted
Edaphic / Modified: there has been Medium: any Construction on these
seasonally wet intensive agriculture and movement of black clay soils has to
grasslands on considerable disturbance pollutants from take into account their
the west of the from open cast chrome the mine expansive properties
Dyke. These mining operations may and the subsurface
grasslands drain enter the flow of water
north to the Manyame river.
Manyame river
Cultivated land Highly modified Low: the level of Rehabilitation of open
and open cast disturbance is too cast chrome mines is
mines great for most imperative so that
natural some of the natural
ecosystem ecosystem functions
functions to can recover.
occur.

Map 8: Habitat Sensitivity Map

Rating Notes:
(a) High: Riparian vegetation along Manyame river and Lake Manyame; Aloe colony
(b) Medium: Seasonal wetland
(c) Low: Woodlands; open grassland; cultivated land
6.1.12 Noise and Air quality

Noise measurements were taken over an average of 2 minutes per sampling point by adjusting the range
switch to correspond with the reading shown on the meter screen. Noise levels were assessed in terms
of an A-weighted decibel dB(A). The test planes were located approximately 1.5 m above the ground
and no closer than 3m to any reflecting surface (e.g., wall). In general, the noise level limit is represented
by the background or ambient noise levels that would be present in the absence of the facility or noise
source(s) under investigation. The sound level meter meets all appropriate IFC standards.
Dust

To determine particulate concentrations the masses of the filters were determined prior to sampling.
After sampling the masses of the filters and the collected airborne particulates were ascertained and the
concentration in milligrams per cubic meter calculated. Weighing of filters was done on a four decimal
point (g) analytical balance according to standard instructions.
The calibration of the pumps was checked before sampling with a bubble film calibrator (soap bubble
volume displacement method). The volume flow of each sampling pump was checked again after
sampling using the same method as prior to sampling. Only samples which had a volume flow rate within
the acceptable margin +- 5% from the calibrated flow rate, were included in the assessment. All
equipment which was used was within the accuracy range of +- 5%
The bulk of the samples were taken to the west of the proposed site, please refer to Image 7, because
this is where the mining activities are expected to have the highest impact with regards to noise and dust
on the environment. High risk receptors in the area were included. The highest population in the area is
at the ZIPAM staff compound, but due to its location relative to the proposed workings, the adverse
impacts at ZIPAM are expected to be relatively small.
Image 7: Sampling Points
Results of Air and Noise Sampling: Baseline

Table 21 shows the results for both noise and dust taken at the same points for easy reference. The
sensitive receptors in the area are generally some distance from the proposed workings. Samples were
taken at ZIPAM, being a relatively highly populated area, however due to the distance from the site and
the prevailing winds being from the Easterly (SE, NE and E), along with the dyke itself dust is unlikely to
be a concern. The samples at the gate house and the Offices are also sensitive receptors upwind and
over the dyke. Predominantly the samples were taken to the west of the dyke, with a number randomly
interspersed throughout the western area. A farm, which may be relocated, was also included in the
sensitive receptors. Due to the time of year when the samples were taken and the relatively low rainfall

experienced, the baseline dust values are higher than may be expected. There are also Zimalloys chrome
working in the area, and although these are not operating on Saturdays when the samples were taken,
the disturbed land increases the risk of wind entrainment which also adds to the high baseline dust values.
Machinery as a whole was not operational during the survey, so the noise samples give a good indication
of the baseline noise samples, this is all except for the borehole drilling which was in progress at the time
of the survey.
Table 21: Dust and Noise Survey Results
Sample # GPS co-ordinates Name Noise Dust

dB(A)
1 17o8408 S 30o5086 E ZIPAM 48.5 PM10 2.42
Total 2.85
2 17o8683 S 30o5057 E Gate House 41.7 PM10 1.04
Total 1.52
3 17o8703 S 30o5006 E Admin Office Boundary Gate 48.5 PM10 1.67
Total 3.66
4 17o8691 S 30o4865 E Open Cast pit Gate 39.4 PM10 6.57
Total 9.00
5 17o8696 S 30o4886 E Borehole (drilling in progress) 58.1 PM10 2.91
Total 7.23
6 17o8702 S 30o4862 E South Western Road 48.5 PM10 1.46
Total 2.17
7 17o8743 S 30o4847 E South Western Road 2 33.4 PM10 ND
Total 1.12
South Western Road 3 Nearer main
8 17o8794 S 30o4837 E road 48.5 PM10 ND
Total 0.95
9 17o8712 S 30o4760 E Farm house 45.8 PM10 0.88
Total 2.18
10 17o8548 S 30o4752 E Zim Alloys claim camp 49.2 PM10 ND
Total ND
11 17o8550 S 30o4766 E chrome claim, great dyke road 48.1 PM10 ND
Total ND
12 17o8563 S 30o4806 E chrome claim, great dyke road 2 46.7 PM10 ND
Total ND
*ND – Not Detected

Results indicate that relatively high dust levels, which can largely be due to the low rains experienced
this year along with prolonged dry periods and low vegetation. The noise levels were all within those
expected and outlined in the IFC guidelines, except for where some borehole drilling activity was
underway.
The area of the proposed workings is expected to have the most adverse effects on the environment
downwind, westerly direction, when operations commence. It has been understood that high risk
receptors such as the farmhouses and dwellings are to be relocated prior to operations start-up.
Green House Gases

Whilst no measurements were completed for direct Greenhouse gases (GhGs), it is assumed that current
low traffic volumes and windy weather, CO emitted tends to get dispersed and diluted to negligible
concentrations. Vehicles are a possible source of CO. The proposed construction and mining activities
will introduce hydrocarbon combustion sources of CO and other GhGs. As such mitigation measures
need to be put in place to maintain ambient air quality within the baseline Blue Band category. Reference
should be made to the Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan, Volume II.
6.2 ARCHAEOLOGY AND CULTURAL HERITAGE ENVIRONMENT

The proposed mine project is located in the northern part of the Hartley Sub-Chamber of the Great Dyke
(Ascon Africa, 2011). Geologically there are two distinct geological components, shown on Figures 27
& 28:
 The upper sequence is composed of Gabbro-Norites. These form the central section of the
topographical feature that is the Great Dyke. In the northern section of the mining lease they
form a low ridge with many rocky outcrops and shallow red soil. In this report this is referred to
this as the central ridge. In the southern portion the ridge is more subdued. It is not as marked
a topographical feature and merges with the underlying rocks as a low, clay rich plain.
 The lower geological sequence is exposed at the margins of the Great Dyke and comprises of a
series of ultrabasic rocks and it is within these that the sought-after base metals are found. These
rocks have weathered to serpentinite and are expressed as low marginal plains.
 The geological result of weathering combined with locally impeded drainage has created sizeable
vleis that line the flanks of the Great Dyke. These plains are characterised by sticky, black “cotton
soil” that is self-churning. This natural pedological process hinders the growth of most trees and
crops, while it moves all larger stones in the soil re-accumulating them either at the surface or in
“stone lines” below the surface. There are additional smaller, similar vleis in shallow, internal
drainage basins within the central ridge. In the southern portion of the property these vleis appear
to be more extensive, marking almost the exposure of the Great Dyke with only scattered, low
outcrops of rock.
Proposed mining activities will be a combination of both opencast and shaft extraction depending on
geological constraints. Work will start in the northern section and this is the focus of this report. As the
base metal deposits are already exposed at the surface, work will begin at the northern end of the property
near the Manyame River as open cast pits.

NOTE - The nature and Precambrian age of the Great Dyke exclude any chance of fossil preservation,
hence paleontological studies are irrelevant in this assessment - this is an igneous intrusion emplaced
about 2,500 million years ago emplaced before life forms left significant and visible fossil traces.
Figure 27: Geology of the Northern Section of Mining Claim

(with additional Cultural Heritage observations)

Figure 28: Geology of the Southern Section of Mining Claim

(with additional Cultural Heritage observations)
6.3 EVALUATION
No standards of evaluation are specified in local legislation, but it is assumed that an experienced
consultant should evaluate the importance of any discovery taking into consideration site extent, integrity,
condition of artefacts and social associations. Some consultants provide personal judgements based on
experience, while others prefer a value-free quantitative approach. This latter is in line with ASAPA
approved principles.
The Box 1 below outlines the system compiled by the consultant when writing the UNISA Cultural
Resource Management Honours Course learning module. Although not intended to be deterministic, this
procedure provides a useful quantifiable approach.

The proponent must understand that some Cultural Heritage sites may be considered to be of major local
or national significance. Often these have significant intangible value. Such sites cannot be interfered
with. In Zimbabwe those sites that fall into this category where development is disallowed include:
 sacred sites associated with regional and national ritual and spirit medium activities;
 all grave sites (unless relocation is deemed completely necessary);
 know sites associated with historically significant military and civil conflict;
 any medium to large rock art site;
 all Zimbabwe-type stonewalled ruins.
Box 1: Measuring Significance
Measuring site significance

Criteria. Score one point for each of the following if true, zero if not. There are no half marks.
Integrity of site – is it intact, are materials essentially in situ?
Are there a variety of different features present?
Is there a good depth of deposit and/or amount of archaeological material present?
Is it unique or are there many examples of this type of site?
Does it have a meaningful contribution to future research?
Has it any social associations and has it been used by affected communities, now or in living
memory?
Has it potential ecotourism?
Significance. Add up the above scores and measure the significance of the site against the following:
0-1 = no significance. This category generally applied to isolates, i.e. scatters of <5 artefacts.
2 = low significance. Suggest surface collection during Phase 2 Mitigation.
3 = medium significance. Requires subsequent excavation in Phase 2 Mitigation
4-5 = high significance. Site needs thorough documentation – Phase 3 Research.
6-7 = very high significance. Site should not be developed. Preserve.
6.4 REVIEW OF PREVIOUS WORK

In comparison to many other areas in Zimbabwe, the wider catchment area of the proposed project is
fairly well documented. There have been a comparatively large number of archaeological sites reported
by employees of National Museums (Jones & Bond 1948; Jones 1949), local farmers, administrators and
interested amateurs, as well as several impact assessment reports for adjacent developments. All
provided a useful baseline understanding consulted prior to field-based investigation.
Relevant heritage impact assessments include:

 The archaeological summary in the Environmental Impact Assessment report compiled for the
prospecting stage of this project (Ascon Africa, 2011). It is assumed that the somewhat limited
report is an executive summary of the fieldwork observations of J. Muringaniza. He found
absolutely no evidence of human habitation. However the photographs included in his report
suggest that only a small section of the greater project footprint was investigated.

 Archaeological investigations undertaken by National Museums staff and members of the

Prehistory Society in the early 1970s in the basin of the Darwendale Dam prior and during its
construction and inundation (cf. Kirkpatrick 1973; Izzett 1974; Knopf 1975; Prendergast 1975).
These reports provided a diverse record of occupation from earliest times to the colonial era. A
number of sites were excavated and the data published. The sites identified all lie east of the
proposed project in the granite plains now inundated by the Manyame Dam;
 An archaeological assessment of the margins of Great Dyke north of the Manyame River for a
proposed, but never developed, large-scale eluvial chromite extraction project (Burrett 2002).
This covers sections of the Great Dyke 30km north of the proposed project, nonetheless it
provided a good baseline for the type of sites to be expected in this project;
 The heritage pre-feasibility study of the proposed Hopewell Project in Selous (Burrett 2015) as
well as the earlier, related prospecting impact assessment report (Muringaniza 2008). These
reports cover a project in similar topographical settings but to the south of this project;
 Further afield, but still relevant, are the impact assessment reports for other Great Dyke mining
developments - Ngezi Platinum Mine (Swan 1998; Swan & Thorp 1999; Burrett 2003; Chipunza
2003; Soper 2003); and Unki Mine (Thorp 1994 & 1995).
In addition to these reports and publications, the records of the Archaeological Survey of Zimbabwe were
consulted prior to fieldwork. This facility is housed in the Museum of Human Sciences, Harare and is a
partial record of sites of Cultural Heritage that have been reported to NMMZ. The recording system is
based on the respective Zimbabwe Surveyor-General 1:50,000 topographical maps, in this case Makwiro
1730 C4 and Norton 1730 D3. Of the 91 sites reported on both maps, only one falls within the intended
project footprint. NMMZ Site Number 1730: CD: 08, grid reference TR-339-262 lies on Lazy River Farm.
Described simply as “Iron Age/Farming Community stone walling on kopje overlooking pool in the
Manyame River. No additional data is given. This is Site 8.
Figures 29, 30 and 31 uses charts to show the major cultural traditions reported to the Archaeological
Survey of Zimbabwe, separated and combined for the two maps. It must be stressed that these records
are only partial as large areas of Zimbabwe have still to be fully assessed for heritage purposes. Some
of the sites are also multiple component, i.e. is more than one archaeological phase is represented. As
such they are counted separately in these diagrams as two or more entities. What these figures provided
was a rough indication of regional trends, assisting in designing a suitable fieldwork strategy.

Figure 29: Sites reported for map Makwiro 1730 C4
Figure 30: Sites reported for map Norton 1730 D3

Figure 31: Combined value for sites reported
6.5 SITES LOCATED

Nineteen (19) hitherto unrecorded Tangible Cultural Heritage sites were recorded with one re-confirmed
adding to its understanding as a site of considerable local intangible significance. The sites confirm the
presence of this Cultural Resources in the project footprint, something wrongly denied in the 2011 report
compiled by Ascon Africa. Admittedly most of these sites have little additional cultural heritage
significance or academic value, as they are isolated scatters of material, most often disturbed by post-
depositional processes. However there are some sites that require additional attention. One in particular
(SITE 8, NMMZ Site 1730:CD:08) is considered to be of such Cultural significance, both as a historical
site as well as the living traditions associated with it and the adjacent hillside, that it is recommended that
development in this portion of the project footprint is best avoided. Please see Map 9 below that shows
the locations of the sites recorded within the Mining lease area.

Map 9; Location of cultural heritage sites and significance

The Chart, Figure 32, that follows indicated the type of sites located in the current investigation. This
differs with that shown in Figure 31. The reasons being that:
 This research was limited to the Great Dyke while the earlier charts are more widespread and
include other environments;
 The rocky exposures of the Great Dyke are totally unsuited to rock art and no sites were located,
let alone expected;
 Most Farming Community sites tend to occur away from the Great Dyke on soils better suited to
small scale, semi-subsistence agriculture;
 This report included ALL traces of past human behaviour, both isolates and sites proper 4.
Previous NMMZ records tend to be limited to major artefact accumulations, i.e. sites without
recording the diffuse material.
 This report includes living Cultural Heritage, sites of modern cultural significance that are not
previously documented in the NMMZ records such as sacred sites and graves. They are included
in this report as they are considered vital elements of the Cultural Heritage baseline. They in
particular can create major challenges for the developer coming to odds with local communities
who often view the intended development as a destructive development and a source of conflict.
Figure 32: Current investigation - sites according to archaeological period and material present
Table 22: Current investigation - archaeological period
4ISOLATE = a sparse occurrence of less than five individual artefacts or single feature without additional cultural associations
such as a stone cairn. Such a deposit indicates a short-term occupation or utilisation. Their presence are important as they
give reference to wider landscape utilisation patterns in the past. SITES are defined as more concentrated clusters of artefacts
and features left by medium to long tern human activity or habitation.

Type of Archaeological Site Number of Sites

Stone Age 14
Rock Art 0
Family Community 4
Historical 4
Table 23: Current investigation - site significance
Type of Archaeological Presence Number of Sites

Isolate (<5 places) 13
Minor or disturbed site (5=100 places) 5
Major Site (>100 places) 1
Monumental
Table 24: Current investigation - type of site
Heritage Significance Number of Sites

Very Significant 2
Medium Significance 3
Low or no significance 15
6.5.1 Sites on Map 1970 C4 Makwiro

Site 1 - Stone Age and Historical
Grid Reference - 36 K 0233056 8024356
Site Type - Minor Site
Evaluated Site Significance (see box 1) - 3
This site lies on the crest of a low hillock of Websterite (Great Dyke rock) just outside the north-western
section of project area. Please refer to Photo 33. It should not be impacted by mining if this activity is
restricted to within the Mining Lease boundary. However auxiliary activities may result in inadvertent
damaged unless the client ensures strict control over the development of infrastructure and the
movements of machinery and employees in this area. Should the proposed plant or tailings facility be
moved or extended north of the current proposed location this site will be impacted.
Multi-component site consisting of:

 An earlier, diffuse scatter of Stone Age material that is similar to that of other sites nearby. Like
them this material is of low significance as it is unlikely to be in situ having been disturbed by
post-depositional processes. It consists of chalcedony and quartz flakes and cores.

 Superimposed on this is more recent historical site, probably associated with Nineteenth Century
white hunters and prospectors such as Thomas Baines, Henry Hartley and others. Although
material remains are scarce and in themselves not conclusive, this site has been identified on
contemporary Nineteenth Century maps where it is marked. It is also similar to other well-
documented sites associated with the same individuals in the hills east of the modern settlement
of Selous. A previous name to the farm was “Selous Kop Estates”. There is a cleared track way
leading up the hill as well as a cleared area on the crest. Foreign geological specimens and what
was probably a stone flag pole base, match Baines descriptions of his camps in this area.
Without further excavations this historical conclusion cannot be confirmed hence the need for
additional work. This site should not be confused with a more recent contractor camp at the base
of the hill that is probably associated with the laying of the Zimplats water pipeline that lies nearby.
Photo 33: Site 1- Stone Age and Historical
RECOMMENDATIONS
If mining and associated activity is strictly limited to within the Mining Lease area, this site will be secure
and requires no further mitigation. However it is possible that contractors or employees will use the site
as it is an ideal camping/settlement location. This must be disallowed, the client making sure that this is
indicated to all employees and contractors in agreeing to their contractual arrangements. If the mine
plant and tailing dam is moved northward, a possibility intimated to us, or if it should be expanded at a
future date this site will fall into the project area. If this should happen a full investigation of the site is
recommended. This would include both mapping of the site and excavations and documentary research
prior to disturbance. This would be directed by NMMZ and at cost to the client.
Site 2 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233077 8023598
Site Type - isolate

The site lies in the west marginal vlei of the Great Dyke and falls on the edge of Mining Lease area and
the proposed plant. Please refer to Photo 34. The site will be destroyed in development.
Single-component site consisting of widespread scatter of chalcedony flakes and worked chunks of
pebble in an area of grey clay soil. The tools are unlikely to be in situ as site integrity will have been
destroyed by post depositional processes - self-churning soil.
Photo 34: Site 2- Stone Age
RECOMMENDATIONS
The diffuse nature of the deposit and its post-depositional disturbance means that the site is of little further
significance. It is recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 3 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233117 8024779
Site Type - isolate
This site lies on the southern base of a low hillock of Websterite just outside the north-western section of
Mining Lease area. Please refer to Photo 35. It should not be impacted by mining if this is restricted to
within this boundary. However auxiliary activities may result in inadvertent damaged. It will be impacted
should the plant be moved or expand northward.
A single-component site consisting of widespread scatter of silicified serpentinite and chalcedony flakes,
as well as worked chunks of pebble. It lies in weathered gravel colluvium at base of hillock just above
the marginal vlei clays. The tools are unlikely to be in situ as site integrity will have been destroyed by
post-depositional processes that will have removed smaller elements - surface wash in this instance.

Photo 35: Site 3 - Stone Age
RECOMMENDATIONS
The diffuse nature of the deposit and its post-depositional disturbance means that the site is of little further
Site 4 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233200 8023395
Site Type - isolate
This site lies in the west marginal vlei of the Great Dyke and falls within the Mining Lease area. It will be
destroyed in the proposed development. Please refer to Photo 36 below. Several isolated chalcedony
flakes and worked chunks of pebble in an area of dense black clay soil. The tools are unlikely to be in
situ as site integrity will have been destroyed by post-depositional processes - self-churning soil. Context
photograph is the same as for Site 2 above.
RECOMMENDATION

Isolated pieces; post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of little significance. It is
recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 5 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233285 8024987
Site Type - site by definition but in geomorphological contexts
Site lies just outside the western boundary of the Mining Lease area and is exposed in a locally deflated
area associated with old road. Please refer to Photo 37 below. The site should not be impacted by
mining if it is restricted to within its current boundary. However auxiliary activities may result in it being
inadvertently damaged. It will be impacted should the plant be moved or expand northward.
This is a single-component “site” of many stone tools. However the numerous artefacts are no longer in
human derived contexts but occur in a “stone line” - a naturally formed layer that forms in the soil profile
as a result of pedological processes. This layer appears to be fairly extensive and it is assumed that the
artefacts and other stones were derived from upslope. Artefacts noted include many flakes, cores and
worked chunks of silicified serpentinite and chalcedony. The material is not in situ but a product of post-
depositional processes – surface wash and pedological movement.
RECOMMENDATION
The disturbed, secondary nature of this deposit, a geomorphological one, means that the cultural material
is of little further significance. It is recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 6 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233312 8024245
Site Type - isolate
Site lies on the western flank of the Great Dyke in gravelly soil/colluvium derived from the weathering of
the central Gabbro-Norite ridge. Please see Photo 38 below. It is above the adjacent vlei and not in the

black clay soil. It is on the western boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be impacted with
development.
A single-component site consisting of scatter of silicified serpentinite and chalcedony flakes. The tools
are not in situ. Site integrity has been destroyed by natural post-depositional processes - surface wash,
as well as human activities involved in both the cutting of a roadway and the laying adjacent Zimplats
water pipeline.
RECOMMENDATION
The diffuse nature of the deposit and its post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of little
further significance. It is recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 7 - Middle Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233393 8023517
Site Type - minor site
Site lies on the western flank of the Great Dyke in a major embayment in the flanks of the ridge. Please
refer to Photo 39: It lies in gravelly soil/colluvium that is derived from the weathering of the central
Gabbro-Norite ridge. It is above the adjacent vlei and is not in the black clay soil. The site falls within
the Mining Lease area and will be impacted with development.
It appears to be a single-component site and consists of scatter of silicified serpentinite, halcedony, quartz
and silicified ironstone flakes, cores and pebble chunks. A classic Middle Stone Age triangular point
provides a more precise association of this assemblage. The tools probably represent a home-base
settlement – the topographical location is known to be preferred based on other work along the Great
Dyke. However the artefacts are unlikely to be in situ. Site integrity appears to have been destroyed by
post-depositional processes, in this case active surface wash in an area of shallow deposit. This natural
action will have mixed the material and selectively winnowed out smaller artefacts. Very little of academic
interest will be gained from further investigation.

Photo 39: Site 7 - Middle Stone Age
RECOMMENDATION
The shallow nature of the deposit and its post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of little
Site 8 - Farming Community/Historical Site with Contemporary Intangible Significance

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233876 80260090
Site Type - Major site (NMMZ Site 1730: CD: 08)
Evaluated Site Significance (see box 1) – 6
This site is the most significant of all of those sites located in the current investigation, lies on the NW
boundary of the Mining Lease. Please refer to Photo 40 below. It falls within the Lake Manyame (formally
Robertson) Recreational Park (ZPWMA Act 5 Schedule Part 1 Item 6) being on the remainder of the farm
Lazy River. As such it should already be fully protected by that Act, although provision is made for mining
under certain circumstances (Clause 119).
The site is located on the crest of small hillock of Websterite that looks down on the Manyame River
where a wide pool exists, known locally as Dziva raMbuya. The hill is heavily wooded, the stone walling
providing a moist ecological refuge for several plant species and protecting them from fire. A number of
impressive Aloe excelsa trees such as Kirkia acuminata are thriving, adding a natural component to the
cultural significance of the site. The site has excellent views of the fertile, cultivated Darwendale plains
of the modern Makonde District. This combination of social and natural features and its presence in a
declared recreational area all apply to the definitions of tangible and intangible significance as cited in
IFC Standard 8 and its recommendations that should limit further development.
The human-built component site consists of a large walled enclosure made from rocks collected nearby.
These have been stacked as a low wall, 1 to 1½ m high. The rough sketch map provides a plan of the
site. There are two enclosures the smaller surmounts the crest of the hillock while the larger lies below.
In the latter enclosure there are traces of typical Late Farming Community material - decorated ceramic
sherds, small rubbing stones, and old fragmented bone and animal teeth. This midden deposit suggests
that this area was residential in use. The higher has a very uneven floor and appears unsuited either to
residential use or as a livestock byre/kraal. Possibly it was used as a meeting place, a dare, or had some
other social purpose.

There are at least two external entrances to the lower enclosure, as well as several intentionally
constructed loopholes. These are window-like gaps in the wall. Their function is not known, but it is
generally assumed that they allowed for defence using old flint-lock firearms - the defenders would shoot
through the low lying narrow gap while being protected behind the wall. Interesting the upper enclosure
also has loopholes, two were identified. They look onto the lower enclosure and could be considered
internal but of what use in defence as they point into the housing area? The construction style of these
stone walls and the presence of loopholes is somewhat unusual in this part of the country. They are
better known in the Mount Darwin and Nyanga areas where they are thought to be associated with internal
dynastic feuding and defence against Portuguese aggressors and their surrogates in the 18th and 19th
Centuries (Pikirayi 1993).
Of further interest at this site was the presence of a pile of cattle bones together with a single porcupine
quill placed just below the outer wall at its highest point overlooking the pool, Dziva raMbuya. These are
the remains of a recent offering and indicate that it is part of a living Cultural Heritage. Subsequent
investigations confirmed this. Nearby and undoubtedly inseparable from a spiritualist point of view are
several natural crevices in the rocks - natural hollows between the boulders. These have further signs
of animal offerings (bones) while the local community treat the entire location with deference. This site
appears in the records of the Archaeological Survey of Zimbabwe but there was little indication of its
extent, its usual loopholes and it significant social significance to the local people. Further questioning
by the sociologist in the team, Mrs Cecelia Manyame, suggests that the site is sacred and that the area,
not just the ruin itself, is used regularly for ceremonies. The local people in the area are resentful of
outside visitors and believe that the failure of previous mining has been the direct result of disrespect to
the site and associated ancestors. By any definition, both local and international standards this site and
an appropriate buffer zone should be avoided, excluded from the intended mining operations. It is a non-
replicable heritage site, and the application of IFC Standard 8 strongly recommend against disturbance.
Historical works indicate that this area was occupied prior to colonisation by members the Nyamweda
Dynasty who had lived in the area since at least the 17th Century. Their villages existed on both sides
of the Manyame River in the Darwendale Dam catchment and further west of the Great Dyke. Maps
drawn by early traders, prospectors and hunters confirm their villages in the vicinity (Baines 1968; Selous
1970, 1972; Maund 1891). Unfortunately no names of any particular individual who lived at this site are
given. This historical distribution is confirmed by Shonaist historian Dave Beach (1980, 1994). With
alienation of the land in colonial times the original Nyamweda residents were moved elsewhere. The site
may have lost its significance during that time. Alternatively it may have remained a sacred place,
remembered in the minds of the people of a time before colonisation and reinforcing in secret their
territorial claims. With more recent resettlement post-2000 its significance has been revived. It is a Living
Cultural Heritage that we cannot ignore.
During a site visit we were told that several communities are engaged in some way with the site, possibly
competing to do so. This is not surprising as important sacred sites often have conflicting living traditions
as different groups seek to control it, limit access to others and use the site to foster their own claims. It
appears that there is a conflict centred on this site between the adherents of two local dynastic
groups/chiefdoms. On the one side the Zvimba Dynasty. At one point in the 1990s the President, RG

Mugabe, visited this site on the invitation of Chief Beperere and a spirit medium. This may have been a
means of cultural assertion - reinforcing the rights of the Gushungo clan to site and adjacent areas as
part of the process of trying to get local support for the extension of their sphere-of-influence. However,
Chief Chivero (under whom the Nyamweda Dynasty was subsumed in the colonial process) has also
been to the site where he conducted rituals as well as other activities at the nearby Chinese-operated
chromite mines. It is presumed that the bones seen at the site by the consultant may be remains of this
activity. In support of his dynastic/chiefly assertion we were advised that the site was claimed by and
said to be under the direct jurisdiction of the late Sekuru Mushore, a spirit medium who was closely
aligned with Chief Chivero. It was said to be an extension of the latter’s spiritual base at the Nharira Hills
near Lake Chivero.

Photo 40: Site 8 - Farming Community/Historical Site

(with contemporary intangible significance)

Sketch plan of Site 8
RECOMMENDATIONS
The archaeological and the associated natural and social heritage of this site are highly significant. This
site must be considered as an area of whole rather than as discrete components. It is an unusual
Nineteenth Century site that needs to be fully documented through mapping at a time and means
considered suitable by its traditional custodians as well as the legal landowner, the Zimbabwe Parks &
Wildlife Management Authority (ZPWMA). This work is best done by senior members of NMMZ, having
first sought permission and satisfied traditional and Park’s requirements. Excavation is considered
inappropriate. No development must be considered in this sector of the Mining Lease until this
investigation is complete. Following documentation, it is desirable that NMMZ independently evaluate
the purported social significance, drawing its own conclusions as to its true significance. This is within
the legal perimeters of NMMZ. Given the competing claims to the site and its intangible associations as
well as the national personalities involved, NMMZ is deemed to be the appropriate authority to make such
a decision.
Following discussions with the ZPWMA, NMMZ may consent to future development. In this case an
appropriate LETTER OF AUTHORITY for destruction may be issued should ZPWMA be agreeable.
Alternatively if evaluation of significance are upheld a PRESERVATION ORDER may be issued by
NMMZ and ZPWMA. In this case an appropriate buffer zone to protect the site and its varied but related
components will be identified by NMMZ working together with the ZPWMA and the project developer.
The sacred area would be left intact, possibly declared a National Monument as was done at the nearby,
equally contested Nharira Hills in the year 2000 (Chirikure & Pwiti 2008). This would give it additional
protected status over and above its current status in the Recreational Park.
Site 9 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0233948 8026340
Site Type - isolate

Site lies near the banks of the Manyame River on the NW flank of the Great Dyke in gravelly soil/colluvium
derived from the weathering of the central Gabbro-Norite ridge. Please refer to Photo 41 below. It falls
within the Lake Manyame (formally Robertson) Recreational Park and as such it should already be fully
protected by the ZPWMA Act, although provision is made for mining under certain circumstances.
The site is inside the boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be impacted with development. Much
of the material is exposed in the roadway and associated road cutting. Single-component site consisting
of widespread scatter of chalcedony flakes, chunks and cores. A single quartz hammerstone/grinder.
The tools are unlikely to be in situ. Site integrity has been destroyed by natural post depositional
processes, surface wash, as well as human activities - both the cutting of a roadway and the laying of the
adjacent Zimplats water pipeline.
RECOMMENDATION
Site 10 - Farming Community

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234002 8026301
Evaluated Site Significance (see box 1) - 3+
This site lies on the North West flank of the Great Dyke near Site 8 that is discussed above. Please see
Photo 42 below. It is a deflated area on a gentle slope which lies next to a boulder filled gully that drains
a clay-rich vlei. The substrate is a combination gravelly colluvium and greyish clay derived from the
weathering of the central Gabbro-Norite ridge. The site falls within the Lake Manyame (formally
Robertson) Recreational Park and as such it should already be fully protected by the ZPWMA Act,
although provision is made for mining under certain circumstances. It is within the Mining Lease area
and will be impacted with development.
It appears to be a single-component site and consists of scatter of sherds of several broken clay vessels.
Most of this was undecorated, although one small sherd with an exterior graphite burnish and the vessel

profiles suggest that it is a relatively late Farming Community site. It is thought that it is directly associated
with Site 8, being the traditional way up that would have been used by cattle and people. The old cattle
track may be the origin of the boulder filled gully - the loosened soil being washed away leaving this
feature in the landscape. The cultural material may be a deflated midden deposit created from ash and
other debris removed from Site 8 and deposited here on the cattle track. This is a traditional procedure
that helps the cattle as the ash raised by their hooves limits tick infestation once which it settles on them
as they pass.
Photo 42: Site 10 - Farming Community
RECOMMENDATION
It is recommended that this site is treated as part of Site 8 and dealt with at the same time. The final
decision regarding its significance and mitigation or preservation should be in the hands of NMMZ as
already outlined.
Site 11 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234031 8019712
Site Type - isolate
Site lies in the expansive clay-enriched plain that characterises the bulk of the surface exposure of the
Great Dyke in the central and southern portions of the Mining Lease. Please see Photo 43 below. The
ecology present at this site suggests that these are old cultivated fields. It will be destroyed in
development.
Single-component site; consisting of diffuse scatter of flakes and worked chunks of pebble of both quartz
and chalcedony. The previous cultivation and self-churning nature of the clay substrate means that it is
unlikely that the artefacts are in primary context and that site integrity has been destroyed.

Photo 43: Site 11- Stone Age
RECOMMENDATION
Site 12 - Modern Heritage

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234033 8016235
Site Type - by definition minor site
The site lies in the southern portion of the Mining Lease in an area where only limited investigations were
carried out, more to provide general comments to the project engineers rather than the ESIA report. At
a later stage the latter will be carried out more fully. Please see Photo 44 below.
At this point there are stone-lined raised mounds that cover four recent graves. One of the deceased was
buried the day before we arrived. The graves are those of the current resettlement residents. They are
legally resident and any interference with their dead would be resented.
It is surprising that these were the only graves seen during fieldwork. They are likely to occur throughout
the Mining Lease, both old graves associated with the commercial farms (owners as well as labourers,
although buried separately) as well as recent graves from those resettled on the land over the last decade.
This example is a timely reminder of what can be expected as the mine develops. The “Chance Finds
Procedure” should be consulted.

Photo 44: Site 12 - Modern Heritage
RECOMMENDATION
All graves should be avoided. If development is absolutely necessary the client must engage with the
families concerned to get their permission. Exhumation, removal elsewhere and reburial must be
overseen by NMMZ, observe all local traditions and be at the cost to the developer.
Site 13 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234460 8020302
Site Type - isolate
Site lies in an expansive sandy-clay plain developed at a point where the central Gabbro-Norite ridge is
less well exposed, forming only a low subdued rocky rise. Please refer to Photo 45 below. The present
ecology indicates that these are old cultivated fields in which the natural vegetation is regenerating. It will
be destroyed in development.
This is a single-component site consisting of diffuse scatter of chalcedony and quartz flakes and worked
chunks of pebble. The previous cultivation means that it is unlikely that the artefacts are in primary
context and that site integrity has already been destroyed.

RECOMMENDATION
Site 14 - Farming Community/Historical

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234532 8024990
Site Type - isolate
This is one of the very few sites located on the central Gabbro-Norite ridge despite intensive investigation
of this area. It is associated with one of the many low rises of exposed boulders that outcrop on the
otherwise flat surface. Please refer to Photo 46 below. The site lies within the heart of the Mining Lease
and will be destroyed with development.
Single-component site; consisting of diffuse scatter of sherds of a broken clay vessel together with a
broken lower grindstone (guyu). The absence of cultural remains suggests that this as an ephemeral
site. It may represent a refuge settlement, people staying in isolated areas during times of conflict, or it
may be the traces of the labourers employed to clear timber. The ecology of the area suggests that the
entire area was once felled and it is thought that this may have been contract work to provide firewood
for the mines. Historically this industry was a feature of the Great Dyke in the early colonial period, the
wood being dragged to the nearest railway siding for onward transport. The evidence located is too limited
to be sure of the actual origin.
Photo 46: Site 14 - Farming Community/Historical
RECOMMENDATION
The diffuse nature of the deposit and absence of archaeological deposit means that the material is of
little further significance. It is recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 15 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234586 8026976

Site Type - isolate

Site lies near the banks of the Manyame River on the northern flank of the Great Dyke. Please see Photo
47 below. The substrate consists of deep greyish clay with a gravelly component washed in from the
nearby Gabbro-Norite ridge. It falls within the Lake Manyame Recreational Park and as such it should
already be fully protected by the ZPWMA Act, although provision is made for mining under certain
circumstances. The site lies inside the boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be impacted with
development.
Single-component site consisting of a defuse scatter of chalcedony flakes, worked chunks and cores
mixed with unworked pieces of natural rock. It is possible that both derive from eluvial processes. The
material is unlikely to be in situ and site integrity has been destroyed by natural post-depositional
processes.
RECOMMENDATION
The diffuse nature of the deposit and likely post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of
Site 16 - Middle Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0234957 8027236
Site Type - isolate
Site lies on the northern flank of the Great Dyke. The substrate consists of a combination of greyish clay
and a gravelly colluvial component washed in from the nearby Gabbro-Norite ridge. Please see Photo
48 below. It falls within the Lake Manyame (formally Robertson) Recreational Park and as such it should
already be fully protected by the ZPWMA Act, although provision is made for mining under certain
circumstances. The site lies inside the boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be impacted with
development.

Single-component site consisting of a defuse scatter of chalcedony flakes and a single, classically shaped
Levallois or prepared core. The material is out of context having been thrown out when the adjacent
trench/water furrow was excavated at some time in the past. This is isolated material with no additional
cultural material noted in the sides of the trench. It is likely to be a secondary accumulation resulting from
colluvial processes. The material is not in situ and site integrity has been destroyed.
Photo 48: Site 16 - Middle Stone Age
RECOMMENDATION
The diffuse nature of the deposit and likely post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of
Site 17 - Historical
Grid Reference - 36 K 0235183 8021240
Site Type - isolate by definition
Evaluated Site Significance (see box 1) - 3+
This stone and concrete monument with a dedication on a black granite slab was erected on the south
side of the Robert Gabriel Mugabe Highway at its junction with the road to Darwendale. Please see
Photo 49 below. It lies within the Mining Lease and needs to be relocated to a new position outside of
the project footprint.

Photo 49: Site 17- Historical
RECOMMENDATION
The Memorial should be dissembled in cooperation with the local offices of the District Development
Fund, Ministry of Transport and the President’s Office. It is desirable that prior notice be given to the
President and local political activists and ministry officials are advised.
6.5.2 Sites on Map 1970 D3 Norton

Site 18 - Later Stone Age
Grid Reference - 36 K 0235358 8025492
This is one of the few sites located on the central Gabbro-Norite ridge despite intensive investigation. It
was built on one of the many low rises of exposed boulders. Please refer to Photo 50 below. It falls
within the Lake Manyame (formally Robertson) Recreational Park and as such it should already be fully
protected by the ZPWMA Act, although provision is made for mining under certain circumstances. The
site lies inside the boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be destroyed with development.
A single-component site consisting of a low circle of boulders positioned to form a semi-circular wall,
open on the north side. It resembles other known LSA sites near Lake Chivero and around Bulawayo,
although no artefacts were located in this instance. If correct the stones would have formed the base of
a shelter built of branches fixed in the boulders and then the whole structure was covered in grass. Decay
leaves only the stones. The open side faces away from the prevailing wind. Given the proximity of similar
sites it has been interpreted as such. However it but may just as easily be a modern structure, built by

children from the nearby settlement. Given the shallow deposit and complete absence of tools (an
intensive search was undertaken on two days), the consultant remains uncertain of what to make of it. It
is unlikely to yield anything further of interest.
Photo 50: Site 18 - Later Stone Age
RECOMMENDATION
In the absence of further material associated with this feature, as well as shallow, seemingly sterile
deposit it is suggested that little of further academic significance will be recovered. It is recommended
that site destruction be permitted.
Site 19 - Farming Community

Grid Reference - 36 K 0235511 8025467
Site Type - isolate
Located on a separate rock outcrop near Site 18; is a single lower grindstone (guyu) partially covered in
soil. Please see Photo 51 below. It falls within the Lake Manyame Recreational Park and as such it
should already be fully protected by the ZPWMA Act, although provision is made for mining under certain
circumstances. The site lies inside the boundary of the Mining Lease area and will be destroyed with
development.
This isolated artefact may be associated with Site 18 which is nearby. Alternatively it may be an
ephemeral Farming Community occupation as discussed for Site 14. No other material was noted in the
vicinity despite separate investigation on two days.

Photo 51: Site 19 - Farming Community
RECOMMENDATION
In the absence of further material associated with this feature it is suggested that little of further academic
significance will be recovered. It is recommended that site destruction be permitted.
Site 20 - Stone Age

Grid Reference - 36 K 0236206 8025403
Site Type - isolate
Site lies in the eastern marginal vlei of the Great Dyke. Please refer to Photo 52 below. It is in open land
adjacent to extensive irrigated cultivation. This area looks to have been cultivated in the past. It falls
within the Mining Lease area and will be destroyed in the proposed development.
A diffuse, scatter of chalcedony flakes and worked chunk of pebble in an area of grey, clay soil. The
tools are widely scattered and are unlikely to be in situ. The site integrity has probably been destroyed.

RECOMMENDATION
These are isolated pieces, while post-depositional disturbance means that the material is of little further
6.6 OBSERVATIONS SOUTHERN SECTION

Observations in the southern section were during a drive through the area to gain a general impression
so as to make relevant comments to the project engineers as to possible heritage issues. It was for
planning purposes only. Please see Photo 53 below.
Unlike the northern section the area is one of subdued topography and clay soils. As indicated these
appear to have been less preferred in the past. For this reason it is thought that cultural heritage remains
will be limited and most probably disturbed by post-depositional process - much like most of the Stone
Age sites located in the northern section of the Mining Lease.
Photo 53: Important aspects in the southern portion of the Mining Lease
A = extensive clay soils on open plains
B = old and new far homesteads
The section of country drained by the Makwiro River that was visited showed little sign of cultural heritage.
Small stony outcrops and large termiteria were investigated but nothing was seen. Unfortunately access

was not possible to the southernmost portions of the area. Judging from the map and the rather poor
Google Earth imagery for the area the incised valley of the major north-south tributary of the Serui River
south of northing 8,012,000 mN may have potential as far as having sites of interest. The relatively
steeper topography as well as presence of surface water is likely to have attracted both Stone Age and
Farming Community settlement. The low rises on the east of the Mining Lease look particularly suitable,
as is the gorge-like valley of the Serui River on the project’s southern boundary. It is desirable that a full
assessment is undertaken of this area prior to development. This additional report should be submitted
to NMMZ for further recommendations.
One matter that requires urgent consideration are graves. The southern area is characterised by many
resettlement homesteads and it is very likely that scattered throughout it will be graves. These could be
the older graves of the previous commercial farm owners, as well as separate locations for their
employees, or those of the recent farmers. Such graves do not occur as concentrated cemeteries, hence
the need for careful investigation and mapping prior to development. Site 12 is a good case in point. In
Zimbabwe grave location is considered socially inappropriate. It can only take place with the full consent
of the families and communities concerned. Generally avoidance is considered the best procedure. The
grave area and suitable buffer zone is identified, fenced off and family compensation and future access
rights granted. If development is completely unavoidable in circumstances outlined in the IFC Standard
8 Clause 12 this may be necessary but the process should be overseen by NMMZ, involve all relevant
members of the family/community as well as the ZRP. The full costs of exhumation, ceremonies and
reburial must be carried by the developer. It is important that the work is agreed and undertaken well
before mining starts and that existing communities are advised against further burial. It may be necessary
for an area to be set aside as a future cemetery to be used henceforth rather than scattered burials. In
this case the local authorities and traditional leadership need to be involved soon in the decision-making
process and it be requested that they assist in getting a designated centralised burial place identified.
They will need to advise the community that they should use it. At this stage the graves at Site 12 are
not threatened but will become an issue as the mine expands in the future.
6.7 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT
6.7.1 Demographic profile

According to the population statistics, 2012 the population for the wards within the project area was
estimated at 20 677 as highlighted in the Table 25 below:
Table 25: Population figures
Ward District Total population of Ward Population Households in

District Ward
13 Chegutu 204 245 3902 960
14 Chegutu 4 821 1 221
21 Zvimba 263 020 11955 2 926
Total All districts 467265 20 677 5 107
Source: Zimstats, 2012

 Hunyani B Estate with a total 41 A2 farmers, average farm size ranges from 30 to 35 hectares and
23 Joko families on an A2 farm that belongs to a resettled farmer with pieces of land ranging from
one to two hectares;
 Railway 26 with 71 farmers whose farm sizes range from 20 to 30 hectares;
 Stanhope with five A2 farmers three of whom are very productive, a widow Mrs Marimo specialising
in cattle ranching and some maize cropping, Dr Obadiah Moyo mixed farming cattle, goats, maize
and wheat, and Mr Rembo with a developed piggery infrastructure;
 Rothwell a Catholic owned commercial farm specialising in cattle ranching has over 500 cattle, Diana
another commercial farm practicing mixed farming grows maize, tobacco and cattle.
6.7.2 Economic activities

The main economic activities are mining and agriculture comprising mainly of crop farming and animal
husbandry. The project site falls in the revised Agro-ecological Zone IIa with a mean annual rainfall of
850 mm and a growing period length of 120-150 days for rain-fed crops (Venema, 1998); A1 and A2
farms interviewed reported that they derived income for their household needs, school fees and health
services from farming activities. However, most of these farmers indicated that they had not harvested
much in the last three years, but had enough for household consumption. There are four large scale
commercial farmers producing maize, potatoes, poultry and beef cattle. Additionally, there are four
fishing co-operatives with a total membership of 52 members that operate fishing activities from Mr Peter
Drummond’s farm. The cooperatives reported that they earned about US$1 500 from 500 to 600
kilograms of fish in winter and about US$3 000 from the same amount of fish in summer (personal
conversations, April 2016). The co-operatives pay National Parks and Wild Life Authority US$11 500 per
annum in permit fees of which US$2 825 is paid quarterly collectively.
The mining companies, such as the Chinese mining company provide local labour with employment
mainly as general hands; while skilled labour is sourced from Norton and Harare. Zimplats which was
cited as the largest mining company in the project area was reported to be giving mining tributaries to
women’s groups and to the community at Joko.
6.7.3 Shrines and Religious Places

There is a shrine in the claim area, but it was not clear who the custodian of the shrine is. It was reported
that Sekuru Mushore who was custodian of the Nharira Shrine used to visit the Shrine, and that one of
the chiefs had escorted President Mugabe to the Shrine in the GDI project area. However, no rituals had
been performed by the companies that had or were currently mining in Darwendale. Detailed discussions
of other sites of cultural heritage significance are detailed in the Cultural Heritage Report, Volume V and
section 6.2.
In terms of religion, there are members of the apostolic sects and United Methodist Church whose place
of worship is at Mr Peter Drummond’s farm. Mr Drummond reported that he had donated about 60
hectares of land for a church building and other social facilities.
The Roman Catholic Church has presence in the project catchment area with several primary and
secondary schools in Zvimba, Kutama, Chegutu and Norton.

6.7.4 Education Facilities and health facilities

Wards 13 and 14 have five primary schools each, mostly owned by the Norton-Selous Rural District
Council. Schools have enrolments ranging from 38 to 753 pupils per school (PRD, 2011a). Ward 21 also
has five primary schools with a total enrolment of 1307 pupils (PRD, 2011b). Only one secondary school
is in Ward 14.
There is one major healthcare centre; the Selous Clinic is in Ward 14. For health services surrounding
communities preferred to go to Kutama which is further than Norton, because services are said to be
better and, drugs easily available.
6.8 TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION

This section describes and examines the existing traffic and transportation and the implications of the
traffic generated by the proposed project and its potential impact on the existing road network. This
assessment has been undertaken based on:
 Observations made during a field visit to the proposed site

 Meetings with the relevant local authorities
 Data collected from the Provincial Engineer, Chinhoyi. During a three day traffic count during 6th and
10th of August 2016 at the 24.5km peg along the Norton-Murombedzi Road please refer to Figure
33 below.

Figure 33: Traffic count summary diagram

6.8.1 Current Modes of Transport

Current transport modes include: private cars, walking and bicycling. Vehicular trips on the road resulting
from the proposed project (current prospecting activities) consist of: GDI staff vehicles, private and public
vehicles.
Pedestrian trips on the existing road are made by the surrounding community including: children walking
to school, mine workers, people walking to and from the main Shurugwi highway, animal-drawn carts and
people herding livestock.
Daily volumes are estimated of traffic from the 24.5km peg along the Norton-Murombedzi road during
August 2016 are highlighted in the table below. Based on the traffic counts, most traffic occurred along
the Norton –Murombezi highway than the Darwendale road (see figure above). The average daily volume
along the Norton Murombedzi Highway was approximately 1 170 vehicles per day with light motor
vehicles accounting for the most volumes of 1 026 followed by mini incorporating volumes of
approximately 115 minii buses per day, and the remainder consisting of various other forms of
transportation. Please refer to Table 26 below.
According to the August 2016 traffic study, on average, traffic turning into the Norton-Murombezi highway
from the Darwendale road was approximately, 96 vehicles per day with over 80% of these vehicles going
toward the direction of Norton. The average volume of traffic turning into the Darwendale road from
Norton-Murombedzi was 99 vehicles per day with over 85% of them coming from the Norton direction.
The average number of vehicles turning into the Darwendale road from the Norton-Murombedzi highway
was approximately 94 vehicles per day with over 85% of these vehicles coming from the Norton direction.
Table 26: Average daily traffic volumes
Norton - Murombedzi
Transport type Average vehicles / day
Light motor vehicles 495
Mini buses 55
Buses 5
Heavy Trucks 9
Haulage Trucks 0.25
Norton – ZIPAM
Mini buses 6
Buses 0.6
Heavy Trucks 7
Haulage Trucks 0
ZIPAM-Murombedzi


Mini buses 0.75
Buses 0
Heavy Trucks 1.75
Haulage Trucks 0.5
ZIPAM – Norton
Mini buses 5
Buses 0.25
Heavy Trucks 6
Haulage Trucks 0
Murombedzi – ZIPAM
Mini buses 0.75
Buses 0
Heavy Trucks 6
Haulage Trucks 0.5
Murombedzi – Norton
Mini buses 59
Buses 5
Heavy Trucks 10
Haulage Trucks 0
In general the highest traffic volumes were recorded between 9am - 1pm and 3pm – 6pm on both the
Norton -Darwendale and the Norton Murombedzi roads. Low volumes of traffic were recorded during
the night.

6.9 PREDICTED TRIP GENERATION LEVELS

The predicted types/modes of transport and trip generation levels will change from the current levels.
Predicted modes of transport resulting from the project will include: private mine vehicles, 66 passenger
carrier buses and 15 passenger carrier buses transporting employees from the mine site to either Norton
or Harare, as employees will not be staying on site.
Once in full production the mine will remain operating on 2 shifts per day consisting of 8 hours: 7am-3pm;
3-11pm and 11-7am. The Mine will operate for 24 hours Monday to Saturday (closed on Sunday). The
employees will be transported by buses to and from the mine for each 8 hour shift.
Based on the estimated employee carrier buses, and the haulage trucks that will carry the concentrate
to South Africa following the commissioning of the process plant, the amount of traffic will increase
dramatically. Given this, the design engineers have proposed upgrade to the existing road infrastructure
refer to the project description section.
6.9.1 Road Safety Recommendations

Given the project and the anticipated increase in traffic volumes, the following road safety
recommendations are being proposed by the Provincial Engineer, Department of Road, Ministry of
Transport ad Infrastructure Development, Chinhoyi following the traffic count.
Norton-Murombedzi and Darwendale Road Intersection

Due to the high volumes of traffic encountered on the Norton-Murombedzi road, recommendations are
that the intersection with Darwendale road be upgraded so as not to obstructed flow of traffic. This will
be by widening the road section at the intersection, incorporating a turning lane which will ensure that
traffic going straight from either direction is not obstructed. In the case were mine ore is to be transported
across the Norton-Murombedzi road between the north and south sides of the mine, there will be needed
to provide for an overpass. This will ensure that mine operating traffic will not interfere with the smooth
flow of traffic in the highway and will minimize the risk of accidents occurring. Proper road markings will
be needed on the stretches leading to the intersection in order to aid motorists on which paths to follow
when approaching the intersection. This should also be done along with the installation of cats eyes along
the tracks to facilitate for night driving. Proper road signage will need to be installed on the sections
leading to the intersection in accordance to the SADC Road Traffic Signs Guidelines. It is also
recommended that tower lights be placed 500m from the intersection in all three directions to Norton,
Murombedzi and ZIPAM
Two designated bus terminuses will need to be constructed either directions of the intersection on the
Norton-Murombedzi route in order to facilitate for the commuters in dropping off passengers. Pedestrian
crossings will need to be demarcated at these bus terminuses.
Darwendale Road and Mine Entrance Intersection

Although there were low volumes of traffic encountered on the Darwendale road, there is need to widen
the intersection. This will be in anticipation of increased traffic volumes during the construction and
operational stages of the mine. Proper road markings and road signage will be needed at the intersection
in accordance to the SADC Road Traffic Signs Guidelines to aid the road users. However, according

to the DRA roads proposal, the proposed access to mining and process operations will be directly
from the Norton-Murombedzi Highway downstream of the Darwendale road turn-off, where the
upgrade will be made.
Darwendale Mine Road Network

The roads within the mine will need to be routinely graded whenever the riding surface is no longer
passable. This will aid in minimizing the risks of accidents occurring. Drainage facilities of the roads will
need to be properly maintained to ensure the roads are serviceable during the rainy season. There will
be need to water the roads at regular intervals during operating hours to ensure that dust does not rise
thereby not affecting the visibility of drivers and machine operators.
Pedestrian walk ways will need to be provided alongside all the roads within the mine. This will ensure
that pedestrians are not at risk of being run over by mine traffic. Pedestrian crossings will need to be
properly marked at the end of road sections. Speed limit signs will need to be erected along the roads to
minimize the speeds at which mine equipment and supervision vehicles move. Tower lights will need to
be installed on all roads within the mine to ensure there is proper lighting during night operations. As a
safety precaution, all road users within the mine will need to be inducted first before making access to
the road network.
These recommendations have been incorporated into the mine design.

7 ANALYSIS OF POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS

This section provides a discussion on key potential positive and negative impacts resulting from the
proposed project, in addition possible mitigation measures are provided. Mitigation measures proposed
are to ensure that adverse impacts are reduced, by either modifying aspects of the project or
compensating for the impact, where this is necessary to do so. The Environmental Management &
Monitoring Plan provides more detailed impacts and management and monitoring measures. Reference
should therefore be made to the Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan Volume II.
The impacts are classified on a relative scale as:

 Significance of impacts – the relative importance of the impacts, classified as significant, non-
significance and relative significance.
 Short term - most of the impacts during construction phase are short term i.e. for the duration of
the construction
 Long Term – the impacts extend into the operational and sometimes, decommissioning phases.
 Reversible – mitigation measures will reverse the negative impact
 Irreversible – the impacts may be permanent and not able to be mitigated against, or the
mitigation measures will not be entirely effective.
 Localised / Widespread – the impacts are felt within the project site or have a greater sphere of
influence and extend beyond the site.
Potential impacts arising from the proposed project have been identified based on:
 Observations made during a field visit by the specialists;
 Discussions on the proposed project with GDI staff and the consulting Engineers;
 Analysis of relevant documentation, reports, maps, surveys etc.
 Experience gained from undertaking ESIA of other similar projects.
7.1 PLANNING PHASE

During the planning and project design phase, the following impacts where identified and design changes
to mitigate and or manage the potential impacts where made:
7.1.1 Siting of Mining operations

Long term, irreversible, localised, significant
Mining activity and process work should be minimized as far as possible on the east facing part of the
Great Dyke where siltation or acidic runoff might find its way into Lake Manyame. Despite the high level
of pollution and eutrophication of the lake water, the declared Recreational Area and surrounding Lakes;
Manyame and Chivero is recognized as a Ramsar Wetland Site.
Mitigation measures
Mining activity should not contribute to the deterioration of water quality in the lake or downstream flow
of the Manyame River. The quality of surface waters from lake and river should therefore be monitored
regularly to be certain that this does not happen. The Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan,
Volume II, has recommendations for a monitoring schedule.

7.1.2 Location of Tailings Storage Facility

Four (4) potential sites were considered for the Tailings Storage Facility (TSF). TSF 1 was identified as
the most viable option based on the economic and environmental aspects for the development of a
tailings dam disposal facility based on the relevant ranking criteria.
The main differentiator is the significantly lower capital and also operating cost of TSF 1 due to its close
proximity to the planned plant site. It is also close to readily available sources of construction materials.
The environmental impact assessments completed to date has further confirmed that the site will not
disturb any sensitive environmental areas. All sites evaluated will however impact to some degree on
surface and subsurface water drainage and seasonal wetland areas.
Mitigation measures
SRK recommends that site TSF 1 be considered for development as the preferred 20 year LoM tailings
storage facility for the Great Dyke Mining project. Refer to the site alternatives section. The design of
the tailings dam should take cognizance of any risk related to slippage of the side walls or of a break that
may result in outflow, siltation and the surface spread of contaminated water.
7.1.3 Potential impact on Shrine and Dziva Rambuya

The impact of underground mining on the Shrine and Dziva Rambuya to the Northern part of the mine
lease area is negligible, however, the potential impact rating remains high.
Mitigation measure
Fence off the shrine and implement low impact underground blasting and drilling measures to ensure the
protection of the shrine and Dziva Rambuya.
7.1.4 Potential impact on Dam Wall

Mining activities particularly the underground blasting and mining are believed to have a potential impact
on the Dam Wall, which has a length of 1.23km and its centre only approximately 900m from the mine
lease area to the south west. .
Mitigation measure
Vibration monitoring equipment should be placed on the dam wall to monitor potential impact of mining
activities on the dam wall.
7.1.5 Destruction of sites of cultural significance

A cultural heritage study was undertaken, and identified sites of significance. The report was used by
the design engineers to avoid these sites that were highlighted in the Cultural Heritage Report.

One in particular (SITE 8, NMMZ Site 1730: CD:08) is considered to be of such Cultural significance,
both as a historical site as well as the living traditions associated with it and the adjacent hillside.
Mitigation measure
It is recommended that development in this portion of the project footprint is best avoided.
7.1.6 Destruction of Historical Site: Grid Reference - 36 K 0235183 8021240

There is a stone and concrete monument with a dedication on a black granite slab was erected on the
south side of the Robert Gabriel Mugabe Highway at its junction with the road to Darwendale. It lies
within the Mining Lease and needs to be relocated to a new position outside of the project footprint.
Mitigation measure
The memorial should be dissembled in cooperation with the local offices of the District Development
Fund, Ministry of Transport and the President’s Office. It is desirable that prior notice be given to the
President and local political activists and ministry officials are advised.
7.1.7 Water use conflict

Negative, localised, significant
Several small-scale resettlements occur adjacent to and west of the chrome mines. Most of these families
will have their livelihood disrupted by the intended plant construction and the tailings dam footprint. Some
small-scale farmers have their own boreholes for drip irrigation and stock. One of the chrome mines has
their own borehole. Many inhabitants rely on the ground water made in the deeper pits and trenches as
deep wells are not practical. It was observed that when dewatering takes place from some of the
underground excavations, discharge points do not take cognizance of the surrounding neighbours and
local flooding takes place.
Mitigation measures
Should these people be moved to facilitate the plant and tailings construction, an inventory of their water
supply and use must be considered.
7.1.8 Resettlement and compensation

During the site visits it was noted that A2 farmers, who were resettled by the Government, as part of the
Land Resettlement Programme will need to be resettled as their farms are within the proposed
infrastructure and tailings dam area. These farmers would be the first to be resettled as part of a larger
resettlement plan of resettling all those that are residing and farming within the mine lease area. Table
27 below shows the families that will be affected. .

Table 27: Land affected by the Darwendale Project
ACTUAL LAND SIZES LAND SIZE INSIDE THE MINING LEASE AREA
%LAND
SITE ID AREA Area Perim. AREA Area Perim REMARK
Mid-Point (WGS84) Mid-Point (WGS84) LOSS
(m2) (ha) (m) (m )
2 (ha) .(m)
FM1 385 847 38.585 3.20 36K 230378mE 8021878mN 115 248 11.525 2.40 36K 230556mE 8021711mN 29.9 Co-exist, pay for loss
FM2 372 588 37.259 2.60 36K 230178mE 8022500mN 42 395 4.240 1.10 36K 230547mE 8022467mN 11.4 Co-exist, pay loss
FM3 476 593 47.659 3.10 36K 230034mE 8022946mN 36 525 3.653 1.00 36K 230544mE 8022912mN 7.7 Co-exist, pay for loss
FM4 1 579 821 157.982 5.10 36K 229787mE 8023719mN 43 737 4.374 1.30 36K 230542mE 8023427mN 2.8 Co-exist, pay for loss
FM5 488 245 48.825 3.00 36K 229631mE 8024514mN 0 0.000 3.00 36K 229631mE 8024514mN 0.0 No action needed
FM8 3 710 798 371.080 8.00 36K 231097mE 8024831mN 0 0.000 8.00 36K 231097mE 8024831mN 0.0 No action needed
FM9 502 760 50.276 3.00 36K 230830mE 8023392mN 419 875 41.988 2.70 36K 230834mE 8023309mN 83.5 Relocate
1 134 Relocate
FM19 1 146 363 114.636 4.40 36K 232134mE 8020317mN 923 113.492 4.40 36K 232138mE 8020323mN 99.0

ACTUAL LAND SIZES LAND SIZE INSIDE THE MINING LEASE AREA
%LAND
SITE ID AREA Area Perim. AREA Area Perim REMARK
Mid-Point (WGS84) Mid-Point (WGS84) LOSS
(m2) (ha) (m) (m2) (ha) .(m)
FM26 711 985 71.199 4.30 36K 232665mE 8025367mN 40 248 4.025 1.00 36K 233453mE 8025195mN 5.7 Far north, no action
1 023 Relocate
FM35 1 023 102 102.310 5.10 36K 233866mE 8021065mN 102 102.310 5.10 36K 233866mE 8021065mN 100.0
1 855 Relocate
FM36 1 855 040 185.504 6.70 36K 233666mE 8020422mN 040 185.504 6.70 36K 233666mE 8020422mN 100.0
2 152 Relocate
FM37 2 155 170 215.517 8.80 36K 234163mE 8019671mN 473 215.247 8.50 36K 234166mE 8019671mN 99.9
DRUMMON 27 341 8 519 Co-exist, pay loss
D 383 2 734.138 35.00 36K 238233mE 8022238mN 595 851.960 14.00 36K 235100mE 8023329mN 31.2
2 659 ?
PARKS N/D N/D N/D N/D 127 265.913 7.40 36K 234735mE 8025994mN N/D

Mitigation measure
A detailed Resettlement Action Plan has been developed to ensure that all the affected land owners and
families are resettled and compensated equitably. Refer to the Resettlement Action Plan Report, Volume
IV.
7.1.9 Land use conflict

During the Environmental Prospectus phase, it was discovered that the mine lease area overlapped into
(a) the Manyame Recreational Park Area and (b) Mr Drummonds Manyame Park, a housing scheme.
Mitigation measure
With respect to the overlap of the mine lease area into the Lake Manyame Recreational Park, a letter
received from the Zimbabwe National Parks Authority, following written notification of the project from
Black Crystal Consulting, the Zimbabwe National Parks Authority stated that they no longer permit mining
in Park areas. Revisions made to the project meant that, no mining activities will take place within the
National Parks area. Refer to the site layout pan.
With respect to the potential land use conflict, with Land Owner, Mr Peter Drummond, GDI has entered
into discussions with Mr Drummond and an agreement has been reached that mining would go ahead
on condition he is paid surface mining rights in accordance to the Mines and Minerals Act section 12,
180, which states that the landowner or occupier in which claims are pegged retains the right to graze
stock or cultivate the land surface provided it does not interfere with proper working of the mine and that
an amount equal to 5% of any amount due shall be deducted as the cost of collection. The landowner
should prepare a grazing and cultivation scheme and submit to the mining commissioner. Section 188
gives right to landowners to substantiate and claim an appropriate sum in respect of a producing mining
location annually; the owner may also apply to the board for an income increase.
7.2 IMPACTS DURING CONTRACTOR SITE ESTABLISHMENT
7.2.1 Environmental degradation

Short term, Localised, Fairly significant
During site establishment by the contractor, contractor activities may affect the natural environment and
lead to environmental degradation.
Mitigation measures
 The planning and design of the contractor camp must ensure that there is minimal impact on the
environment and wildlife;
 Recommendations for environmental management of contractors include the following pre site
mobilization:
 Training/inducting contractor employees on the contents of the EMMP ;
 Induct contractor employees on safety, health, environment and community liaison;
 The contractors should be made aware of the monitoring and auditing of their environmental
performance and issuing of instructions for corrective actions (within the bounds of the contract
agreement);

 Environmental mitigation measures should be highlighted in the work plan produced by the
contractor on appointment so that it is clear what actions will be undertaken and when.
 No permanent structures will be permitted at the contractor’s camp.
 Set up camp where there is the least possibility of vegetation loss.
7.2.2 Pollution of natural resources from uncontained spillages

Short term, reversible, Localised, fairly significant
Potential pollution of natural resources in particular water resources from hazardous chemicals, oils etc.
from poor handling and storage
Mitigation measures
 All bitumen, oils and fuels to be stored in bunded facilities with bund wall capacity of at least 120%
that of the contained or stored material;
 Contaminated waste to be stored separately and in a secure, adequately bunded area to prevent
soil contamination and run-off.
7.2.3 Potential pollution of water courses

Short term reversible, localised, significant
Potential contamination of both seasonal and perennial water courses
Mitigation measures
 Construction workers to be provided with adequate ablution facilities.
 Ablution facilities should be at minimum, located at least 50m away from any rivers or streams.
 All structures and construction activities to be located at least 50m away from rivers or streams
7.2.4 Employment disputes

Short term, reversible, Localised, Fairly significant
There is potential of disputes over non-employment of locals
Mitigation measures
Employ as many local people as possible. There may be a limited transfer of skills and some level of
training. Negotiation with contractor for employment of locals
7.2.5 Disturbance to cultural heritage sites and loss of cultural value

Short term, reversible, Localised, Fairly significant
Potential disturbance of sites of cultural significance, and loss of cultural value during the establishment
of contractor lay down area.
Mitigation measures
GDI to encourage the Contractor to liaise with the local community and local traditional leaders on
rituals that need to be undertaken with respect to the known cultural sites and artefacts
(a) prior to the establishment of a contractor camp,
(b) Commencement of construction activities on the project site.

7.2.6 Potential dispute and possible sabotage of project

Short term, reversible, Localised, insignificant
Mitigation Measures
Public consultation process was undertaken as part of the Environmental and social impact assessment
additionally, an all-stakeholder meeting was held at the GDI office on site to inform them of the project,
therefore the potential of the community sabotaging the project is low. However if the event that this
happens, Black Crystal recommends that:
 An all stakeholder committee, which represents all concerned and interested stakeholders, through
which grievances, concerns and GDI activities will be discussed and resolved (also refer to the
Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan, Volume II).
7.2.7 Loss of aesthetic value

Long term, reversible, Localised, significant
Mitigation
 Community engagement to keep the local community informed as to the project, this may assist
with future agricultural and development planning.
 Careful reshaping or landscaping to restore its aesthetic quality.
7.3 IMPACTS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE

The section that follows discusses potential impacts anticipated during the project construction
phase.
Potential Biophysical Impacts
7.3.1 Vegetation clearing

Short term, Irreversible, Localised, Fairly significant
During the construction phase, this will necessitate the felling of some trees and shrubs.
There will be an unavoidable loss of indigenous woodlands and grassland on the claim area through the
clearing of land for mine infrastructure, roads etc. during the construction phase. As the mine expands,
this loss will continue so the impact is cumulative.
Mitigation measures: Woodlands and aloes

 As much of the woodlands should be protected as possible so that soil erosion is minimised and
rainfall infiltration and carbon sequestration is maximised. When trees are unavoidably felled,
the wood should be used for firewood but small stems and branches left to decompose and form
humus. Even with mitigation there will be a residual negative impact.

 There are several colonies of aloes around the site which may be disturbed during construction.
Inform construction workers of the importance of protection of the environment including
vegetation and wildlife habitat;
Grasslands
Although the grasslands in the vicinity of the proposed tailings dam have already been negatively affected
by the chrome mining and agriculture, there are still some areas that are still fairly intact and acting as
water filters. The edaphic grasslands on the top of the drainage lines on the ridges are also important
water filters.
Mitigation measures: Grasslands

Construct and elevate roads with culverts so that there is not a network of muddy tracks through the
grasslands, each track causing an impact by changing the micro-relief and drainage patterns in the soils.
Ensure that there is no spillage of hazardous materials that may infiltrate the grasslands and drain down
towards the river systems.
Invasive Spies
The creation of topsoil stock piles may encourage the growth of invasive species such as opuntia fulgida
and lantana camara.
Mitigation Measures
Alien vegetation growing on topsoil stockpiles must be eradicated in accordance with the requirements
of EIA and Ecosystems regulations Si 7.
7.3.2 Disturbance / Loss of Wild and Bird Life and Habitats

Direct negative impact, fairly localised, long term, Irreversible, Significant
Wildlife
The mine excavations, infrastructure and roads will cause noise and disturbance to the few remaining
wild animals in the immediate area, including the adjacent land in the Recreational Parks Estate. The
loss of habitat through clearing of vegetation and increased activity near the rivers will have a further
direct negative impact on the wildlife. This impact is long term and irreversible and cumulative. Although
the immediate impact will be localised to the mine claim area, the fragmentation of habitats and increased
disturbance will also affect the wildlife population in the Park and surrounding farming areas.
Mitigation Measures:
Code of conduct for contractors to prevent snaring of remaining smaller wild animals including birds;
destruction of bee hives; prevention of bush fires( as per the Parks and Wildlife Act).
The Mine should implement an animal rescue plan in liaison with PWMA and Veterinarians for Animal
Welfare Zimbabwe (VAWZ) to ensure the capture and translocation is done in a humane manner.

7.3.3 Impact on special or protected species

Short term, Irreversible, Localised, insignificant
There may be a loss of Aloe species, particularly the colony of A.excelsa in the northern ridge. There
may also be a loss of epiphytic orchids if the trees which they are anchored in are felled. This impact is
reversible and can be mitigated.
Mitigation measures:
 Close liaison with Parks and Wildlife Management Authority and the Aloe Society of Zimbabwe to
ensure that appropriate rescue operation is done before any clearing of land, construction etc. starts.
Carefully remove the aloes and transplant them to suitable areas elsewhere in the Recreational Park
or around the GDI office. When transplanting the aloes, mark the north on the trunk and replant the
aloe facing the same direction as its original position.
 When rescuing epiphytic orchids the plants should preferably be removed in situ on the branches
and re-located to the same position on a similar sized tree of the same species in the Recreational
Park.
7.3.4 Disturbance / Loss of Bird Life

Short term, Localised, low to moderate significance
During the baseline survey, it was established that the occurrence and frequency of birds was high
Water birds
The construction work will result in noise, dust and disturbance but this is not likely to have a significant
impact on the water birds on the shoreline of Lake Manyame as the shoreline is some distance away.
Raptor nest sites

Many raptors nest in large trees so may be directly affected by the loss of woodlands. A pair of Fish
Eagles are known to be nesting on the central road on the norite ridge (Photo 30) and another pair are
thought to be nesting near the aloe colony on the northern ridge.
Mitigation Measures
 The contractor to minimise vegetation clearing and to ensure that construction activities are
undertaken within a certain time frame that is, between 0700am and 2000 hours.
 Code of conduct for contractors must include the proviso that if an active raptor nest is discovered it
should be left undisturbed i.e. the trees not felled until the breeding cycle is complete and the chicks
have fledged and left the nest. Contact the Falconry Club of Zimbabwe for assistance and advice.
7.3.5 Contamination of surface water resources

Long term, Cumulative, low to moderate significance
Potential impacts of surface water resources in particularly Manyame River by contractor employees from
fuels, spills, oils and other hazardous waste etc.

Mitigation measures
 All site workers should be aware of the potential impacts they could cause so as to minimise any
accidental impacts.
 Any mixing of cement and other building materials should be carried out in a bunded facility away
from the rivers to reduce contamination.
 Any containers of oils, fuels or chemicals should be securely stored in bunded areas and labelled for
appropriate remediation action to be taken.
 Spoil and temporary stockpiles should be positioned well away from any drainage systems and
streams.
 Tools and equipment should not be washed in any watercourse and any wash water should not be
discharged into the stream or surface drains.
 Drip pans should be on hand to capture any substance leaking from vehicles.
 Any oil or fuel spillages should be mopped up with sand or absorbent material (but not sawdust).
 Emergency procedures and systems to be put in place for accidental spillages.
 Any contaminated water to be disposed off-site at an appropriate site.
 No illegal/uncontrolled discharge of water.
No construction water should be pumped into or allowed to flow into water bodies.
7.3.6 Surface water ingress to boreholes

Negative, significant
Potential water ingress to boreholes
Mitigation Measures
Any existing or future water or monitoring borehole should be constructed with a grouted sanitary seal to
a depth of up to six metres around the top of casing and collar to prevent the ingress of surface runoff
water to ground water, and the top of casing should rise above ground level to prevent the same.
7.3.7 Pollution of water resources from Diamond drilling

Negative, fairly significant
Diamond drilling will continue whilst the ore reserve is proved and water is used as the drilling medium
and is often contaminated by drilling additives, oils and greases.
Mitigation Measures
The drilling contractors should be aware of this and alleviate the risk of ground water contamination in a
local sense.
7.3.8 Soil erosion

Direct negative impact, fairly localised, Irreversible, fairly significant
Soil erosion due to construction activities

Soil erosion resulting from soil removal from construction activities i.e. siltation and pollution arising from
drilling, sand-bagging and concrete work
Mitigation Measures
 Ensure that all cut and fill slopes are safe and in line with slope specifications.
 Correct any causes of erosion as soon as erosion becomes evident.
 Keep the drainage ways of access routes open and functional.
 Ensure tracks to pumping sites from rivers are correctly aligned to minimise river bank erosion and
pollution with oils and fuels
Soil erosion due to construction of water pipeline

Additionally, localised soil erosion may arise from the construction of the water pipeline, as some parts
of it will be buried resulting in localised soil erosion.
Mitigation Measures
 Replace topsoil carefully and minimise mixing of sub soil
 Put barriers in place to reduce water flow such as stone barriers
 Profile and re-vegetate areas disturbed during construction.
Soil erosion due to construction of road infrastructure

Access roads will require grading so there will be some localised disturbance to the soil which may
potentially cause erosion. Erosion may also result from uncontrolled driving off existing tracks and
roads
Mitigation Measures
 Access roads to be aligned correctly and appropriate soil protection measures (correctly formed
gravelled roads with drainage, culverts and gabions) to be implemented.
 Avoid the creation of new tracks that increase erosion potential
 Construction of shortest routes as much as possible
 All access roads should be rehabilitated after use.
 Confine vehicular equipment to graded roads
7.3.9 Soil pollution and land pollution

Direct negative impact, localised, Irreversible, fairly significant
Soil pollution resulting from accidental spillages.
Mitigation Measures
 Any contaminated soil to be removed and taken off the site.
 Emergency procedures, signage and systems to be put in place for spillages
 Any use of diesel generators, fuels, lubricants etc. must be undertaken in a controlled bunded area.
 Any mixing of cement and other building materials should be carried out in a bunded facility to
reduce contamination. Any waste should be removed off site.

 All chemicals, fuel and oils etc. to be stored in secure bunded areas
7.3.10 Uncontrolled/wild fires

Direct negative impact, fairly localised, Irreversible, fairly significant
The area is already subjected to regular hot burns and this may increase with the presence of construction
camps and workers.
Mitigation Measures:
Ensure that the construction contractors abide by the mine policy and the Environmental Management
(EIA and Ecosystems Protection Regulations, SI 7 of no uncontrolled fires.
Have a fire warning and reaction team in place to manage wild fires.
7.3.11 Hunting and snaring of wildlife and destruction of bee hives

Increased numbers of construction workers on the site increases the likelihood of snaring of wildlife and
destruction of bee hives.
Mitigation Measures
Code of conduct for all mine staff and all contractors to prevent snaring of remaining smaller wild animals
including birds; destruction of bee hives.
Potential Socio-economic Impacts
7.3.12 Disturbance to local communities and employees from dust

Short term, Irreversible, Localised, Fairly Significant
During the construction phase, the movement and vibration of construction machinery (such as bull
dozers, tippers) and heavy vehicles delivering construction material are likely to increase levels of dust
and noise as well as increase public risk of accidents. This is a short term, direct impact.
Mitigation Measures
 Spray roads for dust suppression around settlements, and if considered necessary, restrict activities
generating high levels of noise to daylight hours.
 Inform the local community about the proposed construction activities (including times of blasting
activities) and direct people away from the use of paths that are in close proximity to construction
activities or heavy machinery.
 Ensure that adequate signage is provided to warn the public of any public safety risk around
construction areas.
 Plant vertiver grass along sides of the road as a barrier and to reduce dust and water flow.
 Workers to wear Personal Protective equipment i.e. dust masks if the dust exceeds prescribed
limits

 All vehicles to keep to the speed limit.

 Vehicle movements to be kept to a minimum.
Dust pollution from transporting gravel from borrow areas to the construction site
 During tipping and heaping water sprinkling will be used to suppress dust.
 Heaped quarry and other materials will be periodically dowsed with water.
7.3.13 Increase in noise levels

Short term, localised, medium significance
Movement of construction vehicles and other construction related activities will increase the current
baseline noise levels.
Mitigation Measures
For continuous exposure, i.e. for eight hours in any one-day, the sound level should not exceed 85dB
(A). For non-continuous exposure a calculated equivalent continuous sound level (Leq) should not
exceed 90dB (A). Workers should not be exposed to sound levels exceeding 90dB (A) unless they are
wearing suitable hearing protectors, which effectively reduce the sound level at the user‘s ear to, or below,
90dB (A).
If Peak noise levels exceed 90dB (A) then the wearing of suitable hearing protectors shall be Mandatory.
The Safety Officer for the Contractor shall carry out noise assessments to establish what noise levels his
workers are being exposed to. If excessive noise levels above 90dB (A) are found then the Safety Officer
shall introduce a noise control programme to protect his workers.
Consideration should always be given first to reducing the noise level at source. Examples of noise
reduction methods include;
 More efficient silencers on compressors and maintenance of exhaust systems;
 Fitting acoustic lining to machinery panels;
 Use of Acoustic screens and sheds to protect other workers;
 Using noise reduced tools;
 Sighting of noisy plant away from the workplace
 Noise levels shall be minimised by using machinery that is well serviced for noise reduction.
 Damp mechanical vibrations where practicable;
 Operation of machinery to be restricted to reasonable day hours.
The Safety Officer for the Contractor shall ensure that all the workers affected are properly trained in the
use of the Hearing Protection and that adequate supervision is provided to ensure its proper use.

7.3.14 Employee and public and safety risk

The proposed construction activities are likely to increase noise levels and the risk of accidents
associated with equipment, machinery and vehicles.
Mitigation Measures
 Inform the local community about the proposed construction activities (including times of blasting
activities) and direct people away from the use of paths that pass near construction activities or heavy
machinery;
 Ensure that adequate signage is provided to warn the public of any public safety risk around
construction areas;
 Place speed humps at critical crossing and community access points
 Place traffic warning signs and direction of flow for construction traffic;
 Educate the local community of road safety and potential traffic related hazards.
7.3.15 Employee health risks

Potential health risks to a number of employees confined in one area
Mitigation Measures
 Ensure that sufficient ablution facilities are supplied for the number of employees on site that is
at a preferred ratio of 1 toilet per 15 workers;
 Sanitation facilities should be located within 100m of any point of work;
 All temporary/portable toilets shall be secured to the ground to prevent them from being toppled
due to wind or any other cause; and should be back filled and closed off on completion;
 Entrances to toilets should be adequately screened from public view;
 Train all new employees on the contractors’ health and safety policy and site safety requirements
including managing of potential health and safety risks;
 Toilet paper and hand washing facilities to be supplied at all abolition facilities;
 Provide training to all employees regarding communicable diseases e.g. Cholera;
 Ensure that all employees are supplied with appropriate personal protective equipment
7.3.16 Dust pollution emanating from the movement of construction vehicles

Negative, short term
The movement of construction vehicles will result in an increase in dust pollution. In addition, dust
pollution from transporting of gravel from borrow areas to the construction site
Mitigation Measures
 If the dust is excessive and affecting people and other road users, then the roads can be watered to
minimise the dust.
 Plant vertiver grass along sides of the road as a barrier to and reduce dust and water flow.
 Workers to wear Personal Protective equipment i.e. dust masks if the dust exceeds prescribed limits

 All vehicles to keep to the speed limit.

 Vehicle movements to be kept to a minimum.
 During tipping and heaping water sprinkling will be used to suppress dust.
 Heaped quarry and other materials will be periodically dowsed with water.
7.3.17 Employment creation

Short term to long term, positive, very significant
During the construction phase, it is anticipated that approximately 500 will be directly and indirectly
employed. Skills in demand during the construction phase will consist of unskilled and semi-skilled
labour. These jobs will be ideal for the local community as a large number of them are unskilled and
have low or no education (refer to the socio-economic section). This is a positive short term impact.
This impact can be enhanced by

 Giving priority for employment to local community members, preference being given to women, as
much as possible, in particular those whose livelihoods is currently dependent on mining activities -
that is the Joko Community;
 Ensuring that companies sub-contracted utilise local labour as much as possible. To ensure
compliance, GDI should consider stating a clause within the contract which stipulates as that all
unskilled and semi-skilled job opportunities are to be sourced locally;
 Ensure that all sub-contractors, hire based on fair and transparent practices, giving local communities
preference;
 Ensure that positions for the unskilled and unqualified are filled by members of the local community
members, provided they meet the minimum requirements needed for those positions;
 Ensure that companies contracted by GDI comply scrupulously, at minimum, with the Zimbabwean
Labour Laws; ensuring that the contractor communities clearly to employees and that they adhere to
the rights and conditions of employees in order to avoid conflicts and labour related disputes.
7.3.18 Influx of people searching for employment

Negative, short, medium and long term
The influx of people seeking employment is a negative impact to communities, as it reduces employment
opportunities for the local communities.
Mitigation Measures
 Avoid employing foreign people for non-specialised positions that can be performed by the local
community ;
 Empower the local community to enable them to occupy semi-skilled potions and unskilled
positions;
 Contract workers should be sensitized and briefed on appropriate behaviour while working in the
project area. Contract staff should also be made aware of the local culture and values.

 Local communities and contract workers should be given information on safe sex practices. This
should be done in consultation with the local clinics and local Non-Governmental Organisations
(NGOs) involved in sexual health.
 Ensure adequate planning on the arrival of contract workers so as to mitigate the impact of a
large inflow of people all at once.
7.3.19 Promotion of commercial activities

Positive, short term to long term
Commercial activity in the project area is currently low and limited to vending and sale of fish from
Darwendale Dam. During the construction phase, with the arrival of many contractors on site, it is likely
that there will be an increase in commercial activities for the sale of bread, soft drinks and meals for
contractor employees. These activities will be a good opportunity for the emergence of small local
businesses and especially to increase commercial network onsite.
Mitigation Measures
 Allow the placement of small stalls near the site of the works, at a safe enough distance to safeguard
the security of vendors and not disturb the work activity;
 Give vending priority to local vendors as much as possible;
 Ensure that there are adequate both abolition and litter disposal facilities;
7.3.20 Employee safety risks and unfair labour practices

Contractor workers may be exposed to increased health and safety risks associated with construction
phase activities such as drilling and blasting. Contract workers are more susceptible to unfair labour
practices such as poor working conditions and salaries below minimum wage.
Mitigation Measures
 Contract workers are to undergo health and safety induction and be briefed on Darwendale Mine’s
Health & Safety Protocols.
 Contract workers must be supplied with protective clothing, which should be worn at all times while
on duty.
 Contract worker conditions of employment should be in keeping with the Labour Relations Act.
7.3.21 Disturbance/Loss of Grave Sites

Negative, significant
All graves should be avoided. If development is absolutely necessary the client must engage with the
families concerned to get their permission.
Mitigation measures

Exhumation, removal elsewhere and reburial must be overseen by NMMZ, observe all local traditions
and be at the cost to the developer.
7.3.22 Increased Traffic

Negative, Short to long tern
Construction related traffic activity is expected during the construction phase. It is estimated that
construction traffic will consist of bull dozers, trucks, excavators, and other heavy and earth moving
equipment. In addition, there will be transport related to the transportation of employees around the site.
Whilst the exact sources of construction materials (quarry, gravel, etc.) have not been confirmed, there
will also be traffic from and to these sites. In light of the anticipated construction traffic and vehicles
carrying equipment, the impact on pavement loading to the surrounding roads may, however, be
significant during the period and axle loading limits may be exceeded. Therefore construction traffic
related impacts are likely to be significant, and will affect public health and safety.
Mitigation Measures
 The area under construction should be barricaded off and appropriate signage used to warn
people around the site of any hazards;
 Contractor vehicle speed to be managed, through e.g. the construction of speed humps;
 Ensure the use of personal protective clothing to everyone around the construction site;
 Install safety measures such as reflective warning signs at reasonable distances, signals,
temporary barriers, personnel stationed for traffic control and mobility;
 Construct different paths for pedestrians and motorists.
7.4 OPERATIONAL PHASE

The following impacts have been identified for the operational phase of the project:
Potential biophysical Impacts
7.4.1 Disturbance of landscape

Long term, localised, negative significant
The construction of the mine infrastructure and tailings dam will have a direct impact on the natural beauty
of the area. Without mitigation the impact is long term and negative.
Mitigation Measures
 Stockpile top soil and use it for rehabilitation of the open pit
 Re-vegetation of exposed areas
7.4.2 Impacts on Flora

Long-term, partially Reversible, Localised, Cumulative, Significant

Invasive alien plant species

Construction of mine infrastructure and excavations will result in disturbances to the soil surface which
encourages the proliferation of weeds. There may be a loss of natural vegetation species due to
competition from alien invasive plants. This is a long term impact but reversible and if mitigated, the level
of the impact will be reduced.
Mitigation Measures
Develop a programme for the removal of Lantana and any other invasive or weedy plants from the claim
area, paying particular attention to the riparian fringes, and:
 Assess distribution of Lantana in relation to sensitive habitats, e.g. wetlands and stream banks
 prioritize sites for controlling the plants, starting at the top of the catchment and working
downstream; start controls in areas least affected first and move to the dense infestations later
 Investigate the most cost effective methods of control e.g. herbicide vs. physical removal
 Maintain regular follow up plan, checking treated sites for re-invasion
 Replace dead Lantana plants with vigorous indigenous shrubs e.g. Acacia species
 Use indigenous plants for the rehabilitation of open cast areas and disturbed ground.
7.4.3 Increase in Deforestation and land clearing

Following the first phase of construction and the displacement of some households, together with the
anticipated increase in job seekers and the local population around the mine area, there will be an
increased clearance of natural vegetation for agricultural purposes.
Mitigation Measures
As part of the mine’s social responsibility programme, local farmers should be trained in conservation
farming methods which reduces the amount of land that is cleared for agriculture. Conservation farming
focuses on the use of compost and crop residues rather than expensive inorganic fertilizers.
Encourage bee keeping to retain the remaining woodlands and to improve pollination of crops.
7.4.4 Impacts on Fauna

Long-term, partially Reversible, Localised and Widespread, Cumulative, Significant
Artificial lighting at night

External lighting is often one of the most significant factors affecting terrestrial invertebrates in the vicinity
of large-scale industrial developments. Since insects are the main food source for many bat and bird
species, lighting also affects these groups. In addition, the behaviour and migration patterns of bats and
birds can be affected by artificial lighting at night. Without mitigation these effects will be long term and
cumulative.
Mitigation Measures
Use low pressure sodium lamps instead of high pressure sodium lamps or mercury lamps. UV light should
also be kept to a minimum by fitting mercury lamps with UV filters and the brightness should be as low

as possible. Minimise the duration the lighting is used in order to provide some dark periods. Direct light
to only where it is needed and avoid upward lighting as far as possible.
7.4.5 Impacts of lighting on insect fauna

Insect vision differs from that of humans and other mammals in that most are sensitive to shorter
wavelengths (violet and ultraviolet), but cannot see red light and are less sensitive to orange and yellow;
effectively their vision spans a similar range of wavelengths, but this is shifted away from the red and
toward the blue end of the spectrum. As a result insects tend to be strongly attracted to light sources
that emit a high proportion of shorter wavelengths, and are particularly attracted to ultraviolet (UV) light,
but are not attracted to red and only slightly attracted to yellow or orange lights.
A wide range of light sources is available for exterior lighting, with mercury vapour, metal halide, halogen,
fluorescent (both conventional and compact) and sodium vapour lamps all commonly being used. Since
the spectral spread and dominant wavelengths of these different types of light vary substantially, their
resultant attractiveness to insects may be vastly different:
 Mercury vapour (MV) lamps produce a large amount of ultraviolet light and produce an overall
bluish-white light, which is very good for colour rendition (especially those with a fluorescent layer
added on the inner surface of the bulb, which helps to produce a more even spectrum). However
their light output tapers off substantially with age, and they are considered to be a significant
source of light pollution; their use for lighting will be banned in the EU in 2015. Mercury vapour
lamps are probably the strongest attractant to insects of any conventional light source, and have
historically been used in insect light traps; only ultraviolet lamps have a stronger attractiveness.
The use of mercury vapour lamps is thus strongly discouraged due to the high probability of
adverse impacts on insect populations.
 Metal halide (MH) lamps are more efficient than MV lamps and offer better colour rendition, but
also emit a significant amount of UV light which is strongly attractive to insects; their use is
therefor also not recommended.
 Halogen (HA) lamps are less efficient than either MH or MV lamps and emit UV as well as visible
light; their use is therefore not recommended.
 Conventional fluorescent (FL) and compact fluorescent (CFL) lights also produce a significant
proportion of ultraviolet light and although their fluorescent coatings transform most of this to
longer wavelengths, a substantial amount of UV is still emitted. Fluorescent lights therefore have
a fairly high attractiveness to insects, at least 1-2 orders of magnitude (in terms of numbers of
insects attracted under the same conditions) greater than that of low pressure sodium vapour
lamps. Their use outdoors is thus strongly discouraged.
 High pressure sodium vapour (HPSV) lamps produce a broader spectrum than LPSV lamps, but
although some green, blue and violet light is produced, the majority of the output is in the red,
orange and yellow region. As a result their attractiveness to insects, while far higher than that of
LPSV lamps, is only about 40% that of MV lamps (Eisenbeis 2006). HPSV lamps are thus
preferable to MV lamps, but remain far more detrimental to insect populations than LPSV lamps.
 Low pressure sodium vapour (LPSV) lamps produce a very narrow spectrum of yellow light; while
this is essentially monochromatic and thus does not allow colour discrimination, the wavelength
emitted is close to the peak sensitivity of the human eye and this, combined with an already high

output efficiency (more lumens per watt than any other source currently available) makes them
one of the most efficient light sources available, Most insects are insensitive to the wavelength
produced and the level of attractiveness of an LPSV lamp is several orders of magnitude lower
than that of an MV lamp.
From an invertebrate perspective there can be only one choice as far as external lighting is concerned:
Low Pressure Sodium Vapour has by far the lowest impact on insects and in addition is the most efficient
light source currently available, so indirect impacts (related to production of energy to power the lights)
are also reduced. A further advantage is that there is no mercury or other hazardous chemicals in the
lamp construction, so disposal of spent bulbs presents lower environmental risk than many alternative
light sources.
7.4.6 Bird Collisions with Transmission Lines

Large birds such as vultures, storks and cranes can be electrocuted if they fly too close to transmission
lines. They may also collide with the lines when flying at night or on misty and rainy days. Although the
power station is not responsible for the erection and maintenance of the transmission lines, as part of the
Mine’s environmental responsibility programme it is recommended that ZETDC report all bird mortalities
associated with the power lines to GDI and ZERA. Data to be recorded includes: date, locality (GPS),
species of bird (if unknown take photographs and contact BLZ), and numbers of fatalities. Once hotspots
for collisions are identified, ZETDC can implement a variety of techniques to reduce the bird mortalities.
ESKOM in South Africa have previously conducted a great deal of research in this field (e.g., ESKOM
2003). Further reference should be made to these studies as lesson learning points in this regards.
7.4.7 Pollution of underground water resources from mining operations and tailings dam
Medium to long term, localised, negative, significant
The tailings dam facility poses the greatest risk to groundwater quality without an effective barrier.
Surface water quality may be affected by contaminated runoff from the mining area and from
contaminated baseflow. Contamination may also result if discharge of excess water from underground
dewatering into the environment is required. However, volumes are not anticipated to be huge
(approximately 200 m3/day) therefore the need to discharge is unlikely. If the water can be discharged
free of suspended solids, the impact could be seen as potentially positive.
Mitigation measures
 The leachate from the TSF is not expected to be acidic and the compacted clay underlying the TSF
will assist in preventing contamination migration. If contaminants reach the water table these could
impact on water supplies of neighbouring users to the west.
 Install a system of monitoring boreholes at strategic positions around the project site to monitor
ground water to ensure that there is no seepage or pollution of underground water resources
 Ground water monitoring boreholes should be drilled and maintained at suitable up- and down-
gradient positions of any sewage treatment works or at future waste disposal sites

 The very numerous diamond drill holes across the mining lease are fitted with a closed PVC
standpipe and are sealed by means of a concrete cairn. Some of these structures are damaged
such that surface inflow can gain entry to ground water beneath the cairn. Many holes are blocked
due to collapse whilst others are open. A network of the latter should be identified as monitoring
boreholes and be capped and preserved as such. Other holes should be backfilled and grouted to
prevent water ingress. A number of boreholes that can be preserved across the mining lease have
been identified in the hydrological section of the report.
 The well and wet season influence at the northern extremity of the western vlei should also be
established as monitoring points as these are strategic to ensuring that no pollution from tailings dam
or plant reaches the Manyame River at the lowest point of the project area as either surface or ground
water flow.
The Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan, Volume II provides a map with recommended
ground and surface water monitoring points.
7.4.8 Potential impact on surface water resources from tailings storage and handling
Long term, cumulative, low to moderate significance
The concentrator plant is proposed to process 280,000t/month. The TOMS Institute (2015) indicated that
Darwendale ores are classified as hard ores, being highly resistant to semi-autogenous grinding (SAG)
and very highly resistant to ball milling. Synchronous motors were recommended – however these have
very high power demand. The ore will be ground to <20μm, this will produce tailing that have potential
to migrate into the environment through water and wind dispersion. Without mitigation, this impact has a
long term low moderate significance.
Mitigation Measures
 Run-off diversion measures have been included in the tailings dam design by SRK
 Gradual re-vegetation of the tailings dam;
 Ensure appropriate lining of the tailings dam (as required by the Environmental Management
Regulations SI 10, 2007),
 Establish an effective ground water monitoring and surface water sampling network to assess any
down gradient deterioration in water quality (refer to surface and underground water monitoring
Map in Appendix A of the Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan, Volume II).
 Protect all the sensitive areas and habitats
 Prevent soil erosion and sheet wash.
 Establish storm water drainage into a closed system for reuse.
 Establish emergency procedures for potential tailings dam failure.
7.4.9 Mine dewatering: pollution of underground water

Long term, regional negative, significant
Dewatering of the deeper aquifer systems as a result of the dewatering effect of the underground mining
operations
Mitigation/management

This water must remain within the closed circuit for reuse underground
Monitor ground water levels to keep a watch on the impact of the dewatering on the ground water levels.
Refer to Environmental and Management Plan.
7.4.10 Potential Acid Mine drainage from waste rock dumps

Insignificant
Much of the oxidized ore, which cannot be processed, will be left in situ whilst some may be stockpiled
for future treatment. The platinum in these areas often relate to clay complexes and the sulphide base
of the primary ore is mostly destroyed. It is the unoxidized ore that is mainly mined in bulk in the open
pits to a depth that may exceed 40 metres, in this kind of mining, waste rock is bound to be generated
and will require storage in piles prior to backfilling of open areas.
The proposed underground mining will not produce a lot of waste rock, please refer to the project
description section.
7.4.11 Blocked drains and siltation/pollution of rivers

Long term, local, negative, moderate to significant
Drains blocked with silt, refuse and other materials carried in the run off
Mitigation Measures
 Regular maintenance of road verges and clearing of ditches and culverts, site drains etc.
 Installation of silt traps (this has been include as part of the project design – refer to project description
section.
 Regular clearing of drains from litter
 Implement anti littering on site
7.4.12 Water use conflict – Pumping water from Darwendale dam

Long term, regional negative, low to moderate significance
The Manyame Dam is an International Ramsar Site and a source of water for many users including the
City of Harare. It is also currently being used by a number of other users, for fishing, recreation,
agriculture etc., there are therefore possible water use conflicts.
Mitigation measures
GDI is yet to obtain a water permit. It is assumed that this permit that will be issued will have taken into
consideration any water use conflicts that may arise.
The consultants further recommend that:
 Intake flow should be sufficient enough to maintain resource use by other users (e.g. fisheries,
irrigation, as well as environmental) particularly during the low flow months;
 Careful siting of the intake structure to avoid impingement and entrainment of fish species and
other aquatic ecology.

7.4.13 Water use conflict: Use of existing boreholes

Long term, regional negative, moderate significance
The northern section of the mining lease is effectively unpopulated and well forested, commercial farms,
housing and lodges occur on the eastern flank, especially overlooking Lake Manyame. Some farmers
have their own boreholes, but most lodges and the ZIPAM facility rely on treated water supply provided
by ZINWA from the lake with distribution from header tanks at grid reference TR355257, please see
Photo 54 below.
Photo 54: ZINWA treated water supply reservoirs to ZIPAM and adjacent lodges
Mitigation measure
These facilities should not be compromised.
7.4.14 Employment creation

Long term, positive, very significant
During the operational phase, it is anticipated that approximately 3000 people will be directly employed.
Mitigation and enhancement

 Preference for employment to be given to locals, in particular those whose livelihoods previously
depended on mining – that is the Joko Community members;

 Where possible, opportunities for employment should be given to women and vulnerable groups.
Refer to the construction section for further employment mitigation/enhancement measures.
7.4.15 Impacts on Tourism and Aesthetic Value

Long-term, partially Reversible, Localised, Cumulative, Significant
The presence of a mine will result in increased noise, dust, visual disturbance of the scenery and
increased traffic. This will lead to a decrease in the aesthetic value of an area which is currently relatively
wild, and have a negative impact on the tourist attraction of the Recreational Park. Additional impacts on
tourism are discussed under the socio-economic impact analysis.
Mitigation Measures
 Ensure buildings and other infrastructure are constructed below the tree line where possible and that
natural materials and colours are used to reduce visual impact;
 Keep lighting and noise and traffic to a minimum so the mine does not impact upon adjacent land
owners.
7.4.16 Road Traffic Safety

During the operational phase a lot of traffic will be generated from buses ferrying employees from the
mine site to either Norton or Harare. It is estimated that a further 66 buses to ferry staff from site to either
Norton or Harare and 18 private vehicles for management will be introduced.
Mitigation measures
 Ensure that all roads around the mine and leading out of the mine lease area are in a good state of
repair
 Erect road safety and speed limit signs
 Undertake road safety training for the staff, bus drivers and local community in collaboration with
the Zimbabwe Road Traffic Safety Board;
 Ensure that the bus drivers undergo defensive driving training
 Erect speed controls such as, speed humps.
 Ensure livestock movements are kept to road verges.
7.4.17 Noise from underground blasting

Long term, localised, medium insignificance
During the operational phase, there will likely be a change in the noise levels as a result of underground
blasting which will be undertaken once a day at a specific time.
Mitigation Measures
 Notify neighbours of blasting times and the necessary precautions to be undertaken.
Note:

The full Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan for the management and mitigation of the above
construction and operational impacts is presented in the Environmental Management & Monitoring
Report, Volume II of the ESIA report.

8 PROJECT DECOMMISSIONING / CLOSURE PHASE
8.1 REHABILITATION OF MINED AREAS

In terms of the rehabilitation of mined areas both the Environmental Management Act and the Mines and
Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05 and accompanying regulations (as well as the proposed amendments to the
Mines and Minerals Act) provide for the rehabilitation of mine areas by the miner as follows.
8.1.1 Removal of Buildings and Machinery

Section 267 of the Mines and Minerals Act, require, within 3 months of the cessation of mining activities
(abandonment or forfeiter) that the miner, remove, all buildings and machinery as well as beacons
belonging to them.
Section 268 of the same Act, places the onus of ensuring public health and safety on cessation of mining
activities:
‘ on or before the abandonment, forfeiture or cancellation of a registered mining location or not

later than thirty days after the posting by the mining commissioner of the notice of abandonment,
the holder of location shall fill in all shafts, open surface workings and excavations or otherwise
deal with them as permanently to ensure the safety of persons and stock’.
A detailed Closure Plan with costings will need to be developed during the mines operational phase.

9 POST EIA REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

9.1 ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS
The Environmental Management Agency shall carry out bi-annual environmental audits to ensure that
the project is being implemented in compliance with the Environmental Management Plan/Environmental
Impact Assessment and appropriate legislation and regulations.
9.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING REPORTS

The developer is legally required to submit a quarterly environmental monitoring report on any issues
raised by the Environmental Management Agency in the EIA.

10 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

According to the findings of the public consultation process, the proposed Darwendale Project is a
welcome project, whose impacts both positive and negative can be enhanced or managed with the
involvement of stakeholders. A key impact is the displacement of people which needs to be handled with
the greatest of care to ensure that affected households are compensated and resettled equitably. The
Resettlement Action Plan, Volume IV provides guidance on the process of resettlement and
compensation. Another key concern the project poses is the proximity to a recreational park and Lake
Manyame which is a RAMSAR protected site as well as a source of drinking water for Harare, Chinhoyi,
Murombedzi, Raffingora, Kutama and ZIPAM (ZINWA, 2016). It is therefore important that the project
proponent ensures that the water bodies, in particular Lake Manyame are not contaminated or affected
by the mining activities. Other negative key impacts identified include:
 Environmental degradation (vegetation clearing; erosion, landscape change etc.);

 Change in natural landscape of the area;
 Potential pollution to surface water resources (mainly from tailings and mining activities);
 Potential to compromise on the dam structure due to underground blasting activities;
 Potential to alter ground water table as a result of the underground dewatering process during mine
shaft development;
 Disturbance to birdlife and habitat (to existing tourism activities within Lake Manyame Recreational
Park);
 Potential impact on cultural heritage (19 sites have been identified during the cultural heritage
assessment);
 Potential health & safety risks (construction vehicles, traffic, construction activities, increased noise
levels);
 Increased traffic resulting in increased public health and safety risk
An Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan (EMP) to manage and monitor the negative impacts
of the proposed project has been developed and reference should be made to it by the project proponent
during the construction and operational phases of the project.
Positive impacts relating to the project include;

 Employment creation
 Local development (potential for controlled vending)
 Contribution to the local economy and national economy
 Alignment with Zimbabwe Agenda for Sustainable Socio-Economic Transformation (ZimAsset),
2013;
 Potential for technical skills transfer
It is therefore, conclusion of this Environmental impact assessment, that the negative impacts resulting
from this project can be mitigated and managed. Additionally the project is well supported by stakeholder.
The key positive impacts such as employment and skills transfer will contribute to the economic well-
being of local population as well as the Zimbabwe as a whole.

11 REFERENCES
ASCON Africa Consulting Engineers, 2011. Environmental Impact Assessment Darwendale Platinum
Project, Chegutu District. Unpublished report provided by client.
Bangira, C. (2010) Mineralogy and geochemistry of soils of ultramafic origin from the Great Dyke,
Zimbabwe and Gillespie County, Texas. PhD Thesis. Texas A & M University, Texas.
Burrett, R.S. 2002. An Archaeological Assessment of proposed chromite enriched eluvial deposits,
northern Great Dyke. Unpublished report compiled by Ove Arup Zimbabwe for Anglo-eluvials project.
Burrett, R.S. 2003. A consolidated Archaeological Impact Assessment (AIA) of Ngezi Platinum Mine.
Unpublished report compiled by Ove Arup Zimbabwe.
Burrett, R. S. 2015. Heritage pre-feasibility study for Global Platinum Resources - Hopewell project
Selous. Unpublished report compiled by Black Crystal Consulting.
Business and Biodiversity Offsets Programme (BBOP). 2012. Guidance Notes to the Standard on
Biodiversity Offsets. BBOP, Washington, D.C. http://bbop.forest-
trends.org/guidelines/Standard_Guidance_Notes.pdf (Accessed October 1, 2015)
Chipunza, K.T.; Mutsenhu,I.; Mataga,J.; Chabata,F. & Chikwanda,G. 2003. Structural & Ethno-
archaeological Documentation of Gwazana Monument – Ngezi Platinum Mine. Unpublished rreport
NMMZ.
Childes, S.L. & Mundy, P.J. (2001). Zimbabwe. Pp. 1025-1042 in L.D.C. Fishpool and M.I. Evans, eds.
Important Bird Areas in Africa and associated islands: Priority sites for conservation. Newbury and
Cambridge, UK: Pisces Publications and BirdLife International (BirdLife Conservation Series No. 11).
Cowley, A. (2013) Platinum 2013: Interim review. Johnson-Matthey Public Limited Company, England.
http://www.platinum.matthey.com/documents/market-review/2013-interim/full-review/english.pdf.
Accessed 14 March 2016.
Coates Palgrave, M. (2002). Trees of Southern Africa. Struik Publishers, Cape Town
Earth Point Corporation (2015) Earth Point: Tools for Google Earth. Idaho (USA).
http://www.earthpoint.us/Shapes.aspx. Accessed 14 March 2016.
Earth Point Corporation (2015) Earth Point: Tools for Google Earth. Idaho (USA).
http://www.earthpoint.us/Shapes.aspx. Accessed 22 March 2016.
ESKOM Transmission (2005). Transmission Bird Collision Guideline.

http://www.eskom.co.za/OurCompany/SustainableDevelopment/EnvironmentalImpactAssessments/Doc
uments/Birdcollision.pdf

Frost, P.G.H. (1996). The ecology of miombo woodlands. In: The Miombo in Transition:
Woodlands and Welfare in Africa (edited by B. Campbell), pp. 11-57. CIFOR, Indonesia.
Geological Society of Zimbabwe (1997) Zimbabwe geological map. 1: Google Earth (2016) Darwendale.
NOAA, Digital Globe 2016. Image date: 3 Oct 2013.
http://www.google.com/earth/index.html. Accessed 8 March 2016.
GDI (2014) Darwendale deposit geological prospecting and exploration program: 2014-2015. Great Dyke
Investments (Pvt) Ltd, Geological Department, Harare.
GDI-BC-DRA (2016) Preliminary information Darwendale Project. Great Dyke Investments P/L (GDI),
Geological Society of Zimbabwe (1997) Zimbabwe geological map. 1:
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management Act, Chapter 20:27 (2002), Government of

Zimbabwe. Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Effluent and Solid Waste Disposal) Regulations,
Statutory Instrument 6 of 2007, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Environmental Impact Assessment &

Ecosystems Protection) Regulations, Statutory Instrument 7 of 2007, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Hazardous Waste Management) Regulations,

Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Hazardous Substances, Pesticides and Other

Toxic Substances) Regulations, Statutory Instrument 12 of 2007, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Importation and Transit of Hazardous

Substances and Waste) Regulations, Statutory Instrument 77 of 2009, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Atmospheric Pollution Control) Regulations,

Statutory 72 of 2009, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental Management (Plastic Packaging and Plastic Bottles)

Regulations, Statutory Instrument 98 of 2010, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Environmental & Natural Resources Management (Prohibition and Control of
Ozone Depletion Substances & Ozone Depleting Substances Dependent Equipment) Regulations,

Government of Zimbabwe. Explosives Act, Chapter 10:08, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Explosives Regulations Statutory Instrument 72 of 1980, Government of

Government of Zimbabwe. Mines and Minerals Act, Chapter 21:05, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Mining (Management and Safety) Regulations, Statutory Instrument 109 of
1990, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Mines and Minerals Amendment Bill (2007), Government of Zimbabwe.
Harare, Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. National Museums & Monuments Act, Chapter 25:11, Government of
Government of Zimbabwe. Parks and Wild Life Act, Chapter 20:14, Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe. Water Act, Chapter 20:22 (2002). Government of Zimbabwe. Harare,
Zimbabwe
Government of Zimbabwe (2013) Zimbabwe Agenda for Sustainable Socio-Economic Transformation

(ZimAsset). Government of Zimbabwe, Harare, Zimbabwe.
Government of Zimbabwe (GoZ), Harare. http://www.zimtreasury.gov.zw/zim-asset. Accessed 14

March 2016.
Google Earth (2016) Darwendale. NOAA, Digital Globe 2016. Image date: 3 Oct 2013.
http://www.google.com/earth/index.html. Accessed 8 March 2016.
http://www.un.org/Depts/Cartographic/map/profile/zimbabwe.pdf. Accessed 03 December 2015.
http://archive.kubatana.net/docs/elec/zesn_constituency_profile_2008_elec_mashw_080326.pdf.
Accessed 03 March 2016
Izzett, M.R. 1974. Report on the Archaeological Survey of the new Darwendale Dam Basin. Rhodesian
Prehistory 13. pp.2-6.
International Council on Mining and Metals (CMM) 2008 Planning for Integrated Mine Closure.

International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN). 2015. Red List of Threatened Species.
https://www.iucn.org/about/work/programmes/species/data/red_list/
Landon, J.R. (1991) Booker Tropical Soil Manual. A handbook for soil survey and agricultural land
evaluation in the Tropics and Subtropics. John Wiley and Sons Inc, New York, USA.
Jones, N. 1949. The Prehistory of Southern Rhodesia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Jones N. & Bond G. 1948. The Lydiate Pebble Industry. Occasional paper of the National Museum of
Southern Rhodesia. No. 14.
Kirkpatrick, I.M. 1973. Report on a visit to the Hunyani-Darwendale Dam Basin. Rhodesian Prehistory
11. p.2
Knopf, E. 1975. Excavations on Hunyani Estate, Norton, Rhodesia. Rhodesian Prehistory 14. pp.12-15.
Mabiza, L. (2006) An overview of PGM Smelting in Zimbabwe – Zimplats Operations. In: Jones, R.T (ed.)
Southern African Pyrometallurgy, South African Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, Johannesburg, pp63-
76.
Makore, G. and Zano, V. (2012) Mining within Zimbabwe’s Great Dyke: Extent, impacts and opportunities.
Zimbabwe Environmental Law Association, Harare.
http://hrbcountryguide.org/wp-content/uploads/2013/10/Mining-within-Zimbabwes-Great-Dyke.pdf.
Accessed 14 March 2016.
Mapaure, A. (2002) Endemic plant species of Zimbabwe. Kirkia 18(1):117-148
Marshall, B.E. (1982) The fish of Lake McIlwaine. In J.A. Thornton et al. Lake McIlwaine: the
euthrophication and recovery of a tropical African lake, Monographiae Biologicae 49:156-188.The Hague,
Dr W Junk Publishers.
Mohammed, N.Z., Ghazi, A. and Mustafa, H.E. (2013) Positional accuracy testing of Google Earth.
International Journal of Multidisciplinary Sciences and Engineering, 4, 6-9.
http://www.ijmse.org/Volume4/Issue6/paper2.pdf. Accessed 25 May 2015.
Moyo, N.A.G. (1997). Ed. Lake Chivero: a polluted lake. University of Zimbabwe, Harare.
MSA Group (2014). JORC Compliant Mineral Resource Estimate and Scoping Study Ruschrome Mining
(Pty) Ltd Darwendale Platinum Group Metal Project Zimbabwe
Muringaniza, J.S. 2008. Archaeological and Cultural Impact Assessment - Ngezi Platinum Exploration.
Unpublished report for Global Platinum Resources Ngezi Platinum Exploration Report (Appendix A).
Okalebo, J.R., Gathua, K.W. and Woomer, P.L. (2002) Laboratory methods of soil and plant analysis: A

working manual, 2nd Edition. Tropical Soil Biology and Fertility Programme. Soil Society of East Africa
Technical Publication No. 1. Marvel EPZ (Kenya) Nairobi, Kenya.
Paredes-Hernández, C.U., Salinas-Castillo, W.E., Guevara-Cortina, F. and Martínez-Becerra, X. (2013)

Horizontal positional accuracy of Google Earth’s imagery over rural areas: a study case in Tamaulipas,
Mexico. Bol. Ciênc. Geod., sec. Artigos, Curitiba, 19 (4), 588-601.
http://www.scielo.br/pdf/bcg/v19n4/a05v19n4.pdf. Accessed 25 May 2015.
PRD (2011a) Norton Constituency Profile. Parliament Research Department (PRD), Parliament of
Zimbabwe, Harare.
PRD (2011b) Zvimba South Constituency Profile. Parliament Research Department (PRD), Parliament
of Zimbabwe, Harare.
Ramsar Convention Secretariat, 2010. Designating Ramsar Sites: Strategic Framework and guidelines
for the future development of the List of Wetlands of International Importance, Ramsar handbooks for the
wise use of wetlands, 4th edition, vol. 17. Ramsar Convention Secretariat, Gland, Switzerland.
Rauch, S. and Fatoki, O.S. (2015) Impact of platinum group element emissions from mining and
production activities. In: Zereini, F. and Wiseman, C.L.S. (eds.) Platinum Metals in the Environment,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, pp19-29.
Rauch, S. and Fatoki, O.S. (2013) Anthropogenic platinum enrichment in the vicinity of mines in the
bushveld igneous complex, South Africa. Water, Air and Soil Pollution, 224, DOI: 10.1007/s11270-012-
1395-y
Riddell, I. (2013). Chivero- Manyame Lakes bird checklist. Bird Life Zimbabwe, Harare.
Riddell, I. (2013). Chivero- Manyame Lakes bird checklist. Bird Life Zimbabwe, Harare.
Rockingham-Gill, D.V. (2015). Review of Waterbirds of Zimbabwe 2014 and 2015. Honeyguide 61(2):
97-119.
Roberts VII Multimedia. Birds of Southern Africa.

http://www.sabirding.co.za/roberts7/android.htmlwww.birdlifezimbabwe.org
Ross, S.M. (1994) Toxic Metals: fate and Distribution in Contaminated Ecosystems. In: Ross, S. M., Toxic
Metals in Soil-Plant Systems, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, England, pp. 189-244.
Rauch, S. and Fatoki, O.S. (2013) Anthropogenic platinum enrichment in the vicinity of mines in the
bushveld igneous complex, South Africa. Water, Air and Soil Pollution, 224, DOI: 10.1007/s11270-012-
1395-y
Rauch, S. and Fatoki, O.S. (2015) Impact of platinum group element emissions from mining and

production activities. In: Zereini, F. and Wiseman, C.L.S. (eds.) Platinum Metals in the Environment,
Springer-Verlag, Berlin, pp19-29.
Ross, S.M. (1994) Toxic Metals: fate and Distribution in Contaminated Ecosystems. In: Ross, S. M., Toxic
Metals in Soil-Plant Systems, John Wiley and Sons Ltd, England, pp. 189-244.
Rusli, N., Majid, M.R. and Din, A.H.M. (2014) Google Earth’s derived digital elevation model: A
comparative assessment with Aster and SRTM data. IOP Conf. Series: Earth and Environmental Science,
18, doi:10.1088/1755-1315/18/1/012065. http://iopscience.iop.org/1755-1315/18/1/012065/pdf/1755-
1315_18_1_012065.pdf. Accessed 25 May 2015.
Sharma, A. and Gupta, D. (2014) Derivation of topographic map from elevation data available in Google
Earth. Civil Engineering and Urban Planning: An International Journal, 1 (1), 14-21.
http://airccse.com/civej/papers/1114civej02.pdf. Accessed 25 May 2015.
Sinclair, I., Hockey, P., Tarboton, W., & Ryan, P. (2011). SASOL Birds of Southern Africa. Struik Nature,
Cape Town.
Soper, R. 2003. Rescue Excavation of a Later Iron Age site at Ngezi. Unpublished report for
Makwiro Platinum Mines.
Surveyor-General (1990) Norton 1730, Edition 3, 1:50,000. Government Printer, Harare.
Surveyor-General (1982) Makwiro 1730 C4, Edition 4, 1:50,000. Government Printer, Harare.
Surveyor-General (1982) Chibero College 1830 B1, Edition 1, 1:50:000. Government Printer, Harare.
Surveyor-General (1971) Selous 1830 A2, Edition 2, 1:50,000. Government Printer, Salisbury
(now Harare).
Swan, L. 1998. Archaeological Impact Assessment: Ngezi Platinum Project. Unpublished report for
SRK (Zimbabwe).
Swan, L. & Thorp, C. 1999. Archaeological Impact Assessment Proposed Ngezi Opencast Platinum Mine.
Unpublished report for SRK (Zimbabwe).
The Biodiversity Consultancy (2015). A cross sector guide for implementing the Mitigation Hierarchy.
Cross Sector Biodiversity Initiative (CSBI).
Tendapenyu,P.(2012). Nutrient limitation of phytoplankton in five impoundments on the Manyame River,

Zimbabwe. Water SA 38:97-104.
Thorp, C. 1994. Archaeological Environmental Impact Assessment: Unki Mine. Unpublished report. for
SRK (Zimbabwe).

Thorp, C. 1995. Archaeological Environmental Impact Assessment: Great Dyke 2 Shaft – North Dyke
Mines. Unpublished report for SRK (Zimbabwe).
Tree A.J. (1989). Results of the second Manyame Lakes waterbird survey – November 1988. Honeyguide
35:12-17.
TOMS Institute (2015a) Darwendale Deposit. Interim Report on Laboratory research to determine
flowsheet solutions and optimal parameters of comminution and processing operations on the ores from
Darwendale deposit, Volume 1: Study of material composition of the ore. TOMS Institute, City of Irkutsk
UN (2004) General maps: Zimbabwe. United Nations (UN) Geospatial Information Section.
http://www.un.org/Depts/Cartographic/map/profile/zimbabwe.pdf. Accessed 03 December
2015.Venema, J.H. (1998) Agro-ecological zones of Zimbabwe, Food and Agriculture Organisation of the
United Nations Regional Office, Harare.
Wild, H. & Fernandes,A. (1967). Vegetation Map of the Flora Zambesiaca Area. Supplement to Flora
Zambesiaca. M.O. Collins, Salisbury.
Wilson, A.H., A.J. Naldrett, and M. Tredoux. 1989. Distribution and controls of platinum group element
and base metal mineralization in the Darwendale subchamber of the Great Dyke, Zimbabwe. Geology
17:649-652.
Venema, J.H. (1998) Agro-ecological zones of Zimbabwe, Food and Agriculture Organisation of the
United Nations Regional Office, Harare.
ZESN (2008) Mashonaland West. In: A profile of constituencies: Understanding elections in Zimbabwe.
Zimbabwe Election Support Network (ZESN), Harare.

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A: GREAT DYKE INVESTMENTS COMPANY DOCUMENTS
1. Company Registration Certificate of Incorporation
2. Surface Mining Rights Certificate
3. Site of Works Plan submitted to the Ministry of Mines & Energy
4. Declaration by the Company Representative to Deal with Environmental Issues

APPENDIX B: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT AGENCY RESPONSES
1. Environmental Prospectus Review Response
2. Minutes of EIA Review Meeting

APPENDIX C: SRK TAILINGS DAM FEASIBILITY REPORT

APPENDIX D: BILL OF QUANTITIES

APPENDIX E: SURFACE WATER RESULTS FROM EMAL

APPENDIX F: GROUND WATER RESULTS FROM EMAL

APPENDIX G: SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

A2 Colours of air-dry and wet soils from the project site
# Position Sample Depth DRY CODE DRY COLOUR WET CODE WET COLOUR
1 5 1A 0-20 2.5YR2.5/4 dark reddish brown 2.5YR2.5/2 very dusky red
2 5 1B 30-50 2.5YR2.5/4 dark reddish brown 2.5YR2.5/2 very dusky red
3 6 2A 0-20 10YR3/1 very dark gray 2.5Y2/0 black
4 6 2B 30-50 5Y3/2 dark olive gray 5Y2.5/1 black
5 9 3A 0-20 2.5YR3/4 dark reddish brown 2.5YR2.5/2 very dusky red
6 9 3B 30-50 2.5YR4/4 reddish brown 2.5YR2.5/4 dark reddish brown
7 11 4A 0-20 5Y3/1 very dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
8 11 4B 30-50 2.5Y4/2 dark greyish brown 5Y2.5/2 black
9 15 5A 0-20 2.5YR3/0 very dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
10 15 5B 30-50 2.5Y4/0 dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
11 16 6A 0-20 5Y3/2 dark olive grey 5Y2.5/1 black
12 16 6B 30-50 5Y3/1 very dark grey 5Y2.5/1 black
13 17 7A 0-20 2.5Y3/0 very dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
14 17 7B 30-50 2.5Y4/0 dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
15 3 8A 0-20 10YR3/1 very dark grey 10YR2/1 black
16 3 8B 30-50 2.5Y3/2 very dark greyish brown 5Y2.5/2 black
17 24 9A 0-20 2.5YR2.5/4 dark reddish brown 2.5YR2.5/4 dark reddish brown
18 24 9B 30-50 * * * *
19 28 10A 0-20 10R3/4 dusky red 10R2.5/2 very dusky red
20 28 10B 30-50 10R4/8 red 10R3/3 dusky red
21 32 11A 0-20 2.5YR4/0 dark grey 2.5YR2.5/0 black
22 32 11B 30-50 2.5YR4/0 dark grey 2.5YR2.5/0 black
23 46 12A 0-20 5Y2.5/1 black 5Y2.5/1 black
24 46 12B 30-50 5YR4/2 dark reddish grey 5YR3/3 dark reddish brown
25 56 13A 0-20 5Y3/1 very dark grey 5Y2.5/1 black
27 67 14A 0-20 2.5YR4/0 dark grey 2.5YR2.5/0 black
28 67 14B 30-50 2.5Y3/0 very dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
29 70 15A 0-20 10YR4/2 dark greyish brown 10YR2/2 very dark brown
30 70 15B 30-50 5YR5/1 grey 5YR4/2 dark reddish grey
31 77 16A 0-20 5Y3/1 very dark grey 5Y2.5/1 black
33 77 16C 40-60 2.5Y4/0 dark grey 2.5Y3/0 very dark grey
34 77 16D 60-80 5Y4/1 dark grey 5Y2.5/1 black
35 77 16E 80-100 5Y4/1 dark grey 5Y2.5/1 black
36 77 16F 100-120 2.5Y3/0 very dark grey 2.5Y2/0 black
37 77 16G 120-140 2.5Y4/0 dark grey 2.5Y3/0 very dark grey
38 83 Last A 0-20 10YR3/6 dark yellowish brown 10R2.5/2 very dusky red
39 83 Last B 30-50 2.5YR3/6 dark red 10R3/3 dusky red

ESIA DARWENDALE REPORT DECEMBER
2016
Soil Analysis Results: Particle size distribution and Texture

Lab Field Depth Position
No. %Sand %Silt %Clay Texture
ID ID (cm) ID
1 M1 1A 00to20 5 52 15 33 Sandy clay loam
2 M2 1B 30to50 5 46 30 24 Clay loam
3 M3 2A 00to20 6 36 16 48 Clay
4 M4 2B 30to50 6 32 12 56 Clay
5 M5 3A 00to20 9 18 16 66 Clay
6 M6 3B 30to50 9 2 10 88 Clay
7 M7 4A 00to20 11 20 14 66 Clay
8 M8 4B 30to50 11 16 13 71 Clay
9 M11 6A 00to20 16 42 8 50 Clay
10 M12 6B 30to50 16 36 4 60 Clay
11 M13 7A 00to20 17 14 16 70 Clay
12 M14 7B 30to50 17 14 8 78 Clay
14 M16 8B 30to50 3 52 4 44 Sandy clay
15 M19 10A 00to20 28 18 24 58 Clay
16 M20 10B 30to50 28 2 12 86 Clay
17 M21 11A 00to20 32 34 34 32 Clay loam
18 M22 11B 30to50 32 32 24 44 Clay
20 M24 12B 30to50 46 66 20 14 Sandy loam
21 M25 13A 00to20 56 34 10 56 Clay
22 M26 13B 30to50 56 28 10 62 Clay
23 M27 14A 00to20 67 30 14 56 Clay
24 M28 14B 30to50 67 24 14 62 Clay
25 M29 15A 00to20 70 76 10 14 Sandy loam
26 M30 15B 30to50 70 79 9 12 Sandy loam
27 M31 16A 00to20 77 26 12 62 Clay
28 M32 16B 30to50 77 26 10 64 Clay
29 M18 Last A 00to20 83 12 30 58 Clay
30 M38 Last B 30to50 83 24 10 66 Clay
Soil Analysis Results: Electrical conductivity (EC), pH and Exchangeable Bases

pH Exch. Bases (cmolc/kg)
No. Lab ID Field ID Depth Position EC (µS/cm)
(in water) Ca Mg K Na
1 M1 1A 00to20 5 146 6.0 1.30 5.69 0.06 0.02
2 M2 1B 30to50 5 - - 1.38 6.30 0.03 0.01
3 M3 2A 00to20 6 48 6.1 12.81 6.48 0.06 0.08
4 M4 2B 30to50 6 - - 13.94 6.49 0.04 0.12
5 M5 3A 00to20 9 40 6.0 7.35 4.81 0.06 0.01
Caring for the environment beyond today I|P a g e

2016
6 M6 3B 30to50 9 - - 7.21 4.77 0.04 0.03

7 M7 4A 00to20 11 65 6.0 9.45 6.82 0.05 0.04
8 M8 4B 30to50 11 - - 9.41 6.95 0.04 0.06
9 M11 6A 00to20 16 99 7.0 13.11 6.81 0.13 0.52
10 M12 6B 30to50 16 - - 12.91 6.83 0.03 0.20
11 M13 7A 00to20 17 67 6.8 16.64 7.16 0.11 0.14
12 M14 7B 30to50 17 - - 15.58 7.25 0.04 0.12
13 M15 8A 00to20 3 70 6.5 7.98 6.29 0.53 0.03
14 M16 8B 30to50 3 - - 9.24 6.45 0.60 0.04
15 M19 10A 00to20 28 37 6.2 7.29 5.66 0.11 0.01
16 M20 10B 30to50 28 - - 6.10 4.78 0.03 0.01
17 M21 11A 00to20 32 188 7.9 12.70 2.07 0.06 0.08
18 M22 11B 30to50 32 - - 17.20 6.08 0.03 0.07
19 M23 12A 00to20 46 120 7.3 8.59 6.27 0.04 0.03
20 M24 12B 30to50 46 - - 8.21 6.33 0.02 0.02
21 M25 13A 00to20 56 49 6.9 12.77 7.48 0.07 0.05
22 M26 13B 30to50 56 - - 12.58 7.65 0.03 0.08
23 M27 14A 00to20 67 57 7.0 15.45 7.47 0.08 0.10
24 M28 14B 30to50 67 - - 15.62 7.52 0.03 0.09
25 M29 15A 00to20 70 114 5.4 1.39 0.80 0.08 0.03
26 M30 15B 30to50 70 - - 0.93 0.26 0.01 0.01
27 M31 16A 00to20 77 27 6.6 14.59 7.27 0.04 0.05
28 M32 16B 30to50 77 - - 14.73 7.26 0.03 0.07
29 M18 Last A 00to20 83 41 6.1 11.32 6.83 0.07 0.04
30 M38 Last B 30to50 83 26 6.2 10.77 5.76 0.04 0.03
Soil Analysis Results: Heavy metals and Relative Topsoil Enrichment (RTE) Indices
Mn Ni Cr Pb Cd RTE
No. Lab ID Field ID Depth Pos
------------------mg/kg----------------- Mn Ni Cr Pb
1 M1 1A 00to20 5 114.2 231 1552 9.3 ND 1.00 0.74 0.81 0.79
2 M2 1B 30to50 5 114.5 313.8 1914 11.7 ND
3 M3 2A 00to20 6 114.3 61.3 79 7.9 ND 1.00 0.92 0.81 1.05
4 M4 2B 30to50 6 114.2 66.4 97 7.5 ND
5 M5 3A 00to20 9 114.2 75.8 308 9.9 ND 1.00 1.05 1.07 1.02
6 M6 3B 30to50 9 113.8 72.1 289 9.7 ND
7 M7 4A 00to20 11 114.5 190.2 929 9.3 ND 1.00 1.19 1.18 1.50
8 M8 4B 30to50 11 114.3 159.6 786 6.2 ND
9 M11 6A 00to20 16 114.8 372.5 1598 8.9 ND 1.00 1.27 0.98 1.05
10 M12 6B 30to50 16 114.4 292.5 1628 8.5 ND
11 M13 7A 00to20 17 114.6 112.4 294 8 ND 1.00 0.98 0.98 0.87
12 M14 7B 30to50 17 114.7 114.7 301 9.2 ND
13 M15 8A 00to20 3 113.9 212.4 459 5.8 ND 1.00 0.80 0.76 0.88
Caring for the environment beyond today II | P a g e

2016
14 M16 8B 30to50 3 114 265.9 607 6.6 ND

15 M19 10A 00to20 28 114.5 64.5 206 8.5 ND 1.01 1.01 0.96 0.91
16 M20 10B 30to50 28 112.9 64 215 9.3 ND
17 M21 11A 00to20 32 111.8 18.9 24 13.1 ND 0.99 0.17 0.18 1.30
18 M22 11B 30to50 32 113.5 108.1 136 10.1 ND
19 M23 12A 00to20 46 113 254.8 567 4.7 ND 1.00 0.99 0.65 0.81
20 M24 12B 30to50 46 112.5 258.6 872 5.8 ND
21 M25 13A 00to20 56 114.3 295.9 1087 11 ND 1.00 0.86 0.80 0.96
22 M26 13B 30to50 56 114.1 344.7 1352 11.4 ND
23 M27 14A 00to20 67 114.1 219 272 8.5 ND 1.00 0.94 0.71 0.83
24 M28 14B 30to50 67 113.9 232.9 381 10.3 ND
25 M29 15A 00to20 70 13.8 2.5 36 0.7 ND 0.99 0.86 0.86 0.64
26 M30 15B 30to50 70 13.9 2.9 42 1.1 ND
27 M31 16A 00to20 77 113.9 227.4 295 11.5 ND 1.01 1.16 1.10 1.12
28 M32 16B 30to50 77 112.7 195.9 267 10.3 ND
29 M18 Last A 00to20 83 114.7 78.5 202 7.8 ND 1.02 1.14 0.97 1.10
30 M38 Last B 30to50 83 112.3 68.9 209 7.1 ND
Soil Analysis Results: Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC), Organic Carbon (OC), Calcium
to Magnesium molar ration and Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP)
Lab Field CEC E/C Ca/Mg
No. Depth Position %OC ESP
ID ID cmolc/kg ratio
1 M1 1A 00to20 5 7.06 21 1.26 0.23 0.22
2 M2 1B 30to50 5 7.72 32 - 0.22 0.11
3 M3 2A 00to20 6 19.43 40 2.07 1.98 0.43
4 M4 2B 30to50 6 20.60 37 - 2.15 0.60
5 M5 3A 00to20 9 12.23 19 1.62 1.53 0.07
6 M6 3B 30to50 9 12.04 14 - 1.51 0.22
7 M7 4A 00to20 11 16.37 25 2.01 1.38 0.25
8 M8 4B 30to50 11 16.46 23 - 1.35 0.34
9 M11 6A 00to20 16 20.58 41 2.25 1.92 2.52
10 M12 6B 30to50 16 19.98 33 - 1.89 1.01
11 M13 7A 00to20 17 24.05 34 1.59 2.32 0.57
12 M14 7B 30to50 17 22.99 29 - 2.15 0.52
13 M15 8A 00to20 3 14.83 44 2.01 1.27 0.18
14 M16 8B 30to50 3 16.34 37 - 1.43 0.27
15 M19 10A 00to20 28 13.07 23 2.1 1.29 0.10
16 M20 10B 30to50 28 10.91 13 - 1.28 0.06
17 M21 11A 00to20 32 14.92 47 2.7 6.14 0.57
18 M22 11B 30to50 32 23.38 53 - 2.83 0.29
19 M23 12A 00to20 46 14.93 48 1.95 1.37 0.20
20 M24 12B 30to50 46 14.58 104 - 1.30 0.13
Caring for the environment beyond today III | P a g e

2016
21 M25 13A 00to20 56 20.37 36 2.31 1.71 0.27

22 M26 13B 30to50 56 20.34 33 - 1.65 0.37
23 M27 14A 00to20 67 23.11 41 2.01 2.07 0.43
24 M28 14B 30to50 67 23.26 38 - 2.08 0.38
25 M29 15A 00to20 70 2.30 16 1.02 1.73 1.23
26 M30 15B 30to50 70 1.21 10 - 3.64 1.08
27 M31 16A 00to20 77 21.95 35 1.2 2.01 0.23
28 M32 16B 30to50 77 22.08 35 - 2.03 0.30
29 M18 Last A 00to20 83 18.26 31 2.31 1.66 0.20
30 M38 Last B 30to50 83 16.60 25 1.26 1.87 0.20
Soil Analysis Results: Soil bulk density (BD)

Core Field Position Moisture Content BD
No. ID ID (%) (kg/m3)
1 4 11 13.2 1630
2 6 16 16.5 1573
3 9 24 13.9 1456
4 10 28 14.4 1619
5 11 32 19.2 1450
6 12 46 17.5 1577
7 14 67 16.7 1617
8 Last 82 24.1 1542
Caring for the environment beyond today IV | P a g e

2016
APPENDIX H: VEGETATION DATA SHEETS
Caring for the environment beyond today V|P a g e

2016
APPENDIX I: BIRDS CHECKLIST
Caring for the environment beyond today I|P a g e

Download

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Download

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Download

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited

33 Bayswater Road Box 9111, Harare

Director – Environmental Protection

Dear Mr Chris Mushava

Please refer to the Public Consultation Report, Volume III.

ii. Approved Siting of Works Plan

vi. Dziva Rambuya Mhazvi

Mrs N. Mandaba (Pr. Sci. Nat)

PROJECT PROPONENT GREAT DYKE INVESTMENTS PRIVATE LIMITED

DATE JULY 2019

DOCUMENT TITLE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

EMA PROJECT NUMBER 8381

Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited

Great Dyke Investments Private Limited

ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL IMPACT

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT &

PUBLIC CONSULTATION REPORT

RESETTLEMENT & COMPENSATION ACTION

CULTURAL HERITAGE REPORT

Copyright © 2019 by Black Crystal Consulting (Private) Limited

Caring for the environment beyond today vi | P a g e

Project Name Darwendale Platinum Mine Project

Great Dyke Investments (Pvt) Ltd

Location of proposed development Darwendale, Chegutu, Mashonaland West Zimbabwe.

Company Profile Exploration and Mining of Platinum Group Metals (PGM)

Munashe Shava: Chief Operating Officer

EMA Project Identification

Report Date July 2019

Caring for the environment beyond today vii | P a g e

Black Crystal Consulting Private Limited EMA Reg. No. 8000068313

Contact Person : Ngoni Mandaba (Pr. Sci. Nat)

Caring for the environment beyond today viii | P a g e

DEFINITIONS AND INTERNATIONAL CONVENTIONS ............................................................................................... XX

Caring for the environment beyond today ix | P a g e

4.1 THE DO NOTHING ALTERNATIVE .................................................................................................................... 90

Caring for the environment beyond today x|P a g e

5.11.2 Roads Act, Chapter 13:18 ............................................................................................................... 124

Caring for the environment beyond today xi | P a g e

7.2.6 Potential dispute and possible sabotage of project .............................................................................. 240

Caring for the environment beyond today xii | P a g e

11 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................................. 262

Caring for the environment beyond today xiii | P a g e

Figure 20: Total Labour Split 87

Caring for the environment beyond today xiv | P a g e

Image 4: Potential Tailings Dam Sites 92

Caring for the environment beyond today xv | P a g e

Photo 40: Site 8 - Farming Community/Historical Site 212

Caring for the environment beyond today xvi | P a g e

LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

ABA Acid Based Accounting

ADT Articulated Dump Trucks

Agreement on the Conservation of African-Eurasian Migratory

AWC African Waterfowl Census

CEC Cation Exchange Capacity

CMS Convention on Migratory Species

CRS Coordinate Reference System

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EMA Environmental Management Agency

EMAL Environmental Management Agency Laboratory

EMP Environmental Management Plan